³common hazardous waste incinerator & other waste treatment...

PROPOSAL FOR OBTAINING ENVIRONMENTAL CLEARANCE

{Cat. A under Item 7 (d)’ Common hazardous waste treatment, storage & disposal facilities (TSDFs)}

FOR

“Common Hazardous Waste Incinerator &

Other Waste Treatment Facility”

Location: Plot No. D- 26, UPSIDC, Sikandarabad, District Bulandshahr, Uttar Pradesh

Plant Capacity:

S. N. Particular Capacity

a. Plot Area 0.1857 ha

b. Incinerator 10 MT/day

c. E-Waste 10 MT/day

d. Discarded Containers 10 MT/day

e. ETP 7 KLD

Work Order No.: 2019/04/001; Work Order Date: 09.04.2019

Baseline date Generation : December 2018 to February, 2019

Project cost : Rs. 2.0 Crore/-

APPLICANT ENVIRONMENTAL CONSULTANT

Sheetala Waste Management Project

#78/2, Gaur Plaza, Main G.T. Road, Lal Kuan

Gautam Buddha Nagar, Uttar Pradesh- 201002

E-mail: [email protected]@gmail.com

Project Incharge: Mr. Nishank Kaushik

Mob. No.: 9811664644

Gaurang Environmental Solutions Pvt Ltd

#102, SNG, Shri Ratna Apartment, Peetal factory,

Jhotwara road, Bani Park, Jaipur-302016

E-mail- [email protected]

NABET Accreditation: NABET/EIA/1720/IA0026

mailto:[email protected]@gmail.com

mailto:[email protected]

GAURANG ENVIRONMENTAL SOLUTIONS PVT. LTD.

SIMPLIFYING SUSTAINABILITY

Accredited EIA Consultant Organization by NABET, QCI, New Delhi at S. No. 69 in list of

Accredited EIA Consultant Organizations

(as on April , 2019)


Bani park, Jhotwara road, Jaipur-302016

E-mail: [email protected]


File. No. : 10-84/2018-IA-III

DATE:

To,

The Member Secretary, (INFRA-2)

Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change,

Indira Paryavaran Bhawan, Jor Bagh Road,

New Delhi- 110003

Sub:Regarding Environment Clearance for “Common Hazardous Waste Incinerator (10 MT/day) & Other

Waste {E-Waste (10 MT/day) & discarded containers (10 MT/day)} Treatment Facility” coming up at Plot No.

D- 26, UPSIDC, Sikandrabad Industrial Area, District Bulandshahr, Uttar Pradesh

Ref: 1. Proposal No. IA/UP/MIS/85302/2018

2. EDS by MoEF&CC dated 24.06.2019

Sir,Sir,

In regards to the above, the application for obtaining Environmental Clearance for the proposed “Common

Hazardous Waste Incinerator & Other Waste {E-Waste dismantling & segregation & recycling/reconditioning of

discarded containers} Treatment Facility” coming up at UPSIDC, Sikandrabad Industrial Area, District

Bulandshahr, Uttar Pradesh, was submitted on 01.06.2019 on MoEF&CC web portal, thereafter details sought in

regard to the project & their point wise reply is as given below:

1. The proposal is of Category A. The EIA Report is prepared by M/s Gaurang Environmental Solutions Pvt. Ltd.,

who is accredited by QCI for Category ‘B’ for item 7(d) Common hazardous waste treatment, storage and

disposal facilities (TSDFs). Kindly clarify the same.

Reply: M/s Gaurang Environmental Solutions Pvt. Ltd. (EIA consultant) is accredited by QCI for Category ‘B’ for

item 7(d) Common hazardous waste treatment, storage and disposal facilities (TSDFs); however, the EIA

consultant has already submitted the application for covering of sector and scope expansion with approved

expert under the NABET scheme & are expected to be accredited by QCI for the said sector soon. Document

regarding the same is enclosed as Annexure I. In the meanwhile, we request you to kindly consider our

case.

Also submit plan for Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER) as specified under Ministry’s Office

Memorandum vide F.No. 22-65/2017-IA.III dated 1st May 2018.

Reply:

CER Budget is Rs. 4.0 Lac/- @ 2% of the revised project cost i.e. Rs. 2.0 Crore/- as specified under Ministry’s

Office Memorandum vide F.No. 22-65/2017-IA.III dated 1st May 2018

CER Plan with Budgetary allocation is enclosed as Annexure II.

Also, we would like to bring to your kid attention that the Project Cost for the proposed project has been

revised and is now estimated to be Rs. 2.0 Crore/-

Kindly consider the same & grant us with Environmental Clearance at the earliest.

Yours Truly,

Project: “Common Hazardous Waste Incinerator & Other Waste Treatment Facility at UPSIDC,

Sikandrabad Industrial Area, District Bulandshahr, Uttar Pradesh

Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project

Gaurang Environmental Solutions Pvt. Ltd.

Final EIA/EMP Report for the “Common Hazardous Waste Incinerator & Other Waste

Treatment Facility”, located at UPSIDC, Sikandrabad Industrial Area, District

Bulandshahr, Uttar Pradesh

This report is released for the use of Sheetala Waste Management Project, regulators, and

relevant stakeholders solely as a part of the subject projects’ EIA studies. Information

provided in the report shall not be used for any other purpose without the written consent of

Gaurang Environmental Solutions P. Ltd.

QUALITY CONTROL

Project Name Final EIA/EMP Report for the “Common

Hazardous Waste Incinerator & Other Waste

Treatment Facility”

Report No. GESPL/SWM /EIA/258

Revision No. 01

Release Date 06.07.2019

EIA Coordinator Mr. Mallikarjuna Guttula/ Dr. Ratna Kr. Mudhliar

INDEMNIFICATION

Utmost care has been taken in preparation of this Report vis a vis proposed “Common

Hazardous Waste Incinerator & Other Waste Treatment Facility”, Bulandshahr. The data

incorporated in the report is generated through field visits as well as secondary information,

besides stakeholders interaction and inputs Due care has been taken to represent facts and

figures and sources acknowledged. The purpose of this document is to facilitate

environmental appraisal of the proposal and as such the exercise has been scientifically

carried out. The Consultant stand indemnified against any consequences arising out of any

inadvertent omissions.





DISCLOSURE OF THE CONSULTANT ENGAGED

Declaration by Experts contributing to the Project: Common Hazardous Waste Incinerator

& Other waste treatment facility at UPSIDC, Sikandrabad Industrial Area, District

Bulandshahr, Uttar Pradesh.

I hereby, certify that I was a part of the EIA team in the following capacity that developed the

above report

EIA Coordinator Distilleries 5 (g)-22

Name Mr. Mallikarjuna Guttula/ Dr. Ratna Kr. Mudhliar

Signature & Date

Period of involvement 2019 till date

Contact Information

Address Gaurang Environmental Solutions Pvt Ltd.

501, Soni’s Paris Point, Collectorate Circle,

Banipark, Jaipur 302016 (Raj)

Phone No. 0141-4029115

E-mail [email protected]

FUNCTIONAL AREA EXPERTS:

Functional

areas

Name of the

expert/s

Involvement (period and task**) Signature and date

AP*

Pawan Sut

Sharma

Ms. Ginni

Barotia

Selecting parameters for

monitoring.

Suggesting measures of reducing

fugitive emission.

Identifying and assessing quantum






of emissions

Identification of probable impacts

of the different air emissions from

the proposed project

Identification of suitable pollution

control device

WP* Mr.

Pradyumna

Arvind

Deshpande

Ms. Pooja

Bunker-

FAA

Designing of water balance and

developing schemes for cascading

use (recycle, reuse) of water


of effluent/ waste water discharges

in to the receiving environment/

water bodies

SHW* Ms. Ginni

Barotia

Suggesting Methodologies for

segregation and collection,

Transportation, Treatment &

Disposal of Biomedical Waste as

per Biomedical Waste

Management Rules, 2016.

Suggesting measures for handling

waste.

SE* Mr. Kapil

Sharma

Gajendra

Rathore

Mr. Vinod

Kumar

Verma-

FAA

Conducting baseline socio-

economic survey

Conduct social needs assessment

studies

Preparing need-based CSR plan.





EB* Mr.

Abhishek

Gautam

Dr. Yati

Kachhawa

To survey flora – fauna.

To identify ecologically important

areas around project location.

To identify threatened species in

the project area.

To identify impact of proposed

project on flora – fauna.

To recommend mitigations /

greenbelt development

Geo Mukesh

Suroliya

Mr. Vidya

Bhushan

Trivedi

Field Survey for assessing the

regional and local geology of the

area.

HG* Mukesh

Suroliya

Mr. Vidya

Bhushan

Trivedi

Analysis of surface hydrological

data

Computation of ground water

recharge, flow rate and direction.

SC* Mr.

Pradyumna

Arvind

Deshpande

Assessment of fertility/

productivity of soil, nutrient

availability

Controlling degradation of soil/soil

conservation

Effect of waste handling on soil

AQ* Mr.

Mallikarju

na Murthy

Guttula

Analyzing micro meteorological

data for use in modeling

Collecting and using secondary

data on meteorology like cloud

cover, inversion related data,





mixing heights etc., for modeling

Application of relevant air quality

models in prediction of dispersion

of pollutants,

Plotting of isopleths of GLCs

representing incremental pollution

levels, on suitable maps showing

both, the sources of pollution as

well as the environmentally

sensitive receptors.

NV* Haneesh

PR

Probable impacts of noise and

vibration

Impacts of noise and vibration on

fauna from projects in ecologically

sensitive areas

Control of noise emanating from

project activities.

LU* Mr. Kapil

Sharma

Mr. Vinod

Kumar

Verma-

FAA

Generation and analysis of data

related to land use pattern

Integration of land use related

data/ information for assessing

environmental impacts of

developmental projects

Assessment of land use and land

cover.

RH* Mr. Pawan

Sut

Sharma

Ms. Ginni

Barotia

Assessment and mitigation of

probable impacts.

Suggesting PPE for workers.

Measures for risk assessment.





Declaration by the Head of the accredited consultant organization/authorized

person

Declaration by the Head of the accredited consultant organization/authorized person

I, Vipul Khandelwal hereby confirm that the above mentioned experts prepared the EIA/EMP

report of “Common Hazardous Waste Incinerator & Other waste treatment facility at

UPSIDC, Sikandrabad Industrial Area, District Bulandshahr, Uttar Pradesh” promoted by

M/s Sheetala Waste Management for Environmental Clearance. I also confirm that the

consultant organization shall be fully accountable for any misleading information mentioned

in this statement.

Signature:

Name : Mr. Vipul Khandelwal

Designation : Director

Name of the EIA consultant organization : Gaurang Environmental Solutions Pvt Ltd

NABET Certificate no. & Issue Date : NABET/EIA/1720/IA0026: June 12, 2017

**********




INDEX

S. No PARTICULARS Page No.

A. Disclosure of Consultant i-vii

B. Terms of Reference & it’s compliance 1-11

1. Copy of Terms of References 2-7

2. Compliance of ToRs 8-11

C. FINAL EIA/EMP REPORT 12-306

Chapter I Introduction 13- 21

Chapter II Project description 22-60

Chapter III Anticipated environmental impacts & mitigation measures 61-148

Chapter IV Description of the environment 149-195

Chapter V Analysis of alternatives 196-202

Chapter VI Environmental monitoring program 203-214

Chapter VII Additional studies 215-244

Chapter VIII Project benefits 245-251

Chapter IX Environmental cost benefit analysis 252-254

Chapter X Environmental management plan 255-269

Chapter XI Summary & conclusion 270-284

Chapter XII Disclosure of consultants engaged 285-291

Chapter XIII Conformity to Rules 292-306

ANNEXURE 307-

I. Gazette notification regarding Industrial Area 308-319

II. NOC by UPSIDC regarding sub-let of lease 320-331

III. Letter dated 21.02.2019 acknowledged by SDO, UPPCL for

power supply

332-333

IV. Environmental Monitoring Reports 334-383

V. Board Resolution 384-385

VI. Undertaking by PP 386-387

VII. NABET certificate & accreditation status of EIA consultant 388-389

*****




S. No Table Page No.

Chapter I 1.1 Brief Description of Project & Facilities

1.2 Compliance to Terms of Reference

Chapter II 2.1 Site Connectivity

2.2 Land distribution at site

2.3 Project facilities

2.4 Water requirement & wastewater generation

2.5 Power requirement

2.6 Fuel requirement

2.7 Manpower requirement

2.8 List of Incinerable Hazardous Waste

2.9 Main components of Incinerator

2.10 Technical specifications of the incinerator & air pollution

control devices

2.11 ETP Outlet Parameters

2.12 Hazardous Waste Generation and its Disposal

Chapter III 3.1 Baseline period

3.2 List of Monitoring Locations

3.3 Land-Use Classification

3.4

3.5 Soil Analysis Results

3.6 Onsite Meteorological Data

3.7 Monitored parameters and frequency of sampling

3.8 Techniques used for ambient air quality monitoring

3.9 Summary of Ambient Air Quality Results

3.10 Status of Ground Water Development

3.11 Analytical Protocol followed for Water Quality

Monitoring and Analysis

3.12 Primary Water Quality Criteria for Designated-Best-Use-

Classes

3.13 Surface water monitoring locations

3.14 Ground water analysis result of the study area

3.15 Surface water analysis result of the study area

3.16 Noise Level as Per CPCB Norms

3.17 Noise levels of the study area

3.18 Demographic Profile of the Villages in the study area

3.19 Population of the study area




3.20 Male & Female of the Villages in the study area

3.21 Scheduled Caste Population of Study Area

3.22 Literate & Illiterate in the Villages of the Study Area

3.23 Literacy & Non- Literacy Status of the Study Area

3.24 Occupational Structure of Study Area

3.25 Employment Status of the Study

3.26 Existing basic facilities in the study area

3.27 Site Visit Observations with Remarks and Suggestions

3.28 Floral Species Enlisted from of Project Site

3.29 Trees Recorded from Buffer Zone Area

3.30 Shrubs Recorded from Buffer Zone Area

3.31 Herbs Recorded from Buffer Zone Area

3.32 Climbers Recorded from Buffer Zone Area

3.33 Grasses Recorded from Buffer Zone Area

3.34 Birds / Avifauna Reported from Buffer Zone

3.35 Mammals Reported from Buffer Zone

3.36 Herpetofauna Reported from Buffer Zone

Chapter IV 4.1 Construction Phase: Impact & Mitigation Measures

4.2 Identification of Impacts during Construction Phase

4.3 Prediction of Impacts during Construction Phase

4.4 Identification of impacts during operation phase

4.5 Prediction of Impacts during operation phase

4.6

(a)

Emission Factors for DG Set

4.6

(b)

Emission Factors for Incinerator (high energy scrubber)

4.7 Emission Estimates for Point Sources

4.8 Maximum Ground level concentrations of Pollutants

4.9 Results of Air Modelling

4.10 Incremental concentration of pollutants on sampling

locations

4.11 Operation Activity, Impact & Mitigation Measures

4.12 Rain Fall Data (last 5years)

4.13 Calculation for Rain Water Harvesting Structures

4.14 Calculation of annual recharge

4.15 Biological Consequences Scoring Scheme




4.16 Occurrence Frequency Assessment

4.17 Categorization of Biological Impacts

4.18 Identification of Likely Impacts

4.19 Biological Impact Scoring

4.20 Likely Impacts and Mitigation Measures

4.21 List of plant species for Plantation in Impact Zone

4.22 Budget for Additional Greenbelt and Biodiversity

Conservation

Chapter V 5.1 Comparison between the different technologies of

Incinerator

Chapter VI 6.1 Environmental Monitoring Program

6.2 Implementation Schedule

6.3 Monitoring Schedule

Chapter VII 7.1 Potential Hazards of Exposure to Thermal Radiation

7.2 Effect of Overpressure

7.3 Potential Hazards of Over Pressurization

7.4 Details of Pumps

7.5 Personnel Protective Equipment

Chapter VIII 8.1 Issues in the Study Area and the Mitigation

measures suggestion through CSR activities

8.2 CER Activities with Budgetary Allocation

Chapter X 10.1 Plant Species Suggested for Greenbelt Development in the

Project Site

10.2 Fragrant Plant Species Suggested for Odor Suppression

10.3 Budget Allocation for Greenbelt Development

10.4 Monitoring Schedule

10.5 Annual Expenditure of Environmental Protection

Measures

Chapter XI 11.1 Brief Details of Project

11.2 Project Requirement

11.3 Onsite Meteorological Data

11.4 Activity, Impact & Mitigation Measures

Chapter XIII 13.1 Conformity to Hazardous & Other Waste

(Management & Trans-boundary Movement) Rules 2016

13.2 Action plan for performance evaluation and monitoring of


****


Sikandrabad Industrial Area, District Bulandshahr, Uttar Pradesh”


Copy of

Terms of Reference

F. No.

Government of India Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change

(IA.III Section)

Indira Paryavaran Bhawan, Jor Bagh Road, New Delhi - 3

Date: 18th December, 2018 To,

M/s Sheetala Waste Management,

78/2, Gaur Plaza, Main G.T. Road, Lal Kaun, Gautam Baudh Nagar -201002, Uttar Pradesh E- Mail: sheetalawaste1gmail.com

Subject: Installation of Common Hazardous waste incinerator of capacity 10 MT/day at Plot No. D 26, UPSIDC, industrial State Sikandrabad

District Bulandshahr, Uttar Pradesh by M/s Sheetala Waste Management - Terms of Reference - reg.

Sir,

This has reference to your proposal No. IA/UP/MIS/85302/2018 dated 13th November, 2018, submitted to this Ministry for seeking Terms of Reference (ToR) in

terms of the provisions of the Environment Impact Assessment (EIA) Notification, 2006 under the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986.

2. The proposal for grant of Terms of Reference (ToR) to the project 'Installation

of Common Hazardous waste incinerator of capacity 10 MT/day at Plot No. D 26, UPSIDC, industrial State Sikandrabad District Bulandshahr, Uttar Pradesh promoted by M/s Sheetala Waste Management, was considered by the Expert Appraisal Committee (Infra-2) in its 36th meeting held on 26-28 November, 2018.

3. The details of the project, as per the documents submitted by the project proponent, and also as informed during the above said meeting, are as under:-

(i) M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project has proposed Installation of Common Hazardous waste incinerator of capacity 10 MT/day at Plot No. D 26, UPSIDC, industrial State Sikandrabad, District Bulandshahr, Uttar Pradesh. Latitude 28°28'01.40" N and Longitude 77°39'48.91" E.

(ii) Total population of the proposed project will be 15 which include the population of 10 labours & 05 staffs.

(iii) The total water requirement for the entire project has been estimated to be 4 KLD. This includes domestic water requirement and flushing. Ground water will be extracted from 2 nos. of existing bore wells with prior permission from CGWB.

(iv) The total electrical load demand has been estimated to be 100 KW for the proposed project. The source of power will be from UPPCL.

(v) In case of power failure, DG sets of total capacity of 420 KVA (3x125+ 3x15) for the proposed project will be provided as power back-up.

Proposal No. IA/UP/MIS/85302/2018

Page 1 of 5

(vi) The domestic solid waste will be generated by the project will pertain to the

Bio-degradable& Non-biodegradable Waste. It is estimated that maximum solid waste generation from entire project would be about 5 kg/day.

4. The project/activity is covered under category 'A' of item 7 (d) i.e. 'Common hazardous waste treatment, storage and disposal facilities (TSDFs)' of the schedule to the EIA Notification, 2006 and its subsequent amendments, and requires

appraisal at Central level.

5. The EAC, in its meeting held on 26-28 November, 2018, after detailed deliberations, recommended the project for grant of ToR as specified by the Ministry as Standard ToR in April, 2015 for the said project/activity and the following TOR in

addition to Standard ToR for preparation of EIA-EMP report. As per the recommendation of the EAC, the Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate

Change hereby accords ToR to the project 'Installation of Common Hazardous waste incinerator of capacity 10 MT/day at Plot No. D 26, UPSIDC, industrial State

Sikandrabad District Bulandshahr, Uttar Pradesh promoted by M/s Sheetala Waste Management, for preparation of the Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) Report and Environmental Management Plan (EMP) with the following specific and general

conditions in addition to Standard ToR provided at Annexure -1:

(I) Importance and benefits of the project.

(ii) The E.I.A. would address to the conformity of site to the stipulations as made in the Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016 and will have a complete chapter indicating

conformity to the said rules.

(iii) Project proponents would also submit a write up on how their project proposal conform to the stipulations made in the "Protocol for Performance evolution and monitoring of the Common Hazardous Waste Treatment Storage and

Disposal facilities including common Hazardous Waste incinerators",

published by the CPCB on May 24, 2010.

(iv) Compliance to the conditions of the consent to operate and authorization for

the existing facilities. The EIA will discuss the compliance to the Pollution Control Laws and the notifications under the E.P. Act 1986 and get a certified

report from the Pollution Control Board.

(v) Details of various waste management units with capacities for the proposed

project.

(vi) List of waste to be handled and their source along with mode of

transportation.

(vii) Other chemicals and materials required with quantities and storage capacities.

(viii) Details of temporary storage facility for storage of hazardous waste at project

site.

(ix) Details of pre-treatment facility of hazardous waste at TSDF.

(x) Details of air emissions, effluents, hazardous/solid waste generation and their

management.

Proposal No. IA/UP/MIS/85302/2018 Page 2 of 5

(xi) Requirement of water, power, with source of supply, status of approval, water balance diagram, man-power requirement (regular and contract).

(xii) Process description along with major equipments and machineries, process flow sheet (quantitative) from waste material to disposal to be provided.

(xiii) Hazard identification and details of proposed safety systems.

(xiv) Details of Drainage of the project up to 5 km radius of study area. If the site is within 1 km radius of any major river, peak and lean season river discharge as well as flood occurrence frequency based on peak rainfall data of the past 30 years. Details of Flood Level of the project site and maximum Flood Level of the river shall also be provided.

(xv) Ground water quality monitoring in and around the project site.

(xvi) The Air Quality Index shall be calculated for base level air quality.

(xvii) Status of the land purchases in terms of land acquisition Act and study the impact.

(xviii) Status of acquisition of land. If acquisition is not complete, stage of the acquisition process and expected time of complete possession of the land.

(xix) R&R details in respect of land in line with state Government policy.

(xx) Details of effluent treatment and recycling process.

(xxi) Leachate study report and detailed leachate management plan to be incorporated.

(xxii) Action plan for measures to be taken for excessive leachate generation during monsoon period.

(xxiii) Detailed Environmental Monitoring Plan.

(xxiv) Action plan for any pollution of ground water is noticed during operation period or post closure monitoring period.

(xxv) A certificate of adequacy of available power from the agency supplying power to the project along with the load allowed for the project.

(xxvi) The EMP would also include proposals for creating a solar Power generation farm.

(xxvii) A detailed Plan for green belt development. Impact of tree felling, if any, along with a management plan.

(xxviii) A certificate from the local body supplying water, specifying the total annual water availability with the local authority, the quantity of water already committed, the quantity of water allotted to the project under consideration

and the balance water available. This should be specified separately for ground water and surface water sources, ensuring that there is no impact on other users.

(xxix) The project proponents shall satisfactorily address to all the complaints/suggestions that have been received against the project till the date of submission of proposals for Appraisal.

Proposal No. IA/UP/MIS/85302/2018

Page 3 of 5

(xxx) Any litigation pending against the project and/or any direction/order passed by any Court of Law against the project, if so, details thereof shall also be

included.

(xxxi) The project proponents shall satisfactorily address to all the

complaints/suggestions that have been received against the project till the

date of submission of proposals for Appraisal.

(xxxii) Plan for Corporate Environment Responsibility (CER) as specified under

Ministry's Office Memorandum vide F.No. 22-65/2017-IA.III dated 1st May

2018 shall be prepared and submitted along with EIA Report.

(xxxiii) A tabular chart with index for point wise compliance of above ToRs.

General Guidelines

The EIA document shall be printed on both sides, as for as possible.

(ii) All documents should be properly indexed, page numbered.

(iii) Period/date of data collection should be clearly indicated.

(iv) Authenticated English translation of all material provided in Regional

languages.

(v) The letter/application for EC should quote the MoEF&CC File No. and also

attach a copy of the letter prescribing the ToR.

(vi) The copy of the letter received from the Ministry on the ToR prescribed for the project should be attached as an annexure to the final EIA-EMP Report.

(vii) The final EIA-EMP report submitted to the Ministry must incorporate the issues mentioned in ToR and raised in public hearing. The index of the final EIA-EMP report, must indicate the specific chapter and page no. of the EIA-EMP Report where the specific ToR prescribed by the Ministry.

Questionnaire related to the project (posted on MoEF&CC website) with all sections duly filled in shall also be submitted at the time of applying for EC.

(viii) Grant of ToR does not mean grant of EC.

(ix) The status of accreditation of the EIA consultant with NABET/QCI shall be specifically mentioned. The consultant shall certify that his accreditation is for

the sector for which this EIA is prepared.

(x) On the front page of EIA/EMP reports, the name of the consultant/consultancy firm along with their complete details including their accreditation, if any shall be indicated. The consultant while submitting the EIA/EMP report shall give an undertaking to the effect that the prescribed ToRs (ToR proposed by the project proponent and additional ToR given by the MoEF&CC) have been complied with and the data submitted is factually correct (Refer MoEF&CC Office memorandum dated 4th August, 2009).

(xi) While submitting the EIA/EMP reports, the name of the experts associated with/involved in the preparation of these reports and the laboratories through which the samples have been got analysed should be stated in the report. It

shall clearly be indicated whether these laboratories are approved under the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986 and the rules made there under (Please


11. This issues with the approval of the Competent Authority.

Copy to:

\\)

(Kushal Vashist)

Director

refer MoEF&CC Office Memorandum dated 4th August, 2009). The project leader of the EIA study shall also be mentioned.

(xii) All the ToR points as presented before the Expert Appraisal Committee (EAC) shall be covered.

6. The above ToR should be considered for the project 'Installation of Common Hazardous waste incinerator of capacity 10 MT/day at Plot No. D 26, UPSIDC, industrial State Sikandrabad District Bulandshahr, Uttar Pradesh promoted by M/s Sheetala Waste Management, in addition to all the relevant information as per the `Generic Structure of EIA' given in Appendix III and IIIA in the EIA Notification, 2006.

7. Public hearing is exempted as per para 7(i) III Stage (3)(i)(b) of EIA Notification, 2006 for preparation of EIA/EMP report, being site is located in the notified industrial area.

8. The project proponent shall submit the detailed final EIA/EMP prepared as per ToRs along with public hearing to the Ministry for considering the proposal for environmental clearance within 3 years as per the MoEF&CC O.M. No.J-11013/41/2006-1A-11(1) (P) dated 08.10.2014.

9. The consultants involved in preparation of EIA/EMP report after accreditation with Quality Council of India/National Accreditation Board of Education and Training

(QCUNABET) would need to include a certificate in this regard in the EIA/EMP

reports prepared by them and data provided by other Organization(s)/ Laboratories including their status of approvals etc. vide Notification of the MoEF&CC dated 19.07.2013.

10. The prescribed ToR would be valid for a period of three years for submission of the EIA/EMP Reports.

The Member Secretary, Uttar Pradesh Pollution Control Board, Building. No. TC-12V, Vibhuti Khand, Gomti Nagar, Lucknow-226 010.


An nexure-I

7(d): STANDARD TERMS OF REFERENCE FOR CONDUCTING ENVIRONMENT

IMPACT ASSESSMENT STUDY FOR COMMON HAZARDOUS WASTE

TREATMENT, STORAGE AND DISPOSAL FACILITIES (TSDFS) AND

INFORMATION TO BE INCLUDED IN EIA/EMP REPORT

1) Reasons for selecting the site with details of alternate sites

examined/rejected/selected on merit with comparative statement and

reason/basis for selection. The examination should justify site suitability in terms

of environmental damages, resources sustainability associated with selected

site as compared to rejected sites. The analysis should include parameters considered along with weightage criteria for short-listing selected site.

2) Submit the details of the road/rail connectivity along with the likely impacts and mitigative measures

3) Submit the present land use and permission required for any conversion such as forest, agriculture etc

4) Examine the details of transportation of Hazardous wastes, and its safety in handling.

5) Examine and submit the details of on line pollutant monitoring.

6) Examine the details of monitoring of Dioxin and Furon.

7) MoU for disposal of ash through the TSDF.

8) MoU for disposal of scrubbing waste water through CETP.

9) Examine and submit details of monitoring of water quality around the landfill site.

10) Examine and submit details of the odour control measures.

11) Examine and submit details of impact on water body and mitigative measures during rainy season.

12) Environmental Management Plan should be accompanied with Environmental Monitoring Plan and environmental cost and benefit assessment. Regular monitoring shall be carried out for odour control.

13) Water quality around the landfill site shall be monitored regularly to examine the impact on the ground water.

14) The storage and handling of hazardous wastes shall be as per the Hazardous Waste Management Rules.

15) Submit details of a comprehensive Disaster Management Plan including emergency evacuation during natural and man-made disaster.

16) Public hearing to be conducted for the project in accordance with provisions of Environmental Impact Assessment Notification, 2006 and the issues raised by the public should be addressed in the Environmental Management Plan. The Public Hearing should be conducted based on the ToR letter issued by the Ministry and not on the basis of Minutes of the Meeting available on the web-

site

17) A detailed draft EIA/EMP report should be prepared in accordance with the above additional TOR and should be submitted to the Ministry in accordance

with the Notification.

18) Details of litigation pending against the project, if any, with direction /order passed by any Court of Law against the Project should be given.

19) The cost of the Project (capital cost and recurring cost) as well as the cost

towards implementation of EMP should be clearly spelt out.

20) Any further clarification on carrying out the above studies including anticipated impacts due to the project and mitigative measure, project proponent can refer

to the model ToR available on Ministry website

http://moetnic.in/Manual/Incinerator




Compliance of

Terms of Reference




Gaurang Environmental Solutions Pvt. Ltd. Page 1.1

Report Ref: GESPL/SWM /EIA/258 Rev No. 01

Compliance of Terms of Reference

The compliance of Terms of Reference (regulatory scoping carried out as per TOR) in

following Table-1:

Table – 1: Compliance to Terms of Reference

S. No. Terms of Reference Points Compliance Pg. ref. in Final

EIA/EMP

report

A Specific Conditions

i.

Importance and benefits of the

project.

The same is detailed in Chapter VIII of the

EIA/ EMP report.

Chapter.-VIII

ii. The EIA would address to the

conformity of site to the

stipulations as made in the

Hazardous and Other Wastes

(Management and

Transboundary Movement)

Rules, 2016 and will have a

complete chapter indicating


Justification for site selection is given in

Chapter II

Details of the project conforming to

Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management

and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016

are given in Chapter XIII.

Chapter II

Chapter XIII

iii. Project proponents would also

submit a write up on how

their project proposal conform

to the stipulations made in the

“Protocol For Performance

evaluation and monitoring of

the Common Hazardous

Waste Treatment Storage and

Disposal facilities including

common Hazardous Waste

incinerators”, published by

the CPCB on May 24, 2010.

Details conforming to contents of para iii are

given in Chapter XIII.

Chapter XIII






iv. Compliance to the conditions

of the consent to operate and

authorization for the existing

facilities. The EIA will

discuss the compliance to the

Pollution Control Laws and

the notifications under the

E.P. Act 1986 and get a

certified report from the

Pollution Control Board.

This is a proposed project therefore contents

of para iv are not applicable

-

v. Details of various waste

management units with

capacities for the proposed

project.

The proposed project is a common facility

for:

S.

No.

Particular Capacity

(MT/Day)

1. Hazardous waste

incinerator

10

2. E-waste dismantling &

segregation

10

3. Recycling/Reconditioning

of discarded containers

10

ETP of capacity 7.0 KLD is proposed for

treatment of effluent generated from

various waste treatment operations.

Chapter II,

vi. List of waste to be handled

and their source along with

mode of transportation.

The project is proposed for treatment of

hazardous incinerable waste, E-Waste

(dismantling & segregation) and discarded

container waste generated from various

industries in Bulandshahr, Greater Noida,

Noida, Ghaziabad, Meerut, Saharanpur and

Aligarh in Uttar Pradesh.

Details of waste to be handled and their

source along with mode of transportation are

given in Chapter II.

Chapter II,

vii. Other chemicals and materials HSD will be used for DG set and HSD/LDO Chapter II






required with quantities and

storage capacities.

will be used for incinerator. Fuel

consumption & storage details are given in

Chapter II.

viii. Details of temporary storage

facility for storage of

hazardous waste at project

site.

Hazardous waste will be temporarily stored in

covered storage shed inside plant premises as

per guidelines.

Details are given in Chapter II.

Chapter II

ix. Details of pre-treatment

facility of hazardous waste at

TSDF.

Pre-treatment of hazardous waste & selection

of technology for the same will depend on the

nature & physical properties of waste,

available options for technology, cost etc.

Analytical laboratory for sampling & analysis

for the same will be provided at the site.


Chapter II

x. Details of air emissions,

effluents, hazardous/solid

waste generation and their

management.

Details of air emissions, effluent generation,

hazardous/solid waste generation are

presented in Chapter II.

Mitigation measures for the same have been

detailed in Chapter IV.

Chapter II, Pg.

No. ___

Chapter IV, Pg.

No. ___

xi. Requirement of water, power,

with source of supply, status

of approval, water balance

diagram, man-power

requirement (regular &

contract).

Particulars Qty Source

Water 4.0 KLD

(fresh)

Tanker Supply

Power 100 KW UPPCL

Back-up:

DG Set 9420 kVA)

Manpower 15 Preference to locals

as per eligibility

Details regarding source & approval status

along with water balance diagram are given

in Chapter II

Chapter II

xii. Process description along

with major equipments and

machineries, process flow

Details of the process along with major

equipments, machineries & process flow

sheet are given in Chapter II.

Chapter II






sheet (quantitative) from

waste material to disposal to

be provided.

xiii. Hazard identification and

details of proposed safety

systems.

Hazard identification and details of proposed

safety systems are given in Chapter VII.

Chapter VII

xiv. Details of drainage of the

project up to 5 km radius of

study area. If the site is within

1 km radius of any major

river, peak and lean season

river discharge as well as

flood occurrence frequency

based on peak rainfall data of

the past 30 years. Details of

flood level of the project site

and maximum flood level of

the river shall also be

provided.

Following water bodies are present in 5.0 km

radius of proposed project site:

1. Sikandrabad distributary ~ 2.3 km ENE

2. Ganga Canal ~ 4.0 km WSW

There is no major river within 1.0 km radius

of the proposed project site


Chapter II

xv. Ground water quality

monitoring in and around the

project site.

Baseline study including ground water quality

monitoring has been carried out during

December, 2018 to February 2019, as per

guidelines.

Details are given in Chapter III.

Chapter III

xvi. The Air Quality Index shall

be calculated for base level air

quality.

The Air quality index calculated for data

collected during study period (maximum of

average) for all the 08 nos. monitoring

stations in 10 km radius area is 308

{301-400: very poor}

-

xvii. Status of land purchase in

terms of land acquisition Act

and study the impact.

The land for proposed project located in

UPSIDC, Sikandrabad industrial area has

been sub-let on lease to the project proponent

by the allottee M/s. V.C. Plastic (P) Ltd.

NOC in this regard by UPSIDC is enclosed as

Annexure II






Annexure II.

xviii. Status of acquisition of land.

If acquisition is not complete,

stage of the acquisition

process and expected time of

complete possession of the

land

No acquisition of land is required for the

proposed project. Therefore, Contents of para

xviii are not applicable.

-

xix. R&R details in respect of land

in line with state Government

policy.

R&R is not applicable for the proposed

project.

-

xx. Details of effluent treatment

and recycling process.

About 3.14 KLD of effluent is envisaged to

be generated from various operations in the

proposed waste treatment facility. The same

will be treated in ETP of 7.0 KLD proposed

in plant premises. Treated water will be re-

used within the plant for various activities.


Chapter II

xxi. Leachate study report and

detailed leachate management

plan to be incorporated.

Landfill site has not been proposed in the

project. Covered storage & impervious

flooring will be provided in all the areas

where handling/storage of waste will be done.

Hazardous waste will be stored as per

applicable rules & guidelines.


Chapter II

xxii. Action plan for measures to

be taken for excessive

leachate generation during

monsoon period

Landfill site is not proposed in the project.

Adequate measures will be taken for storage

& handling of waste to avoid any leachate

generation as per Hazardous & Other Waste

(Management & Transboundary Movement)

Rules, 2016.


Chapter II

xxiii. Detailed Environmental

Monitoring Plan.

Environmental Monitoring Plan prepared in

accordance to CPCB guidelines is given in

Chapter VI.

Chapter VI,






xxiv. Action plan for any pollution

of ground water is noticed

during operation period or

post closure monitoring

period.

Adequate measures will be taken to prevent

pollution of ground water due to project

activities. No waste water will be discharged

outside plant premises.

All the waste storage areas will be properly

covered & lined to ensure no leachate or

hazardous chemical percolates to soil &

ground water.

Ground water quality monitoring will be

carried out periodically & report submitted as

per CPCB guidelines.

Chapter IV

xxv. A certificate of adequacy of

available power from the

agency supplying power to

the project along with the load

allowed for the project.

The power requirement for the project is 100

KW to be sourced from UPPCL.

Letter dated 21.02.2019 acknowledged by

S.D.O, UPPCL for assurance of power

supply, is enclosed as Annexure III.

Annexure III

xxvi. The EMP would also include

proposals for creating a solar

Power generation farm.

The project area is 1857 sq. m. adequate for

the proposed waste treatment facilities. Solar

power generation farm is not feasible in the

project area.

-

xxvii. A detailed plan for green belt

development. Impact of tree

felling, if any, along with a

management plan.

Greenbelt development plan is given in given

in Chapter X.

No trees will be cut for the proposed project.

Chapter X

xxviii. A certificate from the local

body supplying water,

specifying the total annual

water availability with the

local authority, the quantity of

water already committed, the

quantity of water allotted to

the project under

consideration and the balance

water available. This should

Total daily water requirement for the project

is 7.0 KLD including daily fresh water

requirement of 4.0 KLD which will be met

through tanker supply from nearby area.

No ground water or surface water will be

used for the project.

-






be specified separately for

ground water and surface

water sources, ensuring that

there is no impact on other

users.

xxix. The project proponents shall

satisfactorily address to all the

complaints/suggestions that

have been received against the

project till the date of

submission of proposals for

Appraisal.

No complaints/ suggestions have been

received for the proposed project till date.

-

xxx. Any litigation pending against

the project and/or any

direction/order passed by any

Court of Law against the

project, if so, details thereof

shall also be included

Affidavit for no litigation pending against the

project is enclosed as Annexure VI.

Annexure VI

xxxi. The project proponents shall






Appraisal.

No complaints/ suggestions have been

received for the proposed project till date.

-

xxxii. Plan for Corporate

Environment Responsibility

(CER) as specified under

Ministry’s Office

memorandum vide F. No. 22-

65/2017-IA.III dated 1st

May

2018 shall be prepared and

submitted along with EIA

Report.

Plan for Corporate Environment

Responsibility (CER) in line with

MoEF&CC’s OM dated 01.05.2018 is given

in Chapter VIII.

Chapter VIII






xxxiii. A tabular chart with index for

point wise compliance of

above ToRs.

The contents of para xxxiii are noted and

have been complied with.

-

B. Standard Terms of Reference for conducting EIA study for Common Hazardous Waste

Treatment, Storage and Disposal Facilities (TSDFs) And Information to be included in

EIA/EMP Report

1) Reasons for selecting the site

with details of alternate sites

examined/rejected/selected on

merit with comparative

statement and reason/basis for

selection. The examination

should justify site suitability

in terms of environmental

damages, resources

sustainability associated with

selected site as compared to

rejected sites. The analysis

should include parameters

considered along with

weightage criteria for short

listing selected site.

The project is for Common facility for

Hazardous Waste incinerator, E- Waste

dismantling & segregation and

recycling/reconditioning of discarded

containers, proposed at UPSIDC,

Sikandrabad Industrial Area.


Chapter II.

Chapter II

2) Submit the details of the

road/rail connectivity along

with the likely impacts and

mitigative measures.

Site connectivity is detailed in Chapter II.

Anticipated impacts on environment &

mitigation measures are detailed in Chapter

IV.

Chapter II,

Chapter IV,

3) Submit the present land use

and permission required for

any conversion such as forest,

agriculture etc.

No conversion of land is required as the

proposed project site is a parcel of land,

presently not being used for any activity,

located at UPSIDC, Sikandrabad Industrial

Area.

-

4) Examine the details of

transportation of Hazardous

wastes, and its safety in

Details of handling & transportation of

Hazardous Wastes to be done as per

Hazardous & Other Waste (Management &

Chapter II,






handling. Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016, are


5) Examine and submit the

details of on line pollutant

monitoring.

Environmental monitoring program is

detailed in Chapter VI.

Chapter VI,


monitoring of Dioxin and

Furan.

Environmental monitoring program including

that for dioxin & furan is detailed in Chapter

VI.

Chapter VI,

7) MoU for disposal of ash

through the TSDF.

MoU for disposal of incineration ash

generated at the facility will be done with

nearest authorized TSDF.

-

8) MoU for disposal of

scrubbing waste water

through CETP.

The scrubbing waste water will be treated in

ETP (capacity 7.0 KLD) proposed within the

project premises & treated water will be re-

circulated for vehicle washing & scrubbing &

other project activities.

-

9) Examine and submit details of

monitoring of water quality

around the landfill site.

No landfill site is proposed in the project.



December 2018 to February, 2019 & details

given in Chapter III.

Chapter III,


the odour control measures.

Details of the odour control measures are

given in Chapter IV of this EIA-EMP report.

Chapter IV,


impact on water body and

mitigative measures during

rainy season.

Details of impact on water body due to the

proposed project & mitigation measures have

been detailed in Chapter IV.

Chapter IV,

12) Environmental Management

Plan should be accompanied

with Environmental

Monitoring Plan and

environmental cost and

benefit assessment. Regular

Environmental Management Plan is detailed

in Chapter X.

Environmental Monitoring Plan along with

budget for environment management plan is

given in Chapter VI.

Chapter X,

Chapter VI,






monitoring shall be carried

out for odour control.

13) Water quality around the

landfill site shall be monitored

regularly to examine the

impact on the ground water.

No landfill site has been proposed in the

project.

Ground water quality monitoring plan has

been prepared as per CPCB guidelines and


Chapter VI,

14) The storage and handling of

hazardous wastes shall be as

per the Hazardous Waste

Management Rules

The Storage and Handling of Hazardous

Waste will be done as per the Hazardous &

Other Waste (Management & Transboudanry

Movement) Rules, 2016.

-

15) Submit details of a

comprehensive Disaster

Management Plan including

emergency evacuation during

natural and man-made

disaster.

The comprehensive disaster management plan

including emergency evacuation during

natural and man-made disaster is given in

Chapter VII.

Chapter VII,

16) Public hearing to be

conducted for the project in

accordance with provisions of

Environmental lmpact

Assessment Notification,

2006 and the issues raised by

the public should be

addressed in the

Environmental Management

Plan. The Public Hearing

should be conducted based on

the ToR Letter issued by the

Ministry and not on the basis

of Minutes of the Meeting

available on the website.

The proposed project is exempted from

Public hearing as per point 7 of the ToR

prescribed to the project and para 7(i) III

stage (3)(i)(b) of EIA notification, 2006, for

preparation of EIA/EMP report, being site is

located in UPSIDC Sikandrabad, industrial

area.

Uttar Pradesh Gazette notification dated

05.09.2001regarding industrial Uttar Pradesh

State Industrial Development area is enclosed

as Annexure I

Annexure I

17) A detailed draft EIA/EMP The contents of para 17 are duly noted and -






report should be prepared in

accordance with the above

additional TOR and should

be submitted to the Ministry

in accordance with the

Notification.

complied with.

18) Details of litigation pending

against the project, if any,

with direction/order passed by

any Court of Law against the

project should be given.



There is no direction/order passed by any

Court of Law against the proposed project.

Annexure VI,

19) The cost of the Project

(capital cost and recurring

cost) as well as the cost

towards implementation of

EMP should be clearly spelt

out.

Project cost: Rs. 2.0 Crore/-

Capital cost: Funds earmarked for

Environmental Management plan

Capital cost: Rs. 32.45 Lac/-

Recurring cost: Rs. 4.0 Lac/-

-

20) Any further clarification on

carrying out the above studies

including anticipated impacts

due to the project and

mitigative measure, project

proponent can refer to the

model ToR available on

Ministry website

''http://moef.nic.in/Manual/

incinerator''

The contents of para 20 are duly noted. -

*********




EIA Report



Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter I

Chapter I

Introduction



Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter-I: Introduction



Chapter I: Introduction

1.0 Introduction

1.1 Purpose of the report

Gaurang Environmental Solutions Pvt. Ltd. (GESPL) has been assigned to undertake an

Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) study and preparation of Environment

Management Plan (EMP) for various environmental components arising out of the

proposed common facility for Hazardous Waste incinerator (10 MT/day) & other waste

(E-Waste & discarded containers) treatment, coming up at UPSIDC, Sikandrabad

Industrial Area, Bulandshahr (Uttar Pradesh).

The proposal involves Hazardous Waste incinerator (10 MT/day), E-Waste dismantling &

segregation (10 MT/day) & recycling/reconditioning of discarded containers (10 MT/day)

etc. The project activity is scheduled at item 7 (d) Category “A” project and therefore

requires prior Environmental Clearance under the provisions of EIA Notification, 2006

and subsequent amendments.

The application for obtaining Terms of References for carrying out EIA studies was

submitted at MoEF&CC, New Delhi. The proposal was considered in the 36th

Expert

Appraisal Committee (EAC) meeting held on 26.11, wherein ToR was recommended by

EAC. As per the recommendation of the EAC, the Ministry of Environment, Forest and

Climate Change (MoEF&CC) accorded ToR to the project vide letter no. 10-84/2018-IA-

III dated 18.12.2018.

Baseline studies were commissioned during December, 2018 – February, 2019.

The proposed project is exempted from Public hearing as per point 7 of the ToR

prescribed to the project and para 7(i) III stage (3)(i)(b) of EIA notification, 2006, for

preparation of EIA/EMP report, being site is located in UPSIDC, Sikandrabad Industrial






Area. (Uttar Pradesh Gazette notification dated 05.09.2001, regarding industrial Uttar Pradesh

State Industrial Development area is enclosed as Annexure I)

This Environmental Impact Assessment (EIA) report has been prepared to provide

information on the potential negative and positive environmental, social and economic

impacts of the project. It also aims to make recommendations for mitigation of the

potential negative impacts and enhancement of the positive ones. Baseline studies along

with field surveys were conducted and potential environmental impacts of the project

activities were identified, assessed and documented in this report.

This report has been prepared as per the Terms of References (standard and as issued by

MoEF&CC), EIA Notification, 2006, Technical EIA Guidance Manual for “Common

hazardous waste treatment Storage and disposal facilities” by IL&FS Ecosmart Ltd.,

Hazardous & Other Waste (Management & Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016 &

E-Waste Management Rules, 2016, as guiding documents.

1.2 Identification of Project & Project Proponent

1.2.1 Identification of the Project

The project, coming up at Plot No. D- 26, UPSIDC, Sikandarabad, District Bulandshahr,

Uttar Pradesh, is a Greenfield common facility for Hazardous Waste incinerator (10

MT/day), E-Waste dismantling & segregation (10 MT/day) & recycling/reconditioning

of discarded containers (10 MT/day) etc,. generated from various industries in Uttar

Pradesh. The project aims to cater to Bulandshahr, Greater Noida, Noida, Ghaziabad,

Meerut, Saharanpur and Aligarh areas in Uttar Pradesh.

Presently, there are very few hazardous waste incineration facilities available in the area

& the proposed project seeks to cater to the needs of safe treatment/disposal of

Hazardous Waste generated by various industries.






1.2.2 Identification of project proponent:

The project is promoted by M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project. It is a partnership

firm which came into existence with the purpose of establishing and operating a

Hazardous Waste incinerator so as to provide an environmentally sound treatment facility

for the numerous industries located in Bulandshahr, Greater Noida, Noida, Ghaziabad,

Meerut, Saharanpur and Aligarh in Uttar Pradesh.

The managing partners are Shri Kapil Sharma, Shri Nishank Kaushik and Shri Rajender

Kumar. The designated partner for the purpose of Environmental Clearance & activities

associated with the same for the proposed project is Mr. Nishank Kaushik.

Registered address of the firm:

78/2, Gaur Plaza,

Main G.T. Road, Lal Kuan,

Gautam Buddha Nagar,

Uttar Pradesh- 201002

E-Mail address: [email protected]

1.3 Brief Description of Nature, Size, Location of the Project and Its

Importance to Country and Region

1.3.1 Nature of the Project

The proposal involves common facility for hazardous waste incinerator (10 MT/day),

E-waste dismantling & segregation (10 MT/day) & Recycling/reconditioning of discarded

containers (10 MT/day) etc, coming up at UPSIDC, Sikandrabad Industrial Area,

Bulandshahr (U.P). The proposed activity is categorized as “Category A” project under

item 7 (d) i.e. ‘Common hazardous waste treatment, storage & disposal facilities

(TSDFs)” of Schedule - Gazette Notification dated Sept. 14th

, 2006 and its subsequent

amendments.






1.3.2 Size of the Project

Project facilities are tabulated as under:

Table 1.1: Brief Description of Project & Facilities

S. N. Particulars Description

A. General Information

1. Type Common facility for :

Hazardous Waste incinerator (10 MT/day)

Other waste treatment:

E-waste dismantling & segregation (10 MT/day)

Recycling/Reconditioning of discarded containers (10 MT/day)

2. Location Plot No. D- 26, UPSIDC, Sikandrabad Industrial Area, District


3. Plot area 1857 sq. m. (0.1857 ha)

4. Cost of the Project Capital: Rs. 2.0 Crore/-

B. Proposed facilities

1. Analytical Laboratory For sampling & analysis of waste received from various industries.

2. Incinerator Rotary Kiln based dual chamber Hazardous Waste incinerator of

capacity 10 MT/Day.

3. E-Waste Dismantling &

Segregation

Proposed capacity: 10 MT/Day.

Equipments proposed for E-Waste dismantling & segregation unit:

C R M machine (3 no)

Cable cutting machine (1 no)

Vibrating machine (1 no)

Pulverizer (1 no)

4. Recycling/Reconditioning


Proposed capacity: 10 MT/Day.

Equipments for E-Waste dismantling & segregation unit:

Compressor for resizing

Gas welding machine for fabrication

Shredder

5. Storage Shed Storage area for storage of wastes as per guidelines will be






S. N. Particulars Description

provided in the facility.

6. ETP Proposed capacity: 7.0 KLD

Scrubbing water, effluent from washing of discarded containers,

vehicle & floor washing etc. will be collected and treated in ETP &

recycled for use within plant premises.

1.3.3 Location of the project:

The project is located at Plot No. D- 26, UPSIDC, Sikandrabad Industrial Area, District


Geographical Coordinates of project site are as under:

Point 1

Latitude : 28° 28’ 02.77” N

Longitude : 77° 39’ 48.96” E

Point 2

Latitude : 28° 28’ 01.77” N

Longitude : 77° 39’ 50.17” E

Point 3

Latitude : 28° 28’ 00.43” N

Longitude : 77° 39’ 48.85” E

Point 4

Latitude : 28° 27’ 59.54” N

Longitude : 77° 39’ 46.36” E






Fig. 1.1: Google Image Showing Surrounding Features






1.3.4 Importance to the Country & Region:

The area has various industries of paints, printing & dyeing, automobiles, sugar, pesticides

etc. These industries generates significant amount of incinerable Hazardous Waste, E-

Waste & discarded container waste.

The Hazardous & Other Waste (Management & Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016

& E-Waste Management Rules, 2016, bar the industries from dumping their wastes

indiscriminately. At the same time they permit the industries to dispose off their wastes

in safe & secured manner. It has been made mandatory by the government that hazardous

waste be disposed off in a systematic and scientific way and pollution control boards

have been asked to ensure it. For systematic & scientific disposal of solid wastes, a

facility has to be developed where care is to be taken to restrict to the extent possible,

any negative impacts on the environment.

Hazardous Waste reuse, recycling, and reclamation can avoid environmental hazards,

protect scarce natural resources, reduce the nation's reliance on raw materials and energy

and provide economic benefits.

The proposed project will cater to the need of the industries by providing an

environmentally sound common facility for Hazardous Waste incineration, E-Waste

dismantling & segregation & recycling/reconditioning of discarded containers.

The main objective of the proposed project is to reduce the waste treatment &/or disposal

cost for the individual industries, while protecting the environment.

1.4 Scope of the Study

The zone comprising of 10 km radius around the project site is considered as the study

area. The study area map is shown in Figure-1.2.

The scope of study broadly includes:

To conduct literature review and to collect data relevant to the study area;






Generate field sampling results of environmental attributes to establish the baseline

environmental status;

Collate and compile secondary data including socio-economic data from published

literature / Government publications;

Estimate pollution loads that would be generated by the proposed expansion project;

Evaluate the predicted impacts on various environmental attributes in the study area by

using scientifically developed and widely accepted environmental impact assessment

methodologies

Preparing an Environment Management Plan (EMP) to mitigate the predicted impacts;

To identify critical environmental attributes required to be monitored and suggest Post

Project Monitoring Plan; and

To carry out Risk Assessment and prepare suitable Disaster Management Plan;

Preparing an EIA report, in line with the TOR issued by MoEF&CC.

To determine existing conditions of various environmental attributes, field studies have

been conducted from December, 2018 to February, 2019, covering winter season.






Fig. 1.2: Map Showing Study Area

The EIA/EMP report has been prepared in line with the Terms of Reference (TOR)

recommended by MoEF&CC. The compliance of Terms of Reference (regulatory scoping

carried out as per ToR) is given in Table-1.2.

Table 1.2: Compliance to Terms of Reference

S. No. Terms of Reference Points Compliance Pg. ref. in Final

EIA/EMP

report

A Specific Conditions

i.

Importance and benefits of the

project.

The same is detailed in Chapter VIII of the

EIA/ EMP report.

Chapter.-VII

ii. The EIA would address to the

conformity of site to the

stipulations as made in the

Hazardous and Other Wastes

(Management and


Chapter II

Details of the project conforming to Hazardous

and Other Wastes (Management and

Chapter II

Chapter XIII






Transboundary Movement)

Rules, 2016 and will have a

complete chapter indicating


Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016 are


iii. Project proponents would also

submit a write up on how their

project proposal conform to the

stipulations made in the

“Protocol For Performance

evaluation and monitoring of

the Common Hazardous Waste

Treatment Storage and

Disposal facilities including

common Hazardous Waste

incinerators”, published by the

CPCB on May 24, 2010.

Details conforming to contents of para iii are


Chapter XIII

iv. Compliance to the conditions

of the consent to operate and

authorization for the existing

facilities. The EIA will discuss

the compliance to the Pollution

Control Laws and the

notifications under the E.P. Act

1986 and get a certified report

from the Pollution Control

Board.

This is a proposed project therefore contents of

para iv are not applicable

-

v. Details of various waste

management units with

capacities for the proposed

project.

The proposed project is a common facility

for:

S.

No.

Particular Capacity

(MT/Day)

1. Hazardous waste incinerator 10

2. E-waste dismantling &

segregation

10

3. Recycling/Reconditioning of

discarded containers

10

Chapter II,






ETP of capacity 7.0 KLD is proposed for

treatment of effluent generated from various

waste treatment operations.

vi. List of waste to be handled and

their source along with mode

of transportation.

The project is proposed for treatment of

hazardous incinerable waste, E-Waste

(dismantling & segregation) and discarded

container waste generated from various

industries in Bulandshahr, Greater Noida,

Noida, Ghaziabad, Meerut, Saharanpur and

Aligarh in Uttar Pradesh.

Details of waste to be handled and their source

along with mode of transportation are given in

Chapter II.

Chapter II,

vii. Other chemicals and materials

required with quantities and

storage capacities.

HSD will be used for DG set and HSD/LDO

will be used for incinerator. Fuel consumption

& storage details are given in Chapter II.

Chapter II

viii. Details of temporary storage

facility for storage of

hazardous waste at project site.

Hazardous waste will be temporarily stored in

covered storage shed inside plant premises as

per guidelines.


Chapter II

ix. Details of pre-treatment facility

of hazardous waste at TSDF.

Pre-treatment of hazardous waste & selection

of technology for the same will depend on the

nature & physical properties of waste, available

options for technology, cost etc.

Analytical laboratory for sampling & analysis

for the same will be provided at the site.


Chapter II

x. Details of air emissions,

effluents, hazardous/solid

waste generation and their

management.

Details of air emissions, effluent generation,

hazardous/solid waste generation are presented

in Chapter II.

Mitigation measures for the same have been

detailed in Chapter IV.

Chapter II, Pg.

No. ___

Chapter IV, Pg.

No. ___






xi. Requirement of water, power,

with source of supply, status of

approval, water balance

diagram, man-power

requirement (regular &

contract).

Particulars Qty Source

Water 4.0 KLD

(fresh)

Tanker Supply

Power 100 KW UPPCL

Back-up:

DG Set 9420 kVA)

Manpower 15 Preference to locals

as per eligibility

Details regarding source & approval status

along with water balance diagram are given in

Chapter II

Chapter II

xii. Process description along with

major equipments and

machineries, process flow

sheet (quantitative) from waste

material to disposal to be

provided.

Details of the process along with major

equipments, machineries & process flow sheet

are given in Chapter II.

Chapter II

xiii. Hazard identification and

details of proposed safety

systems.

Hazard identification and details of proposed

safety systems are given in Chapter VII.

Chapter VII

xiv. Details of drainage of the

project up to 5 km radius of

study area. If the site is within

1 km radius of any major river,

peak and lean season river

discharge as well as flood

occurrence frequency based on

peak rainfall data of the past 30

years. Details of flood level of

the project site and maximum

flood level of the river shall

also be provided.

Following water bodies are present in 5.0 km

radius of proposed project site:

1. Sikandrabad distributary ~ 2.3 km ENE

2. Ganga Canal ~ 4.0 km WSW

There is no major river within 1.0 km radius of

the proposed project site


Chapter II

xv. Ground water quality

monitoring in and around the

project site.



December, 2018 to February 2019, as per

Chapter III






guidelines.

Details are given in Chapter III.

xvi. The Air Quality Index shall be

calculated for base level air

quality.

The Air quality index calculated for data

collected during study period (maximum of

average) for all the 08 nos. monitoring stations

in 10 km radius area is 308 {301-400:

very poor}

-

xvii. Status of land purchase in

terms of land acquisition Act

and study the impact.

The land for proposed project located in

UPSIDC, Sikandrabad industrial area has been

sub-let on lease to the project proponent by the

allottee M/s. V.C. Plastic (P) Ltd.

NOC in this regard by UPSIDC is enclosed as

Annexure II.

Annexure II

xviii. Status of acquisition of land. If

acquisition is not complete,

stage of the acquisition process

and expected time of complete

possession of the land

No acquisition of land is required for the

proposed project. Therefore, Contents of para

xviii are not applicable.

-

xix. R&R details in respect of land

in line with state Government

policy.

R&R is not applicable for the proposed project. -

xx. Details of effluent treatment

and recycling process.

About 3.14 KLD of effluent is envisaged to be

generated from various operations in the

proposed waste treatment facility. The same

will be treated in ETP of 7.0 KLD proposed in

plant premises. Treated water will be re-used

within the plant for various activities.


Chapter II

xxi. Leachate study report and

detailed leachate management

plan to be incorporated.

Landfill site has not been proposed in the

project. Covered storage & impervious flooring

will be provided in all the areas where

handling/storage of waste will be done.

Hazardous waste will be stored as per

Chapter II








xxii. Action plan for measures to be

taken for excessive leachate

generation during monsoon

period

Landfill site is not proposed in the project.

Adequate measures will be taken for storage &

handling of waste to avoid any leachate

generation as per Hazardous & Other Waste

(Management & Transboundary Movement)

Rules, 2016.


Chapter II

xxiii. Detailed Environmental

Monitoring Plan.

Environmental Monitoring Plan prepared in

accordance to CPCB guidelines is given in

Chapter VI.

Chapter VI,

xxiv. Action plan for any pollution

of ground water is noticed

during operation period or post

closure monitoring period.

Adequate measures will be taken to prevent

pollution of ground water due to project

activities. No waste water will be discharged

outside plant premises.

All the waste storage areas will be properly

covered & lined to ensure no leachate or

hazardous chemical percolates to soil & ground

water.

Ground water quality monitoring will be

carried out periodically & report submitted as

per CPCB guidelines.

Chapter IV

xxv. A certificate of adequacy of

available power from the

agency supplying power to the

project along with the load

allowed for the project.

The power requirement for the project is 100

KW to be sourced from UPPCL.

Letter dated 21.02.2019 acknowledged by

S.D.O, UPPCL for assurance of power supply,

is enclosed as Annexure III.

Annexure III

xxvi. The EMP would also include

proposals for creating a solar

Power generation farm.

The project area is 1857 sq. m. adequate for the

proposed waste treatment facilities. Solar

power generation farm is not feasible in the

project area.

-

xxvii. A detailed plan for green belt Greenbelt development plan is given in given Chapter X






development. Impact of tree

felling, if any, along with a

management plan.

in Chapter X.

No trees will be cut for the proposed project.

xxviii. A certificate from the local

body supplying water,

specifying the total annual

water availability with the

local authority, the quantity of

water already committed, the

quantity of water allotted to the

project under consideration and

the balance water available.

This should be specified

separately for ground water

and surface water sources,

ensuring that there is no impact

on other users.

Total daily water requirement for the project is

7.0 KLD including daily fresh water

requirement of 4.0 KLD which will be met

through tanker supply from nearby area.

No ground water or surface water will be used

for the project.

-

xxix. The project proponents shall






Appraisal.

No complaints/ suggestions have been received

for the proposed project till date.

-

xxx. Any litigation pending against

the project and/or any



project, if so, details thereof

shall also be included



Annexure VI

xxxi. The project proponents shall



No complaints/ suggestions have been received

for the proposed project till date.

-









Appraisal.

xxxii. Plan for Corporate

Environment Responsibility

(CER) as specified under

Ministry’s Office

memorandum vide F. No. 22-

65/2017-IA.III dated 1st

May

2018 shall be prepared and

submitted along with EIA

Report.

Plan for Corporate Environment Responsibility

(CER) in line with MoEF&CC’s OM dated

01.05.2018 is given in Chapter VIII.

Chapter VIII

xxxiii. A tabular chart with index for

point wise compliance of

above ToRs.

The contents of para xxxiii are noted and have

been complied with.

-

B. Standard Terms of Reference for conducting EIA study for Common Hazardous Waste

Treatment, Storage and Disposal Facilities (TSDFs) And Information to be included in

EIA/EMP Report

1) Reasons for selecting the site

with details of alternate sites

examined/rejected/selected on

merit with comparative

statement and reason/basis for

selection. The examination

should justify site suitability in

terms of environmental

damages, resources

sustainability associated with

selected site as compared to

rejected sites. The analysis

should include parameters

considered along with

The project is for Common facility for

Hazardous Waste incinerator, E- Waste


recycling/reconditioning of discarded

containers, proposed at UPSIDC, Sikandrabad

Industrial Area.


Chapter II.

Chapter II






weightage criteria for short

listing selected site.

2) Submit the details of the

road/rail connectivity along

with the likely impacts and

mitigative measures.

Site connectivity is detailed in Chapter II.

Anticipated impacts on environment &

mitigation measures are detailed in Chapter IV.

Chapter II,

Chapter IV,

3) Submit the present land use

and permission required for

any conversion such as forest,

agriculture etc.

No conversion of land is required as the

proposed project site is a parcel of land,

presently not being used for any activity,

located at UPSIDC, Sikandrabad Industrial

Area.

-


transportation of Hazardous

wastes, and its safety in

handling.

Details of handling & transportation of

Hazardous Wastes to be done as per Hazardous

& Other Waste (Management &

Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016, are


Chapter II,

5) Examine and submit the details

of on line pollutant monitoring.

Environmental monitoring program is detailed

in Chapter VI.

Chapter VI,


monitoring of Dioxin and

Furan.

Environmental monitoring program including

that for dioxin & furan is detailed in Chapter

VI.

Chapter VI,

7) MoU for disposal of ash

through the TSDF.

MoU for disposal of incineration ash generated

at the facility will be done with nearest

authorized TSDF.

-

8) MoU for disposal of scrubbing

waste water through CETP.

The scrubbing waste water will be treated in

ETP (capacity 7.0 KLD) proposed within the

project premises & treated water will be re-

circulated for vehicle washing & scrubbing &

other project activities.

-


monitoring of water quality

around the landfill site.




Chapter III,






December 2018 to February, 2019 & details

given in Chapter III.


the odour control measures.

Details of the odour control measures are given

in Chapter IV of this EIA-EMP report.

Chapter IV,


impact on water body and

mitigative measures during

rainy season.

Details of impact on water body due to the

proposed project & mitigation measures have

been detailed in Chapter IV.

Chapter IV,

12) Environmental Management

Plan should be accompanied

with Environmental

Monitoring Plan and

environmental cost and benefit

assessment. Regular

monitoring shall be carried out

for odour control.

Environmental Management Plan is detailed in

Chapter X.

Environmental Monitoring Plan along with

budget for environment management plan is


Chapter X,

Chapter VI,

13) Water quality around the

landfill site shall be monitored

regularly to examine the

impact on the ground water.

No landfill site has been proposed in the

project.

Ground water quality monitoring plan has been

prepared as per CPCB guidelines and given in

Chapter VI.

Chapter VI,

14) The storage and handling of

hazardous wastes shall be as

per the Hazardous Waste

Management Rules

The Storage and Handling of Hazardous Waste

will be done as per the Hazardous & Other

Waste (Management & Transboudanry

Movement) Rules, 2016.

-

15) Submit details of a

comprehensive Disaster

Management Plan including

emergency evacuation during

natural and man-made disaster.

The comprehensive disaster management plan

including emergency evacuation during natural

and man-made disaster is given in Chapter VII.

Chapter VII,

16) Public hearing to be conducted The proposed project is exempted from Public Annexure I






for the project in accordance

with provisions of

Environmental lmpact

Assessment Notification, 2006

and the issues raised by the

public should be addressed in

the Environmental

Management Plan. The Public

Hearing should be conducted

based on the ToR Letter issued

by the Ministry and not on the

basis of Minutes of the

Meeting available on the

website.

hearing as per point 7 of the ToR prescribed to

the project and para 7(i) III stage (3)(i)(b) of

EIA notification, 2006, for preparation of

EIA/EMP report, being site is located in

UPSIDC Sikandrabad, industrial area.

Uttar Pradesh Gazette notification dated

05.09.2001regarding industrial Uttar Pradesh

State Industrial Development area is enclosed

as Annexure I

17) A detailed draft EIA/EMP

report should be prepared in

accordance with the above

additional TOR and should

be submitted to the Ministry in

accordance with the

Notification.

The contents of para 17 are duly noted and

complied with.

-

18) Details of litigation pending

against the project, if any, with



project should be given.



There is no direction/order passed by any Court

of Law against the proposed project.

Annexure VI,

19) The cost of the Project (capital

cost and recurring cost) as well

as the cost towards

implementation of EMP should

be clearly spelt out.

Project cost: Rs. 2.0 Crore/-

Capital cost: Funds earmarked for

Environmental Management plan

Capital cost: Rs. 32.45 Lac/-

Recurring cost: Rs. 4.0 Lac/-

-






20) Any further clarification on

carrying out the above studies

including anticipated impacts

due to the project and

mitigative measure, project

proponent can refer to the

model ToR available on

Ministry website

''http://moef.nic.in/Manual/

incinerator''

The contents of para 20 are duly noted. -

1.5 Structure of EIA Report

This EIA Report has been structured as follows:

Chapter 1: Introduction: Provides a background to the project, identification of the

project and project proponent, brief description of the project, details of the project

proponent, scope of the study and structure of this report.

Chapter 2: Project description: Provides details of project, infrastructure required,

technology and process description of bio medical waste management, information on the

needs and desirability of the project and sources of pollution with pollution control

measures.

Chapter 3: Description of the Environment: Provides description of the receiving

Environment details, the specialist study baseline conditions identified for the project

within 10 km radius from the project site.

Chapter 4: Anticipated Environmental Impact and Mitigation Measures: describe

the EIA methodology and impacts identified during the EIA process, providing the

anticipated impacts during the various project phases.

Chapter 5: Analysis of alternatives: provides the different site and technology

alternatives which were considered for the project.

Chapter 6: Environment Monitoring program: provides the monitoring schedule and

implementation plan during the construction and operation phase of the project.






Chapter 7: Additional Studies: has the information about risk and hazard assessment

and details of disaster management plan.

Chapter 8: Project benefits: associated with the proposed project are discussed in this

chapter.

Chapter 9: Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis: Description of the Environmental

benefits of the project

Chapter 10: EMP: Description of the administrative aspects of ensuring that mitigative

measures are implemented and their effectiveness monitored, after approval of the EIA

Chapter 11: Summary & Conclusion:

Chapter 12: Disclosure of Consultants engaged.

Chapter 13: Conformity to Rules: Addresses the conformity of site to the stipulations

as made in the Hazardous and Other Wastes (Management and Transboundary Movement)

Rules, 2016 & stipulations made in “Protocol For Performance evaluation and monitoring

of the Common Hazardous Waste Treatment Storage and Disposal facilities including

common Hazardous Waste incinerators” published by the CPCB on May 24, 2010.

*******



Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter II

Chapter II

Project Description

Common Hazardous Waste Incinerator & Other waste treatment facility at UPSIDC,


Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter II: Project Description


Report Ref: GESPL/SWMP /EIA/258 Rev No. 01

Chapter II: Project Description

This chapter provides description of those aspects of the project (based on project feasibility

study), that are likely to cause environmental effects.

2.1 Type of Project

The project is a common facility for Hazardous Waste incineration (10 MT/day),

E-Waste dismantling & segregation (10 MT/day) and recycling/reconditioning of

discarded containers (10 MT/day) for safe treatment and disposal of hazardous waste,

e-waste & discarded containers.

The proposed project is categorized as category A under item 7 (d) of Schedule -

Gazette Notification dated Sept. 14th

, 2006 and its subsequent amendments for

preparation of Environment Impact Assessment study and Environment Management

Plan.

2.2 Need of the Project

The area has various industries of paints, printing & dyeing, automobiles, sugar,

pesticides etc. These industries generates substantial amount of hazardous waste, e-

waste & discarded containers. Due to the inadequate number of common facilities for

waste treatment in the area, the industries either send their waste to distant treatment

facilities or dispose it off in an unscientific manner as installation of individual

treatment facilities by small units requires comparatively high capital investment.

In addition, it requires separate manpower and infrastructure development for proper

operation and maintenance of treatment systems. Hence, the proposed project will

cater to the need of the industries by providing a common facility for waste treatment

in the area.






2.3 Location of the Project & Justification for Site Selection

The project is located at Plot No. D- 26, UPSIDC, Sikandrabad Industrial Area,

District Bulandshahr, Uttar Pradesh. Geographical Coordinates & Google imagery

showing project site is given as Fig. 1.1 in Chapter I of EIA report. Location Map of

project site is given as Fig. 2.1:

Fig. 2.1: Location map of project site

The site location has following advantages:

Site is located in a Notified Industrial Area.

Easy availability of infrastructure such as water and power.

Availability of raw material (hazardous waste, e-waste, discarded containers) from

nearby areas

Well connected by Road & Rail.

Well developed plotting of industrial premises.

Industries in nearby areas can avail the proposed common facility for waste

treatment for disposal of their hazardous waste, e-waste, discarded containers.

2.3.1. Site Connectivity

Details of site connectivity for the project are given below:






Table 2.1: Site Connectivity

S. No. Particulars Details

1. Nearest Railway

Station

Dankaur Railway Station ~ 6.2 km towards SSW direction

Ajaibpur Railway Station ~6.75 km towards West

2. Nearest Highway NH-91 (Delhi - Kanpur) ~ 0.55 Km in NE direction

Sikandrabad Road ~3.4 Km in ENE direction

NH-235 (Meerut - Bulandshahr) ~14.6 Km in ENE direction

3. Nearest Airport Indira Gandhi International Airport ~ 54.4 km towards WNW

direction

Hindon Domestic Airport ~38.60 Km towards North West

2.4 Size or magnitude of operation

2.4.1 Land requirement:

The proposal involves common facility for Hazardous Waste incineration, E-Waste

dismantling & segregation and recycling/ reconditioning of discarded containers.

Project site Layout Plan is as below:






Fig 2.2: Project site layout plan

The land distribution at the site is given in Table 2.2

Table 2.2: Land distribution at site

S. No. Particular Area (m2) % of Total area

1. Incinerator Plant 210.0 11.31

2. E-waste dismantling & segregation area 38.0 2.05

3. Drum/container recycling/ reconditioning facility 58.0 3.12

4. Effluent treatment plant 38.0 2.05

5. Waste storage shed 150.0 8.08

6. Vehicle Washing Area 42.0 2.26

7. Admin building

(including laboratory & common facilities)

167.0 8.99

8. Guard room 6.0 0.32

9. Green belt 612.81 33

10. Open, Paved & Parking Area 507.19 27.31

Total 1857.0 100






2.4.2 Project facilities

The prime activities of the project will comprise of collection, transportation, reception,

storage, treatment & disposal of Hazardous Waste, E-Waste & discarded conatiners

generated from various industries in Bulandshahr, Greater Noida, Noida, Ghaziabad,

Meerut, Saharanpur and Aligarh areas in Uttar Pradesh.

Analytical laboratory, administration department & common facilities will be provided

in the building already existing in the plot area for proposed project.

The project facilities same are described as under:

Table 2.3: Project facilities

S. No Particular Description

1. Plot Area

Area: 1857.0 sq. m.

Located in UPSIDC industrial area, Sikandrabad & on sub-

lease to Project Proponent (sub-lease agreement enclosed as

Annexure II.

2. Project Capacity

a. Incinerator

Rotary Kiln based dual chamber Hazardous Waste

Incinerator along with an adequate Air Pollution Control

System.

Capacity: 10 MT/day

b. E-Waste Dismantling &

Segregation

E-waste will be dismantled & segregated & eventually sold

off to authorized recyclers

Capacity: 10 MT/day

c. Recycling/Reconditioning


Old, discarded containers/drums etc. will be

recycled/reconditioned through cleaning, washing &

shredding as per requirement & sent to recyclers.

Capacity: 10 MT/day

d. Effluent Treatment Plant ETP of 7.0 KLD capacity is proposed within premises of the

project for treating effluent water from various operations.

2.5 Utilities






2.5.1 Water requirement

The total daily water requirement of the proposed project is 7.0 KLD including 4.0

KLD of daily fresh water requirement which will be met through tanker supply.

The details of water requirement and wastewater generation for operation phase are

given in Table 2.4. The water balance is given as Fig. 2.3.

Table 2.4: Water requirement & wastewater generation

S. No. Particular Water requirement (KLD)

Fresh Treated Total

1. Domestic use (drinking & sanitation) 0.30 0.5 0.80

2. Venturi Scrubber 0.5 1.5 2.0

3. Packed Bed Scrubber 2.5 - 2.5

4. Laboratory 0.2 - 0.2

5. Recycling/ reconditioning of discarded containers 0.5 - 0.5

6. Floor washing, vehicle, washing - 0.5 0.5

7. Green belt & plantation - 0.5 0.5

Total 4.0 3.0 7.0






Fig. 2.3: Water balance

2.5.1.1 Wastewater management

Wastewater generated from the various waste treatment processes will be treated in

ETP proposed in project premises. Treated water will be re-circulated for scrubbing,

washing purpose & reused for greenbelt. Domestic waste water generated will be

disposed off to soak pit via septic tank.

2.5.2 Power requirement

The total power demand is 100 KW. The power supply shall be drawn from the grid

of Uttar Pradesh Power Corporation Limited (UPPCL). Letter dated 21.02.2019

acknowledged by SDO, UPPCL for power supply is enclosed as Annexure III.






DG sets of total capacity of 420 kVA have been proposed as power backup to be used

in case of power cut or failure. The details of power requirement for the project are

provided below Table 2.5:

Table 2.5: Power requirement

S. No. Power requirement Source

1. 100 KW Uttar Pradesh Power

Corporation Limited (UPPCL)

2. 420 kVA (Emergency backup) Diesel Generator

(3*125 kVA + 3*15 kVA)

2.5.3 Fuel requirement

The fuel requirement for the proposed common facility for hazardous & other waste

treatment is provided below in Table 2.6.

Table 2.6: Fuel requirement

S. No. Particular Type Quantity (Lt/hour)

1. Incinerator HSD/LDO ~ 125 Lt./hour

2. DG set HSD ~ 10.0 – 12.0 Lt./hour

2.5.4 Manpower

The manpower for the project is 15 persons including skilled and semi-skilled

persons. Drivers for transportation purpose are proposed to be outsourced. The details

are provided below in Table 2.7:

Table 2.7: Manpower requirement

S. No. Particulars Nos.

1. Manager 01

2. Supervisor 01






S. No. Particulars Nos.

3. Engineer (Maintenance) 01

4. Laboratory personnel 01

5. Security Guard 02

6. Office attendant 01

7. Accountant 01

8. Helper/ Labour 07

Total 15

2.6 Proposed schedule and approval for implementation

The proposed common facility for Hazardous Waste incinerator, E-Waste dismantling

& segregation and recycling/reconditioning of discarded containers is expected to be

commissioned & become operational within six months of obtaining environmental

clearance from MoEF&CC and other statutory clearances from respective authorities.

2.7 Technology and process description

2.7.1 Hazardous Waste

Waste can be classified as hazardous, if the waste substance is solid, semi-solid or

non-aqueous liquid which because of its quantity, concentration or characteristics in

terms of physical, chemical, infectious quality:

can cause or significantly contribute to an increase in mortality or an increase in

serious irreversible or incapacitate reversible illness, or

pose a substantial present or potential hazard to human health or environment

when it is improperly treated, stored, transported, disposed off or otherwise

managed

Thus, a waste is hazardous if it exhibits whether alone or when in contact with other

wastes or substances, any of the characteristics identified below:

corrosivity

reactivity






ignitability

toxicity

explosive

acute toxicity

infectious property

Table 2.8: List of Incinerable Hazardous Waste

S.No. Processes Hazardous Waste*

(1) (2) (3)

1. Petrochemical processes and

pyrolytic operations

1.2 Tarry residues and still bottoms from

distillation

1.3 Oily sludge emulsion

1.4 Organic residues

1.7 Slop Oil from wastewater treatment

2. Crude oil and natural gas production 2.2 Sludge containing oil

3.

Cleaning, emptying and

maintenance of petroleum oil

storage tanks including ships

3.1 cargo residue, washing water and sludge

containing oil

3.2 cargo residue and sludge containing

chemicals

3.3 Sludge and filters contaminated with oil

3.4 Ballast water containing oil from ships

4.

Petroleum refining or re processing

of used oil or recycling of waste oil

4.1 Oil sludge or emulsion

4.3 Slop oil

4.4 Organic residue from processes

4.4 Spent clay containing oil

5.

Industrial operations using mineral

or synthetic oil as lubricant in

hydraulic systems or other

applications

5.2 Wastes or residues containing oil

11.

Production of primary and

secondary

aluminum

11.3 Tar containing wastes

12.

Metal surface treatment, such as

etching, staining, polishing,

galvanizing, cleaning, degreasing,

plating, etc.

12.4 Sludge from bath containing organic solvents

13.

Production of iron and steel

including other ferrous alloys

(electric furnace; steel rolling and

finishing mills; Coke oven and by

13.3 Benzol acid sludge

13.4 Decanter tank tar sludge

13.5 Tar storage tank residue







(1) (2) (3)

products plant)

18. Production of nitrogenous and

complex fertilizers

18.2 Carbon residue/spent carbon

19. Production of phenol 19.1 Residue or sludge containing phenol

20. Production and/or industrial use of

solvents

20.2 Spent solvents

Distillation residues 20.3

21.

Production and/or industrial use of

paints, pigments, lacquers,

varnishes and inks

21.1 Process wastes, residues and sludges

22. Production of plastics

22.2 Process residues

(from plasticizers, vinyl chloride monomer

production, acrylonirile production, non-

ploymerized residues)

23.

Production and /or industrial use of

glues, organic cements, adhesive

and resins

23.1 Wastes or residues (not made with vegetable

or animal materials)

26.

Production or industrial use of

synthetic dyes, dye-intermediates

and pigments

26.1 Process waste sludge/residues containing acid,

toxic metals, organic compounds

27. Production of organic-silicone

compound

27.1 Process residues

(silicone containing residues, silicone oil

residues)

28.

Production/formulation of drugs

/pharmaceutical and health care

product

28.1 Process Residue and wastes

28.6 Spent solvents (mother liquor)

29. Production, and formulation of

pesticides including stock-piles

29.1 Process wastes or residues

29.2 Sludge containing residual pesticides

29.3 Date-expired and off-specification pesticides

31. Electronic Industry

31.1 Process residue and wastes

31.2 Spent etching chemicals and solvents

32. Pulp and Paper Industry

32.1 Spent chemicals

32.2 Corrosive wastes arising from use of strong

acid and bases

32.3 Process sludge containing adsorbable organic

halides (AOX)

33. Handling of hazardous chemicals

and wastes

33.1 Empty barrels/containers/liners contaminated

with hazardous chemicals/wastes

33.2 Contaminated cotton rags or other cleaning

materials







(1) (2) (3)

34.

De-contamination of barrels

/containers used for handling of

hazardous wastes/chemicals

34.1 Chemical-containing residue arising from

decontamination.

34.2 Sludge from treatment of waste water

arising out of cleaning / disposal of barrels

/containers

35.

Purification and treatment of

exhaust air/gases, water and waste

water from the processes in this

schedule and common

industrial effluent treatment plants

(CETP’s)

35.3 Chemical sludge from waste water

treatment

35.4

Oil and grease skimming

36. Purification process for organic

compounds /solvents

36.1 Any process or distillation residue

(filters & filter material which have organic

liquids in them e.g. mineral oil, synthetic oil &

organic chlorine compounds

36.2 Spent carbon or filter medium

37.

Hazardous waste treatment

processes, e.g. pre-processing,

incineration and concentration

37.3 Concentration or evaporation residues

(distillation residue from contaminated organic

solvents)

* The inclusion of wastes contained in this Schedule does not preclude the use of Schedule II to demonstrate that the waste is

not hazardous. In case of dispute, the matter would be referred to the Technical Review Committee constituted by Ministry

of Environment, Forest and Climate Change.

Source: HOW Rules, 2016 & Technical EIA guidance manual for Common Hazardous Waste TSDF by IL&FS

Ecosmart Limited, Hyderabad

The pathway of the Hazardous Waste after reaching the project site will be as follows:

1. Comprehensive analysis of the wastes at generation point

2. Decision of pathway of treatment/ storage/ disposal

3. Waste acceptance criteria analysis

4. Collection and Transportation of wastes.

5. Weighing and recording of waste receipt.

6. Waste received at site.

7. Temporary storage

8. Sample collection (representative) & waste characteristic analysis

9. Analysis (finger printing)

10. Waste confirmation






11. Waste Treatment / storage/ disposal

2.7.1.1 Incineration

Incineration is a high temperature, thermal destruction oxidation process in which

hazardous wastes are converted in the presence of oxygen in air into gases and

incombustible solid residue. The gases are vented into the atmosphere after passing

through adequate air pollution control system to meet emission guidelines while the

solid residue (incineration ash) is sent to authorized landfill for disposal. The

proposed incinerator would cater for the disposal/ destruction of incinerable

hazardous waste as given in Table 2.8 generated from various industries in nearby

areas of the proposed project site.

The proposed rotary kiln with secondary combustion chamber incinerator will

charge Hazardous Wastes - primarily solids but would also be flexible enough to

incinerate liquid, highly viscous and semi solid forms of hazardous waste.

2.7.1.2 Components of Incinerator






Fig. 2.4: General layout plan for incinerator

The incinerator with air pollution control system will comprise of following main

components:

Table 2.9: Main components of Incinerator

S. No Component S. No. Component

1. Waste feeding system (conveyor &

hydraulic ram feeder)

11. Packed bed scrubber

2. Rotary primary chamber 12. Mist eliminator

3. Rotary burner chambers 13. I.D Fan

4. Ash removal conveyor System 14. Dioxin & Furan control system

5. Secondary chamber 15. HEPA Filter

6. Secondary chamber burners 16. Stack

7. Quenching system 17. Fuel storage tank

8. Bag House Filter 18. Electric Panel

9. Venturi Scrubber 19. On-line Pollution Monitoring






10. Droplet separator/

water re-circulation tank

System

Primary Chamber

The primary chamber in a rotary kiln incinerator consists of an inclined refractory

lined cylindrical tube. Movement of the cylinder around its axis helps to maintain the

movement of waste. In the primary chamber, the solid fraction is converted into gases,

by means of volatilization, destructive distillation and partial combustion reactions.

Primary chamber will be made of mild steel shell, lined with thermotect board-

insulating material as the base layer & will be be followed by refractory material in

order to withstand the high temperature. Primary Chamber shall maintain temperature

around 850οC + 50

οC.

The refractory in the primary chamber will be capable of withstanding a maximum of

around 1600 οC.

Ash Collection

Residue leaving the kiln will fall through the bottom of the discharge breeching into

an ash collection system. The ash collection system includes ash conveyer, horizontal

tank and inclined portion. The conveyer will be driven by a motor coupled to a high

ratio gear reducer by means of a torque limiting coupling. The hot ash will be water

quenched and removed from the system by the conveyor mechanism.

Secondary Combustion Chamber

Secondary combustion chamber is necessary to complete the gas phase combustion

reactions & a temperature of around 1100 ο C + 50

ο C will be maintained here.

The refractory in secondary chamber will be capable of withstanding around 1400 ο

C

of temperature. Gas residence time at secondary combustion chamber will be 2

seconds.






Incineration Feed Rate

Due to non-homogeneous nature of the waste, characteristics including the feed rate

through the kiln, system heat of combustion, moisture, ash content and bulk density

will vary. All these factors will influence the feed rate and fuel requirement.

Feeding material will be prepared as per the recipe and will be charged in periodic

intervals as per the heat value.

Feed recipe will be prepared in bags of 20-25 kgs each and will be fed directly to

primary chamber.

There is possibility of variations in liquid wastes feed rate to be incinerated due to its

high or low calorific values.

Table 2.10: Technical specifications of the incinerator & air pollution control devices

S. No. Particular Description

INCINERATOR

1. Capacity 500 Kg/hr

2. Auxiliary fuel HSD/LDO

3. Type of burner operation Monoblock fully automatic burners

4. Residence time for flue gases in secondary

chamber

2 seconds

5. Temperature

Primary chamber 850οC + 50

οC.

Secondary chamber 1100 οC + 50

οC.

6. Hours of operation/day 20

7. Shut down frequency for Maintenance 45 days Running then cooling and Maintain

I. Primary Chamber

1. Type Rotating type

2. Material of construction Mild steel

3. Refractory 75 mm insulation & 200 mm thick brick lining

4. Rotary Chamber RPM 0.5-2 rpm controlled VFD

5. Temperature resistance 1600 οC

6. Waste feeding Automatic through conveyor & hydraulic ram pusher

7. Supporting structure Provided

8. Rotating mechanism gear box Motorized

II. Secondary Chamber

1. Type Static solid hearth








3. Refractory thickness 115 mm thick

4. Material Refractory bricks

5. Temperature resistance 1400 οC

6. Insulation thickness 115 mm

7. Insulation material Insulation bricks

8. Residence time for flue gases 2 seconds

III. Refractory lined Interconnecting duct


2. Insulation castable 80 mm thick

3. Refractory castable 45 mm thick

IV. Emergency Stack


V. Combustion Fan

1. Type Centrifugal

2. Drive Direct drive

3. M.O.C Mild steel

4. Modulation Manual control damper

5. Motor Provided

VI. Burners

1. No of burners As per standard design

2. Fuel LDO/HSD

VII. Fuel Oil storage tank


2. Capacity 990 Lts.

3. Standard accessories Level indicator, valves & piping provided

VIII. Control Panel

1. Type PLC based

2. Material of construction CRCA sheet

3. Finish Powder coated

4. Type of temperature controller Digital

5. Audio-visual alarm system Provided

IX. Quencher


2. Inside lined With acid resistance tile

3. Pump Provided







4. Purpose To reduce flue gas temperature before venturi scrubber;

rapid quenching also aids in control of dioxin & furan

generation

AIR POLLUTION CONTROL DEVICES

X. Flue gas filtration system

1. Type Bag House Filter (Pulse jet type )

2. Purpose Removal of particulate matter in flue gas

XI. Venturi Scrubber

1. Type High pressure jet type

2. Material of construction Stainless steel- 316L

3. Gas temperature at the outlet 78 οC to 80

οC

4. Scrubbing Media Water with 5% caustic

5. Water re-circulation pump type centrifugal

6. M.OC. of water re-circulation pump PP

7. Water re-circulation pump motor Provided

XII. Droplet Separator & water recirculation tank (integral)

1. Type Cyclonic

2. Application To separate water droplets from flue gases


4. Inside protection Provided

XIII. Packed Bed scrubber



3. Packing Media PP saddles

4. Water re-circulation pump type centrifugal

5. M.OC. of water re-circulation pump PP

6. Water re-circulation pump motor Provided

XIV. Mist eliminator



3. Purpose To remove water droplets from the gases

XV. I.D Fan

1. Type High pressure centrifugal type

2. Drive Belt driven

3. M.O.C of casing Mild steel with inside protection

4. M.O.C of impeller SS 316L







5. Motor Provided

XVI. Dioxin control system

1. Application To control dioxin & furan and odour

2. Type Fixed



5. Cleaning Manual

XVII. Combustion Fan

1. Type Centrifugal

2. Drive Direct drive

3. M.O.C Mild steel

4. Modulation Manual control damper

5. Motor Provided

XVIII. HEPA Filter

1. Type High efficiency particulate filter

2. Purpose For removal of fine particulates before release of

emissions into atmosphere through stack

XIX. Stack



3. Type Self supporting

4. Height 30 mts. from ground level

5. Standard accessories provided

6. Paint Painted externally with 2 coats of heat resistant silver

& orange paint

7. Ladder Provided






2.8 Incineration facility operations

2.8.1 Collection and transportation of hazardous waste

All the provisions corresponding to transportation of Hazardous Wastes under various

Acts including the Hazardous & Other Wastes (Management & Transboundary

Movement) (HOW) Rules, 2016 will be duly complied with, in all respects (coding,

containers, manifest system etc.).

For collection and Transportation, about 07 nos. of vehicles will be provided. Type

of vehicles used will be of relevant capacity (Crane mounted containerized collection

and loading vehicles /covered trucks / trucks having pneumatic loading / unloading

arrangements). The 7 copy manifest system and TREM card system as per the HOW

Rules, 2016 will be implemented.

Experienced drivers will be employed for this purpose & adequate training will be

given in operating the manifest system and management of TREM card system. As a

practice, a trained driver and helper will accompany the transportation vehicle to

ensure that the manifest system and TREM card arrangement are properly maintained.

Drivers and helpers will be trained in emergency procedures to handle emergency

situations & contain pollution and first aid in case of injuries.

Washing of tanker/ container and disposal of effluent: each container/vehicle will be

thoroughly washed prior to being sent to the industry for collection of wastes & post

collection & unloading at site.

The effluent water will be treated in the proposed effluent treatment plant.

Manifest system as per HOW, Rules, 2016 will be followed & hazardous wastes will

not be accepted for transportation to site unless it is accompanied by copies 3 to 7 of

the manifest.

2.8.1.1 Off-Site Transportation of Hazardous Wastes

The off-site transportation requirements involve:

Container: to be of appropriate leak-proof material with mechanical stability;






Labelling: to identify the waste, describe the possible hazard, and the remedial

measures / first-aid required in case of accidental spills;

Transportation vehicle: to identify the waste displaying the possible hazard,

the remedial measures / first aid required in case of accidental spills, telephone

number of the contact person / controlling agency in case of emergency etc.

through labelling;

Collector / transporter selection: to have technical competence and relevant

skills and other requirements;

License / manifest: to carry application and ‘No Objection Certificate’

documents issued by concerned authorities;

Emergency procedures: to have knowledge about actions to be taken in case of

spills or accidents.

The following guidelines will be followed prior to handing over of the waste to the

transporter:

It will be ensured that Hazardous Wastes (incinerator ash) are packaged in a

manner suitable for safe handling, storage and transport. Labelling on packaging

is readily visible and material used for packaging will withstand physical

conditions and climatic factors;

Information regarding characteristics of wastes particularly in terms of being

Corrosive, Reactive, Ignitable or Toxic will be provided on the label;

Hazardous Wastes transportation will be in accordance with the provisions of

HOW Rules, 2016 and the rules made by the Central Government under the

Motor Vehicles Act, 1988 and other guidelines issued from time to time in this

regard.

Labelling of Hazardous Waste containers will be done as per Form 8, as given

in HOW Rules, 2016.

Seven duly signed copies of the manifest in Form 10 comprising of colour code

as indicated below, will be prepared for sending Hazardous Waste (incinerator

ash) for disposal (landfill site).






The manifest system shall contain information regarding:

Details of waste generator

Details of waste transporter

Quantitative and qualitative description of waste materials.

Consistency of the waste

Waste category number and characteristics

Precautionary measures for handling the wastes

Emergency procedures to be followed.

The 7 copies of the system will be distributed as outlined below:

Copy 1 (White) To be forwarded to the SPCB/PCC by the occupier.

Copy 2 (Yellow) To be signed by the transporter and retained by the occupier.

Copy 3 (Pink) To be retained by the operator of a facility.

Copy 4 (Orange) To be returned to the transporter by the operator of facility after accepting

waste.

Copy 5 (Green) To be forwarded to the SPCB/PCC by the operator of facility after disposal.

Copy 6 (Blue) To be returned to the occupier by the operator of the facility after disposal.

Copy 7 (Grey) To be sent by the receiver to the State Pollution Control Board of the sender in

case the sender is in another State.

All other records in respect of the common waste treatment facility operation will be

maintained properly and kept available to regulators as and when required.

Responsibilities of the HW Transporter

Transporter of hazardous wastes will be responsible for:

Obtaining permission from SPCB/PCC for transport of hazardous waste [in

addition to any other permissions that may be required under the Motor Vehicles

(Amendment) Act of 1988];

The transport vehicles will be designed suitably to handle and transport the

hazardous wastes of various characteristics;






The transporter will follow all the Rules pertaining to transportation of hazardous

waste as stipulated under the HOW Rules, 2016.

Transporting the waste will be carried out in closed containers at all times;

Delivering the wastes at designated points only;

Informing SPCB/PCC or local authority, occupier/operator of a facility, and others

concerned immediately in case of spillage, leakage or other accidents during

transportation;

The transporter will train the driver with regard to the emergency response

measures to be taken during the transportation of waste;

Cleanup in case of contamination;

Cleaning of vehicles will be carried out at designated places i.e. either at TSDF

etc. and the waste water will be treated in CETP by transportation through tankers.

Transportation Requirement

The following are the requirements pertaining to the transportation of hazardous

wastes:

Vehicle used for transportation will be in accordance with the provisions under the

Motor Vehicles Act, 1988, and rules made thereunder;

Transporter will possess requisite copies of the certificate (valid authorization

obtained from the concerned SPCB/PCC for transportation of wastes by the waste

generator and operator of a facility) for transportation of hazardous waste;

Transporter will have valid “Pollution Under Control Certificate” (PUCC) during

the transportation of HW and shall be properly displayed;

Vehicles will be painted preferably in blue color with white strip of 15 to 30 cm

width running centrally all over the body. This is to facilitate easy identification;

Vehicle will be fitted with mechanical handling equipment as may be required for

safe handling and transportation of the waste;

The words "HAZARDOUS WASTE" will be displayed on all sides of the vehicle

in Vernacular Language, Hindi, English;

Name of the facility operator or the transporter, as the case may be, will be

displayed;






Emergency phone numbers and TREM Card in Form 9 of as stipulated under the

Hazardous Waste Rules, 2016 and amendments made there under will be

displayed properly;

Vehicle will be fitted with roll-on / roll-off covers if the individual containers do

not possess the same;

Carrying of passengers is strictly prohibited and those associated with the waste

haulers will be permitted only in the cabin;

Transporter will carry documents of manifest for the wastes during transportation

as stipulated under the Hazardous & Other Waste (Management & Transbondary

Movement) Rules, 2016;

The trucks will be dedicated for transportation of hazardous wastes and they will

not be used for any other purpose;

Each vehicle will carry first-aid kit, spill control equipment and fire extinguisher;

HW transport vehicle will run only at a speed specified under Motor Vehicles Act

in order to avoid any eventuality during the transportation of HW;

The driver of the transport vehicle will have valid driving license for heavy

vehicles from the State Road Transport Authority and shall have experience in

transporting the chemicals. Driver(s) will be properly trained for handling the

emergency situations and safety aspects involved in the transportation of

hazardous waste;

The design of the trucks will be such that there is no spillage during

transportation.

2.8.2 Analytical Laboratory Facilities

The laboratory to be set-up at the proposed waste treatment facility will be based on

guidelines laid down by CPCB & as per Hazardous & Other Wastes (Management &

Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016:

Generators sending hazardous waste to the incineration facility are required to provide

necessary test report of hazardous waste to the operator along with the information on

the process(s) of its generation.

The tests to be conducted at incineration facility will be with an objective to study






Storage & feeding requirements;

Operating conditions of the furnaces;

Feed concentration within the efficiency levels of air pollution control devices to

comply with flue gas standards. The activity specific relevant parameters are

indicated below:

Storage & feeding requirements: Physical form of waste, pH, hazardous waste

properties such as inflammability, reactivity, compatibility with other wastes etc.

for segregating the waste and to store accordingly, in order to suit feeding

mechanism.

Operating conditions of the furnaces: viscosity, moisture content, total organic

carbon, calorific value, volatility of the waste, special incompatible wastes,

inorganic salts, metals etc.

Air pollution control devices: chlorides & other halogens, sulphur, nitrates,

mercury & other heavy metals etc. Therefore, relevant parameters may be analyzed

while accepting the waste.

The laboratory facilities will give clear directions to the operators, two days in

advance as far as possible, regarding type of waste to be incinerated in a particular

date and its properties.

2.8.3 Storage Area / Shed

Temporary Storage Facility will be provided primarily to store the wastes upon receipt

at the facility until its pathway of waste disposal is determined. Each batch of received

waste will be kept separately following compatibility and labeling of the wastes.

CPCB guidelines for the storage of hazardous wastes will be followed.

Following practices will be adopted in design of storage area:

The storage area will be designed for average 30 day storage for solid as well as

liquid wastes;

Flammable, Ignitable, Reactive and Non-Compatible waste will be stored

separately in the designated areas;






Storage area will be provided with flame proof fittings, automatic smoke & heat

detection system; adequate firefighting systems etc.;

Loading and unloading of Hazardous Wastes in storage sheds will only be done

under the supervision of the well trained and experienced staff;

Fire break of at least 04 meter between two blocks of stacked drums will be

provided in the storage shed. It will be ensured that one block of drum does not

exceed 300 MT of waste;

Minimum of 1 meter clear space will be left between two adjacent rows of drums

in pair for inspection;

At least two routes to escape in the event of any fire in the area;

Doors and approaches of the storage area will be of suitable sizes for entry of fork

lift and firefighting equipment;

The storage area with concrete floor or steel sheet to prevent percolation of spills,

leaks etc. and the floor will be structurally sound and chemically compatible with

waste;

The floor level will at least be 150 mm above the ground level;

Containment measures such as proper slopes as well as collection pit to collect

wash water and the leakages/spills, & treatment in ETP etc.;

Provision of peripheral drainage system connected with the sump so as to collect

any accidental spills on roads or within the storage yards as well as accidental

flow due to fire-fighting.

2.8.3.1 Storage of Drums/Containers

Following practices will be adopted for storage of drums/containers:

The stacking of drums should be restricted up to three, high on pallets (wooden

frames);

For Waste having flash point less than 65.5 οC, the drums will not be stacked

more than one height;

No drums will be opened in the storage sheds for sampling etc. and such activity

will be done in designated places outside the storage areas;






Drums containing wastes will be labeled properly indicating mainly type,

quantity, characteristics, source and date of storing etc.

2.8.3.2 Spillage/leakage Control Measures

The storage areas will be inspected daily for detecting any signs of leaks or

deterioration if any;

Leaking or deteriorated containers will be removed and ensured that such

contents are transferred to a sound container;

In case of spills/ leaks/ dry adsorbents/ cotton will be used for cleaning instead

of water;

Proper slope with collection pits will be provided in the storage area so as to

collect the spills/ leakages;

Adequate number of spill kits with compatible sorbent material in adequate

quantity will be provided.

2.8.3.3 Record Keeping and Maintenance

Proper records with regard to the industry-wise type of waste received,

characteristics as well as the location of the wastes that have been stored in the

facility will be maintained.

2.9 E-Waste segregation & dismantling

E-waste segregation & dismantling facility is proposed in order to cater for safe and

environmentally sound disposal of E-Waste generated from various industries, as per

E-Waste Management Rules, 2016.

Methodology

The methodology proposed to be followed at the E-Waste facility is as follows:

Collection, weighing & transportation of E-Waste to facility for segregation &

dismantling.






The transportation of E-Waste will be done as per the manifest system whereby

the transporter will be required to carry a document (three copies) prepared by the

sender, giving the details as per Form-6, E-Waste management rules, 2016

Dismantling of E-Waste at treatment facility.

Destruction process can be witnessed by Client, if required.

Upon completion of data destruction, official destruction certificate may be

issued to Client for records, as required.

Dismantled material will then be segregated & sent to authorized recyclers.

2.9.1 Process description

The E-Waste received from generator will be stored at earmarked area having

concrete floor and leak proof roof. E-Waste will be temporarily stored in wooden or

plastic pallets.

Waste which may contain mainly electronic and electrical material and monitors

of computer or TVs, will be shifted to manual dismantling section in hand trolleys

Work stations are proposed with a suction hood for any dust particle coming out

of the dismantling process. A team of experts will be deputed for dismantling

purpose.

The employees at this section will be provided with all the required PPE's i.e.

apron, safety shoes, gloves, dust mask etc.

Fire extinguishers will be provided in the working area.

The dismantled components will be sent for shredding followed by crushing and

pulverizing. Metal and non-metal components will be segregated by physical

process from the product i.e. powder of PCB. Metal and non-metal components,

after segregation, will stored in bags for disposal (selling to authorized recyclers)

for recovery (metal parts) & reuse (non-metal parts).

The dismantled picture tube will be sent to Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) cutting

machine, which is a closed chamber attached with a suction hood. The CRT will

be put into the control panel connected automatic CRT cutting frame. The CRT

will be cut into two pieces i.e. front glass and funnel glass.






The glass which is free from all coating etc. will be crushed further and stored in

bags to be dispatched for recycling.

The components removed from PCBs will be segregated and stored in bags for

further disposal to authorized recyclers.

The ferrous material i.e. cabinet, body of monitor etc. will be labelled and

disposed to authorized recyclers.

Plastic from cabinet, monitor will be shredded in the shredder and sold to

authorized recyclers.

Fig. 2.5: E-Waste Recycling Block Diagram






2.9.2 Responsibilities of the dismantler

Responsibilities of the dismantler as per E-Waste management Rules, 2016 are as below:

Ensure that the facility and dismantling processes are in accordance with the

standards or guidelines prescribed by CPCB from time to time;

Obtain authorisation from the concerned SPCB in accordance with the procedure

under sub-rule (3) of rule 13;

Ensure that no damage is caused to the environment during storage and

transportation of E-Waste;

Ensure that the dismantling processes do not have any adverse effect on the health

and the environment;

Ensure that dismantled e-waste are segregated and sent to the authorized recycling

facilities for recovery of materials;

Ensure that non-recyclable or non-recoverable components are sent to authorized

TSDF;

Maintain record of e-waste collected, dismantled and sent to authorised recycler in

Form-2 and make such record available for scrutiny by the CPCB or the concerned

SPCB;

File a return in Form-3, to the concerned SPCB as the case may be, on or before 30th

day of June following the financial year to which that return relates;

Not process any e-waste for recovery or refining of materials, unless he is authorised

with concerned SPCB as a recycler for refining and recovery of materials;

Operation without Authorisation by any dismantler, as defined in the E-Waste

management Rules, 2016, will be considered as causing damage to the environment.

2.10 Recycling/Reconditioning of discarded containers

Procedure to be followed for recycling/reconditioning of discarded containers is as

under:






Old empty Drums / Containers / Jars etc. will be transported from various industries

to the project site and then reconditioned by cleaning & washing and eventually

drying.

After drying, testing will be done for any leakage/damage, post which dents will be

removed by using hand tools.

Finally, the reconditioned containers, drums etc will be sent to recyclers or end users

as may be the case.

Fig. 2.6: Process flow chart for recycling of discarded containers

2.11 Effluent Treatment Plant

The effluent treatment plant will be installed to ensure that effluent water generated

during the process of scrubbing, washing container, vehicles, floors etc., is treated and

reused after treatment. Proper utilization of water will be ensured by recirculation of

treated waste water for scrubbing, vehicle & floor washing, washing of discarded

containers & greenbelt development. The ETP will be designed for 7.0 KLD capacity.

The main components of the effluent treatment plant & final disposal are as follows:

a) Water Collection Tank






b) Primary treatment

Chemical Treatment

Primary clarifier/Sedimentation tank

c) Secondary treatment

Trickling filter

Secondary clarifier

d) Tertiary treatment

Pressure sand filter

Activated carbon filter

e) Sludge drying beds

f) Sludge filter press

g) ETP Sludge treatment in Incinerator

h) Ash disposal to authorized landfill site.

Fig. 2.7: General Schematic Diagram of ETP

Table 2.11: ETP Outlet Parameters

S.No. Parameter Unit Outlet Parameter Limit

1. pH pH Unit 5.5 – 9.0

2. Temperature 0C

shall not exceed 5°C above the

receiving water temperature

3. Suspended Solids mg/l 100

4. Oil & Grease mg/l 10






S.No. Parameter Unit Outlet Parameter Limit

5. Ammonical Nitrogen (as N) mg/l < 50 mg/l

6. BOD (5 days at 20°C) mg/l 30

7. COD mg/l 250

8. Suspended Solids mg/l 100

9. Bio-assay test - 90% survival of fish after 96 hours in

100% effluent

Source: General standards for discharge of environmental pollutants part-A: effluents, [Schedule – VI, Rule 3a], The

Environment (Protection) Rules, 1986

2.12 Sources of Pollution

The various types of pollution envisaged from the proposed project are:

1) Air pollution;

2) Water pollution;

3) Land Pollution

4) Noise pollution

5) Hazardous waste generation

6) Solid waste generation;

The project will be provided with necessary pollution control facilities to keep the

gaseous emission, liquid effluent and noise emission within the permissible limits

prescribed by Central and State Pollution Control Board. Details of emissions from

the proposed activity are given in the following sections.

The details of impacts and mitigation measures are discussed in Chapter IV of this

report.

2.12.1 Air Pollution

Various sources of air pollution identified during construction and operation phase

for the proposed project are as follows:

Construction Phase:

Vehicular emissions due to movement of construction machinery and vehicles.

Water sprinkling will be done from time to time to reduce dust generation due to

vehicular movements,






Operation Phase:

Point Source

Incinerator facility: Emissions of PM, SO2, NOx, HCl, H2SO4, CO, TOCs etc. from

stack. In case of improper quenching, reduced efficiency of incinerator etc. emission

of dioxins/furans are also envisaged.

DG Sets: Emissions of PM, SO2, NOx & CO from stack. These emissions are not

continuous as DG sets will be used only as emergency power back-up. Also low

sulphur diesel to be used for DG Set operations will considerably reduce generation

of sulphur dioxide.

The facility will be equipped with proper air pollution control system for reducing

the pollutants and also a stack of adequate height will provided for proper dispersion

of the air pollutants as per CPCB guidelines

Line Source

Particulate Matter emissions from movement of vehicles carrying waste material on

paved roads & vehicular emissions like SPM, CO & HCs from exhaust of the

vehicles are envisaged as line source emissions.

Only vehicles with PUC certification will be allowed. Trucks will be covered with

tarpaulin/plastic to reduce the spillage of hazardous material.

Fugitive Emissions & Control

Fugitive emissions from storage & handling area for hazardous materials is

envisaged due to proposed project.

Suitable control measures will be taken to control the fugitive emission during

loading/ unloading, storage and handling of waste.

Odour control & mitigation measures are detailed in chapter IV of this report.

Dioxin & Furans Generation & its Control

Dioxin and furans are generated due to incomplete combustion of Polychlorinated

Biphenyls & Polyvinyl Chloride in Incinerator.

The incineration facility will be equipped with an adequate Air pollution control

system to control release of these pollutants in the environment. Regular monitoring

of Dioxin and Furans will be carried out during operation phase.






2.12.2 Water Pollution

The waste water generation from the common waste treatment facility is envisaged

from floor washing, vehicle washing, scrubber operations, laboratory and domestic

use. The effluent waste water will be treated in the ETP (7.0 KLD capacity) & re-

circulated for scrubbing & reused for vehicle/floor washing, greenbelt development

etc. Domestic waste water will be disposed off to soak pit via septic tank.

2.12.3 Impact on Land environment

The proposed project will have negligible impact on the landuse of the project site

as the present landuse of plot area is for industrial use only. Proposed greenbelt

development & plantation will improve the aesthetics of the area.

Soil pollution due to proposed project will be due to:

Construction & commissioning of the project may result in compaction of soil &

top soil loss;

Fuel leakages on soil during vehicular activities may result in soil

contamination;

Leakages due to storage and handling of fuel &/or hazardous waste may result

in soil contamination.

Impervious flooring will be provided at areas wherever handling/storage of waste

will be done.

Effluent generated due to container/vehicle/floor washing will be collected &

treated in effluent treatment plant. No effluent will be discharged outside plant

premises.

2.12.4 Noise Pollution

The major noise generation source will be incinerator operations, pumps attached to

the ETP & D.G sets. Necessary acoustic enclosures, wherever feasible will be

provided for all these facilities to limit the noise levels within prescribed limits.






2.12.5 Solid and Hazardous Waste Identification, Quantification, Storage &

Disposal

The proposed proposal has a manpower requirement of 15 persons. Municipal waste

generated at the site will be collected and handled in line with the provisions of the

Solid Waste Management Rules 2016.

Hazardous wastes generated at site will be handled & stored as per Hazardous &

Other Waste (Management and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016 and will be

disposed as per guidelines.

List of hazardous waste generation and its disposal facility is given below:

Table 2.12: Hazardous Waste Generation and its Disposal

S.

No Hazardous Waste Category Disposal Method

1. Chemical sludge from waste water treatment

Sludge 35.3

Send to authorized TSDF Site

after treatment in Incinerator

2. Sludge from wet scrubbers 37.1 Send to authorized TSDF Site

3. Ash from incinerator and flue gas cleaning

residue 37.2 Send to authorized TSDF Site

4. Concentration or evaporation residues 37.3 Send to authorized TSDF Site

5. Empty barrels/containers/liners contaminated

with hazardous chemical /wastes 33.1

Send to authorized TSDF Site

after treatment in Incinerator.

6. Used or spent oil 5.1 Send to authorized recycler

*******



Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter III

Chapter III

Description of Environment

Project: Common Hazardous Waste Incinerator & Other waste treatment facility at UPSIDC,


Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter III: Description of Environment



Chapter III: Description of Environment

3.1 Introduction

The anthropogenic activities related to common hazardous waste incinerator cause impacts

on environmental components in and around the project site. However, the intensity of

environmental impacts vary from project to projects, depends upon several factors like;

Physical, Chemical etc. involved in the project, processing capacity (scale / size of the

project), type and extent of pollution control measures, project location surrounding

geomorphology etc. To assess environmental impacts from proposed project (specific), it

is essential to monitor the environmental quality prevailing in the surrounding area prior to

implementation of the proposed project. The environmental status (baseline status) within

the study area is used for prediction of anticipated environmental impact assessment study.

The impacts from a hazardous waste treatment project on its surrounding environment are

due to the nature of pollutants, their quantities discharged to the environment, existing

environmental quality, assimilative capacity of the surrounding environment and

topography.

A regional background to the baseline data is being presented at the very onset, which will

help in better appreciation of micro-level field data, generated on several environmental

and ecological attributes of the study area. The baseline status of the project environment

is described section wise for better understanding of the broad-spectrum conditions. The

baseline environment quality represents the background environmental scenario of various

environmental components such as air, noise, land, ecological and socio-economic status

of the study area.

3.2. Study Area

An area of 10 km radius (aerial distance) from the proposed site is marked as study area.

The baseline information is collected for the identified study area, which includes the

project area and area within its 10 km radius.






The study area is a mix of industrial, urban, semi-urban & rural areas as the project is

located in Sikandrabad industrial area, District Bulandshahr, Uttar Pradesh.

Location Map and map showing Geographical Co-ordinates of the project area have been

given in Chapter-I, Figure 1.1 & 1.2, respectively. Map showing study area is given in

this chapter as Figure 3.1.

As per the EIA notification 2006 guidelines for preparing EIA report, baseline study of 10

km radius area surrounding the project site shall be covered under the study and the same

is denoted as study area. As part of the study, description of biological environment and

human environment such as environmental settings, demography & socio-economics,

land-use/land cover, ecology & biodiversity have been carried out for entire 10 km radius.

However, as a universally accepted methodology of EIA studies, physical and

environmental attributes such as meteorology, ambient air quality, water quality, soil

quality, noise levels, hydro-geology and solid waste generation have been studied at

selective locations representing various land use such as industrial, rural/ residential,

commercial and sensitive locations including the densely populated areas, agricultural

lands, forest lands and other ecologically sensitive areas, if any falling within 10 km

radius study area. Secondary data deemed necessary was collected from various

Government organizations and Institutes.






Fig 3.1: Map showing study area

3.3. Period of Baseline Studies

The baseline status of the project environment is described section wise for better

understanding of the broad-spectrum conditions. Field monitoring studies to evaluate the






baseline status of the project site has been carried out during the period of December 2018

to February 2019 covering winter season. The reports are enclosed as Annexure IV.

Table 3.1: Baseline period

Project Period Season

Common facility for hazardous waste incinerator (10 MT/day), E-

Waste dismantling & segregation and recycling/reconditioning of

discarded containers.

December 2018 to

February 2019

Winter

season

3.4. Components of Baseline Studies

Various components of environment that need to be taken into consideration during the

baseline data generation are as under:-

Land Environment

Air Environment

Water Environment

Soil Environment

Noise Environment

Eco-Biodiversity

Socio – Economic Environment

3.5. Monitoring Methodology

Ambient Air Quality: Fine Particulate Matter (FPM) Sampler, APM 550 has been

used for PM2.5 sampling. Respirable Dust Sampler with attachment for gaseous

Pollutants, Environment APM 460BL has been used for PM10 sampling. RDS with

Gaseous attachment assembly is used for the collection of gaseous pollutants such as

SO2, NOx and other gaseous pollutants.

Meteorological Data: Micro Meteorological Station Model Enviro Wm 251 was

installed during the study period to record various meteorological parameters on






hourly basis to understand the wind pattern, temperature variation, solar insulation

and relative humidity variation.

Water: Ground & Surface water samples were collected as per CPCB standards, and

analysis was carried out as per standard methods for ground water.

Noise: Sound Level Meter Model SL – 4010 meter has been used for the collection of

data related to noise at an interval of one hour per reading. Noise level for 24 hours

was conducted during one week period at pre decided locations.

Soil: Representative soil sample was collected from project site for analysis of

physico-chemical characteristic. Standard procedures, as per CPCB and other

published methods were followed for sampling and analysis.

3.5.1. Locations of monitoring stations

Eight monitoring stations including proposed project site were selected for monitoring of

Ambient Air, Ground Water, Soil analysis and Noise. Surface water monitoring was done

at five locations in the study area. The monitoring stations were selected on the selected

on the basis of surface influence, demographic influence and metrological influence. The

list of monitoring locations along with their latitude and longitude is given in table below:

Table 3.2: List of Monitoring Locations

S.

No.

Monitoring

Locations

Station

Code

Parameter Distance w.r.t

Project Site (km)

Direction w.r.t

Project Site

1.

Project Site

AAQ-1 Air

- - GW-1 Ground Water

S-1 Soil

N-1 Noise

2.

Rajarampur

AAQ-2 Air

~1.50 N GW-2 Ground Water

S-2 Soil

N-2 Noise

3.

Mandaora

AAQ-3 Air

~4.0 ENE GW-3 Ground Water

S-3 Soil

N-3 Noise

4.

Sikandrabad

AAQ-4 Air

~4.0 ESE GW-4 Ground Water

S-4 Soil

N-4 Noise

5. Faridpur AAQ-5 Air ~3.1 SSE






S.

No.

Monitoring

Locations

Station

Code

Parameter Distance w.r.t

Project Site (km)

Direction w.r.t

Project Site

GW-5 Ground Water

S-5 Soil

N-5 Noise

6.

Manhcha

AAQ-6 Air

~6.2 WSW GW-6 Ground Water

S-6 Soil

N-6 Noise

7.

Salehpur

AAQ-7 Air

~2.4 WSW GW-7 Ground Water

S-7 Soil

N-7 Noise

8.

Tilbegampur

AAQ-8 Air

~2.5 WNW GW-8 Ground Water

S-8 Soil

N-8 Noise

Fig. 3.2: Topographical Map showing location of monitoring stations

3.6. Land Environment

Land Use /Land Cover Study has been done with the aim to:

To develop land use & land cover map using land coordinates of the project area.






To describe the present Land Use

To assess the impact of the project on existing land use of the project area.

To suggest measures for conservation and sustainable use of land.

3.6.1. Establishment of baseline data:

Detailed interpretation of baseline date is as under:-

Material and methods:

The details of study area, collection of relevant satellite images, ground-truth observation,

and the use of software and analytical tools used in the current study.

Geographical location of the study area: -

The project is for environmental clearance of “Common Hazardous Waste Incinerator &

Other waste treatment facility” coming up at Plot No. D- 26, UPSIDC, Sikandrabad

Industrial Area, District Bulandshahr, Uttar Pradesh. The total geographical area of study

area is 31695.6 ha. The survey of India toposheets 53 H/10, 53 H/11, 53 H/14, 53 H/15

were used for geo referencing the study area.

Materials: - The equipment used during the present investigation includes ground truth hand

held GARMIN 12 GPS receiver for ground truth collection, besides the visual observation and

analysis.

Garmin 12 GPS receiver: - Global Positioning System is based on a constellation of 24

satellites orbiting the Earth at a very high altitude of 20,200 km, which allows anyone with

a GPS receiver to determine the precise 3-D location. It offers advantages of accuracy,

speed, versatility and economy while in use as an aid for position based data collection.

GPS owes its popularity to the dependable high accuracy with which position and time can

be determined. The termination of selective availability from first May 2000 has instantly

increased the accuracy of stand-alone mode GPS to at least five fold and things are going to

get even better in the near future. The GPS was conceived as a ranging system from known

positions of satellites in space to unknown positions on land, sea and space. GPS uses

pseudo ranges derived from the broadcast satellites. The pseudo ranges were derived either

from measuring the travel time of the (coded) signal and multiplying it by its velocity or by






measuring the phase of the signal. The antenna detects the electromagnetic waves arriving

from the satellites, converts the wave energy into an electric current, amplifies the signal

strength and sends the signals to the receiver electronics. The GARMIN 12 GPS Receiver

in stand-alone mode was used to collect the information regarding the geographical location

of the ground truth sites during the present investigation.

Satellite data: - The Indian Remote Sensing satellite IRS-1C/1D/P6 LISS IV was used for

present analysis. Four scenes of IRS P6 LISS IV covered the entire study area.

Topographical maps of the study area: - The Survey of India Toposheet 53H/10, 53H/11,

53H/14, 53H/15 covering Bulandshahr District of Uttar Pradesh, was used as reference

map for geo-referencing of the remote sensing data. These maps helped to select the

ground truth collection sites.

Ancillary data: - Information derived from the remotely sensed data can only be verified

using field data. Field data is used to improve the information extraction, to calibrate either

data or the information and to assess the accuracy of the derived information. Field data

used in the study was of different types such as maps of Survey of India, data collected in

the field sampling, and information derived from statistical data from revenue department.

Computer hardware and software: - HP P-4 dual core PC with ERDAS IMAGINE 8.5

image analysis software was used for processing and analysis of the remote sensing data.

ArcGIS version 10.1 was used for making land use maps.

Spatial observations: - Spatial measurements were made with the help of hand held GPS to

get the spatial coordinated along with type of land use.

The raw LISS IV spectral information’s was collected in the three bands as detailed below:

Band 1: Green region, 0.52-0.59 µm

Band 2: Red region, 0.62-0.68 µm

Band 3: Near infrared region, 0.77-0.86 µm

Data & Methodology:-

For the present land use study LISS-IV sensor data of IRS-P6 satellite has been used

which has a spatial resolution of 5.8 m, which is good enough for Level-II classification.

National Remote Sensing Centre (NRSC), Hyderabad classification scheme has been






followed for present land use study. First of all the .tiff file is imported to .img format,

geometric corrections were performed and data prepared for further process was done.

Unsupervised classification method has been adopted followed by visual interpretation

technique for 10 km radius and a total of 7 classes have been obtained.

Digital image analysis: - The various steps involved in the digital image analysis of

remote sensing data area follows.

For digital image processing and analysis, preliminary work like collection of maps,

reports, remote sensing images, collection and study of collateral and ground truth data

were done first. Among all, ground truth data collection is very important for subsequent

digital analysis. The HP P-4 dual core PC with ERDAS IMAGINE 8.5 software was used

for processing and analysis of remote sensing data. The toposheets of the study area on

1:25,000 scales were scanned and were geometrically corrected in the DATA

PREPARATION panel of ERDAS IMAGINE 8.5. The IRS P6 LISS IV Image of the

study area was loaded into the ERDAS IMAGINE using the IMPORT option. Later,

geometric correction of the image was done with the help of the geometrically corrected

SOI Toposheets and Ground Control Points (GCPs) collected with the GPS receiver. The

raw image data when viewed on the display showed the difficulty indistinguishing all

features. Preliminary interpretation of the satellite data was conducted and GCPs, which

were distributed randomly throughout the image with minimum root mean square (rms)

error of less than 0.5 were selected. Polynomial transformation of 1st order was used

because the correction program runs faster with it and it also avoids geometric distortion

in areas of very few GCPs. After completing geometric correction of the image, study

area boundary overlay was done. The study area boundary was digitized from SOI

toposheets using AOI tools polygon and vector options, saved as AOI layers. This AOI

layer was used as administrative boundary mask and the subsets of the respective blocks

was prepared using subset image option of data preparation panel. The unsupervised

classification was used to prepare the LULC map of the study area of the proposed project

as given below:






Fig 3.3: Land Use/ Land Cover Map of Study Area






Fig 3.4: False Color Composite Map of Study area

3.6.2. Description of Land use: -

1. Land with or without Scrub covers a geographical area of 7468.5 ha. (23.6 %).

2. Irrigated Crop Land covers a geographical area 11243.3 ha. (35.5%) this land

primarily used for farming and for production of food, fiber and other commercial and

horticultural crops.

3. Industrial area covers a geographical area of 670.8 ha. (13.6 %).

4. Built up Land covers a geographical area with a total of 1848.1 ha. (5.8 %) this land

primarily used for Rural and Urban settlement, it is an area of human habitation

developed due to non-agricultural use and that has a cover of buildings, transport and

communication, utilities in association with that.

5. Fallow Land covers a geographical area 6112.9 ha. (19.3 %) Agriculture fallow is the

lands, which is taken up for cultivation but is temporarily allowed to rest, un-cropped

for one or more season, but not less than one year

6. Water Bodies (River/Pond) covers a geographical area 71.5 ha. (0.2%) Canals are

main water body in the study area

7. Waste Land covers a geographical area of 4280.50 ha. (13.50 %)






Fig 3.5: Chart showing Land use/Land Cover Pattern of the Study Area

Table 3.3: Land-Use Classification

S. No. Land use Classification Area (Ha) Area (%)

1. Water body (River/Pond) 71.5 0.2

2. Industrial Area 670.8 2.1

3. Built up 1848.1 5.8

4. Irrigated Crop Land 11243.3 35.5

5. Fallow Land 6112.9 19.3

6. Land with or without Scrub 7468.5 23.6

7. Waste Land 4280.5 13.5

Total 31695.6 100.0

Figure 3.6 below depicts the Normalized Difference Vegetative Index (NDVI) of the

study area






Fig 3.6: NDVI Classification Map of the Study Area

3.6.3. Topography and Drainage

On the basis of geology, soil, topography, climate and natural vegetation, the district

Bulandshahr is divided into the following sub-micro-regions, Bulandshahr Plain and

Ganga khaddar.

Sikandrabad Tehsil is located in the Bulandshahr plain which is situated in the central part

of the district & covers partly Siana, Bulandshahr, Khurja and Sikandrabad tehsils. It is

bifurcated by the water catchment of Nim nadi in the east and Karwan in the west. The

east Kali and Karwan rivers collect water of this belt and flow parallel to each other.

Although these streams originate from the depressions in the plain, yet they are perennial.

It is perfectly a gentle plain with north to south slope. Other physiographic phenomenons

are negligible. Geographically, the region belongs to Alluvium Dun gravels, while the

main soil sub-order associations is Ochrepts-Psamments. Culturally the plain is very rich

The general surface of the district presents almost uniform level plain with an

imperceptible gradual slope from north-west to south-east. Highest and lowest contour is

200 m & 220 m in the area.






Fig. 3.7: Contour Map of Study area

Digital elevation map showing the surface topography of the study area is given below:

Fig. 3.8: Digital Elevation Model of the Study area

The principal rivers and streams of the district are Ganga and Yamuna, Kali, Karban and

Nim Nadi. First two are perennial and the rest are seasonal. Except for the occurrence of

some depressions and usar lands here and there, particularly in parts of Sikandrabad, Khurja






and Baran parganas, the entire plain of the Bulandshahr district is marked by large fertile

tracts.

The drainage pattern follows the topographical slopes in the study area. Rain water flows

from NNW to SSE following the general drainage pattern.

Fig. 3.9: Drainage Map of Study area

Flood Hazard Map of Uttar Pradesh is as below:

Fig.3.10: Flood Hazard Map of the Area

3.6.4. Seismicity of the Area

Geologically this region is a fore-deep, a downwarp of the Himalayan foreland, of

variable depth, converted into flat plains by long-vigorous sedimentation.

Earthquakes have occurred in mostly all parts of Uttar Pradesh. Major earthquakes in the

neighboring states of New Delhi, Uttarakhand, Bihar and from across the Indo-Nepal

border have also shaken many parts of Uttar Pradesh.






Fig. 3.11: Seismic zone map of Uttar Pradesh

In view point of seismicity, District Bulandshahr lies in a MSK VIII i.e. high damage risk

zone. However, it must be stated that proximity to faults does not necessarily translate

into a higher hazard as compared to areas located further away, as damage from

earthquakes depends on numerous factors such as subsurface geology as well as

adherence to the building codes.

3.7. Soil Environment

Soil may be defined as a thin layer of earth’s crust which serves as a natural medium for

the growth of plants. It is unconsolidated mineral matter that has been subjected to and

influenced by genetic and environmental factors, such as parent material climate organism

and physiochemical action of wind, water and sunlight all acting over a long period of

time. Soil differs from the parent materials in the morphological, physical, chemical and

biological properties.

For studying soil quality of the region, a sample was collected to assess the existing soil

conditions in and around the project area.

The sample was collected by ramming a core-cutter into the soil up to a depth of 90 cm.

The present study on the soil quality establishes the baseline characteristics and identifies

the incremental concentrations if any, due to the proposed project. The objective of the

sampling is:

To determine the baseline soil characteristics of the study area;

To determine the impact of proposed activity on soil characteristics; and

To determine the impact on soils more importantly from agricultural productivity

point of view.

The soil sample was collected from three different depths viz. 30 cm, 60 cm and 90 cm.

The samples was then packed in a polythene plastic bag and sealed.






Standard soil classification as per Indian Council of Agricultural Research (ICAR) is as

below:

Table 3.4: Standard Soil Classification

S. No. Soil Test Classification

1. pH <4.5 Extremely acidic

4.51- 5.50 Very strongly acidic

5.51-6.00 moderately acidic

6.01-6.50 slightly acidic

6.51-7.30 Neutral

7.31-7.80 slightly alkaline

7.81-8.50 moderately alkaline

8.51-9.0 strongly alkaline

9.01 very strongly alkaline

2. Salinity Electrical Conductivity

(Mmhos/cm)

(1ppm = 640 Mmho/cm)

Up to 1.00 Average

1.01-2.00 harmful to germination

2.01-3.00 harmful to crops (sensitive to salts)

3. Organic Carbon (%) Up to 0.2: very less

0.21-0.4: less

0.41-0.5 medium

0.51-0.8: on an average sufficient

0.81-1.00: sufficient

>1.0 more than sufficient

4. Nitrogen (Kg/ha) Up to 50 very less

51-100 less

101-150 good

151-300 Better

>300 sufficient

5. Phosphorus (Kg/ha) Up to 15 very less

16-30 less

31-50 medium

51-65 on an average sufficient

66-80 sufficient

>80 more than sufficient

Source: Hand Book of Agriculture, Indian Council of Agricultural Research






Data Generation Methodology

For studying soil profile of the region, sampling locations were selected to assess the

existing soil conditions in and around the plant area representing various land use

conditions. The physical, chemical and heavy metal concentrations were determined. The

samples were collected by ramming a core-cutter into the soil up to a depth of 90 cm.

The present study of the soil profile establishes the baseline characteristics and this will

help in future identification of the incremental concentrations if any, due to the operation

of the plant. The sampling locations have been identified with the following objectives:

To determine the baseline soil characteristics of the study area;

To determine the impact of industrialization on soil characteristics; and

To determine the impact on soils more importantly from agricultural productivity

point of view.

1.1.1 Locations of Sampling for Soil Analysis

Eight locations in and around the proposed project were selected for soil sampling. The

details of the monitoring locations are given in above Table 3.2. At each location, soil

samples were collected from three different depths viz. 30 cm, 60 cm and 90 cm below

the surface and are homogenized. This is in line with IS: 2720 and IS: 9497 and Hand

book of Method in Environmental Studies by S.K. Maiti. The homogenized samples were

analyzed for physical and chemical characteristics.

1.1.2 Baseline Soil Status

The soil analysis results are presented in Table below. The nutrient and organic matter

contents are medium and the soil in the study area is found to be normally fertile.

Table 3.5: Soil Analysis Results

S.

No. Parameter Unit

Sampling Location

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8

1. pH ---- 8.11 7.46 7.35 7.89 7.58 7.91 6.54 8.15

2. Electrical

Conductivity µmhos 362 355 269 416 362 329 287 409






S.

No. Parameter Unit

Sampling Location

S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 S8

/cm

3. Moisture % 13.2 17.2 16.8 21.5 22.9 15.2 17.2 16.5

4.

Soil texture ----

Sandy

Clay

Loam

Sandy

Loam

Loamy

Sand

Sandy

Loam

Sandy

Clay

Loam

Sandy

Clay

Loam

Sandy

Loam

Sandy

Clay

Loam

Clay % 32 13 5 19 30 23 5 33

Silt % 21 31 14 8 18 5 38 5

Sand % 47 56 81 73 52 72 57 62

5. Infiltration

Rate cm/hr 1.1 1.36 1.42 1.54 1.22 1.35 1.39 1.41

6. Bulk density gm/cm3 1.53 1.54 1.50 1.49 1.50 1.51 1.50 1.52

7. Porosity % 42.5 42.1 43.6 44.0 43.6 43.2 43.6 42.9

8. Nitrogen as N kg/ha as P 109.5 169.5 185.2 145.6 172.5 154.6 156.9 179.2

9. Phosphorus kg/ha as P 41.6 36.5 58.7 41.2 59.8 65.4 49.5 57.9

10. Potassium as

K kg/ha as K 122.5 215.2 236.4 257.2 216.5 229.4 234.1 218.7

11. Organic

Carbon % 0.38 0.78 1.22 1.73 1.42 1.75 0.96 1.51

12. Organic matter % 0.65 1.35 2.11 2.98 2.45 3.01 1.65 2.61

1.1.3 Observations:

Texture of the soil samples ranges from sandy loam, loamy sand to sandy clay loam.

Bulk density reflects the soil’s ability to function for structural support, water and

solute movement, and soil aeration. Bulk density of soil samples were in range of 1.49

gm/cm3 to 1.54 gm/cm3.

The porosity ranged from 42.1 - 44 %.

Soil pH is a characteristic that describes the relative acidity or alkalinity of the soil.

pH of the soil samples ranged from 6.54 to 8.58, which reflects that the soil is near

neutral to moderately alkaline in nature indicating that soils do not pose a problem of

either salinity or sodicity.

Infiltration rate is a good indicator of soil structure and therefore, soil health, as

infiltration depends on the level of aggregation (crumb structure) that has formed in






the topsoil. Better aggregated (healthy) soils allow water to percolate much faster than

poor soils. Infiltration rate of the soil samples ranged from 1.1 cm/hr to 1.54 cm/hr.

The organic matter in the soil ranged from 0.65% to 2.98 %.

The concentration of available Nitrogen, Phosphorous and Potassium in the soil

samples is 109 to 185.2 kg/ha, 36.5 to 59.8 kg/ha, 122.5 to 257.2 kg/ha.

3.8. Climatology and Micrometeorology

The micrometeorological data helps for appropriate understanding of the baseline micro

climatic status of the study area as well as for input into prediction models to evaluate air

dispersion phenomenon. Chronological data on meteorological parameters also helps

identifying the general errors encountered during generation of micro meteorological data

of the region. The year is broadly divided into four seasons as per IMD:

Winter season : December to February

Pre-monsoon season : March to May

Monsoon season : June to September

Post-monsoon season : October to November

3.8.1 Methodology

The methodology adopted for monitoring surface observations is as per the standard

norms laid down by Bureau of Indian Standards (IS: 8829) and India Meteorological

Department (IMD). The data on meteorological parameters in the study area were

monitored for the period December 2018 to February 2019. The data was monitored from

an automated weather-monitoring station. The instrument was located to allow free

exposure to atmosphere all through the study period. The summary of meteorological data

is given in Table 3.5.

3.8.2 Wind Pattern

Wind speed and direction data recorded during the study period is useful in identifying the

influence of meteorology on the air quality of the area.

Based on the meteorological data obtained from the region, percentage frequencies of wind

in 16 directions have been computed from the recorded data during the study period






(December, 2018 - February 2019) to plot wind rose. Fig. 3.10 represents the summary of the

wind pattern.

The winds were predominantly recorded from NW closely followed by West direction during

the season. Averaged wind speed for the period is 1.80 m/s.

Fig. 3.10: Wind Rose of Study Period

The summary of recorded micro meteorological data for the study period at project site is

presented in Table below:

Table 3.6: Onsite Meteorological Data

Period

Temperature

(oC)

Wind Speed

(km/hr)

R. Humidity

(%)

Rain

fall Predominant

wind directions Min Max Average Min Max (mm)

December 9.7 27.6 5.9 51.3 79.8 2.0 North West to

South East January 10.3 27.1 6.8 43.6 84.3 50.7

February 11.2 28.3 7.3 42.6 80.3 22.3

3.9. Air Environment

The ambient air quality with respect to the study zone around the proposed project site forms

the baseline information. The various sources of air pollution in the region are traffic,

industrial, urban and rural activities. This will also be useful for assessing the conformity to






standards of the ambient air quality during operation. This section describes the selection of

sampling locations, methodology adopted for sampling, analytical techniques and frequency

of sampling. The results of monitoring carried out for study period from December 2018 to

February 2019 representing winter season are presented in follow-up sections.

3.9.1 Methodology

Selection of Sampling Locations

The baseline status of the ambient air quality has been assessed through a scientifically

designed ambient air quality-monitoring network. The design of monitoring network in the

air quality surveillance program has been based on the following considerations:

Meteorological conditions on synoptic scale

The methodology for conducting the baseline environmental survey and selection of

sampling locations considered the guidelines given in the EIA manual of the MoEF&CC

Topography of the study area

Representatives of regional background air quality for obtaining baseline status; and

Representatives of likely impact areas.

Ambient Air Quality Monitoring (AAQM) stations were set up at eight locations. The details

of the monitoring location are given in above Table 3.1.

Frequency and Parameters for Sampling

Ambient air quality monitoring has been carried out with a frequency of two days per week

during study period. The duration of sampling of PM10, PM2.5, SO2, and NOx was done

twenty-four hourly continuous sampling per day and CO was sampled for 8 hours continuous

thrice in 24 hour duration monitoring.

To collect the samples, Envirotech Make Calibrated Respirable Dust Samplers (RDS-APM

460 BL) along with Gaseous attachment and Fine Particulate Matter (FPS-APM 550) were

used. The instruments are well capable of drawing air at a flow rate of 1 to 1.3 m3/min with

very little pressure drop for RDS and the impactor system of FPS is designed to operate at an

air flow rate of 1m3/hr. Filter papers (8”x10” GF for PM10 and 46.2 dia. PTFE for PM2.5)






were used for the collection of PM10 and PM2.5. SO2 was collected by drawing air at a flow-

rate of 0.5 liters per minute (lpm) through an absorbing solution i.e., Sodium

tetrachloromercurate (TCM) (West and Gaeke Method) and NOx was collected by drawing

air at a flow rate of 0.4 lpm through the mixture of absorbing solutions i.e. sodium hydroxide

and sodium arsenite (Jacobs and Hochheiser Method). Carbon Monoxide samples were

collected on 1 hourly base in Mylar bags and analyzed by Non-Dispersive Infra-Red

Spectroscopy (NDIR). This is to allow a comparison with the present revised standards

mentioned in the latest Gazette Notification of the Central Pollution Control Board

(November 2009).

The baseline data of air environment was monitored for parameters mentioned below as per

latest Gazette Notification of the Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) on NAAQ dated

18th November 2009. The ambient air quality parameters along with their frequency of

sampling are given in Table below:

Table 3.7: Monitored parameters and frequency of sampling

S. No. Parameters Sampling Frequency

1. Particulate Matter (PM10) 24 hourly sample twice a week for three months

2. Respirable Particulate Matter (PM2.5) 24 hourly sample twice a week for three months

3. Sulphur dioxide (SO2) 24 hourly sample twice a week for three months

4. Nitrogen dioxide (NOx) 24 hourly sample twice a week for three months

5. Carbon Mono-oxide 8 hourly samples for 24 hour twice a week for three

months

Method of Analysis

The air samples were analyzed as per standard methods specified by CPCB, IS: 5182 and

American Public Health Association (APHA). The techniques used for ambient air quality

monitoring and minimum detectable levels are given in Table below:

Table 3.8: Techniques used for ambient air quality monitoring






S. No Parameters Test Method

1. Particulate Matter (PM10) IS : 5182 Part-23

2. Respirable Particulate Matter (PM2.5) FRM Method/Low volume sampling

(Gravimetric)

3. Sulphur dioxide (SO2) IS : 5182 (P-2) Improved West & Geake

4. Nitrogen dioxide (NOx) IS : 5182 (P-6)

5. Carbon Mono-oxide IS : 5182 (P-10) NDRI Spectroscopy

3.9.2 Presentation of AAQ Data

Various statistical parameters like 98th percentile, average, maximum and minimum values

have been computed from the observed raw data for all the AAQ monitoring stations. The

results are of monitoring carried out for study period from December 2018 to February 2019

representing winter season. The parameters have been studied and determined quantitatively

through planned monitoring. The summary of these results for each location representing

winter season are presented in follow-up sections .The results are compared with the

standards prescribed by CPCB for industrial and rural /residential zone.

Table 3.9: Summary of Ambient Air Quality Results

S.

No.

Sampling Location Parameters

PM10

(µg/m3)

PM2.5

(µg/m3)

SO2

(µg/m3)

NOx

(µg/m3)

CO

(mg/m3)

1.

Project Site

(AAQ-1)

Average 278.9 134.5 11.1 38.2 2.55

Minimum 236.2 105.0 7.0 21.2 1.35

Maximum 256.7 113.3 18.2 28.0 1.90

98th %ile 278.6 130.7 16.4 36.5 2.46

2.

Rajarampur

(AAQ-2)

Average 245.2 115.0 9.9 36.5 1.98

Minimum 196.2 78.0 7.0 22.3 0.98

Maximum 223.8 99.4 13.2 29.1 1.47

98th %ile 243.6 113.7 12.9 36.1 1.96

3.

Mandaora

(AAQ-3)

Average 198.5 69.5 11.4 28.5 1.36

Minimum 132.5 48.2 7.2 16.2 0.69

Maximum 170.3 60.2 14.2 21.6 1.03

98th %ile 196.1 68.4 14.2 28.3 1.35

4. Sikandrabad Average 344.2 162.3 12.6 42.1 2.64






S.

No.

Sampling Location Parameters

PM10

(µg/m3)

PM2.5

(µg/m3)

SO2

(µg/m3)

NOx

(µg/m3)

CO

(mg/m3)

(AAQ-4) Minimum 269.5 109.0 7.9 24.2 1.16

Maximum 306.0 130.1 18.1 31.6 1.97

98th %ile 342.8 157.3 17.7 40.8 2.59

5.

Faridpur

(AAQ-5)

Average 194.0 59.5 9.3 27.2 1.64

Minimum 148.0 42.0 5.4 16.0 0.69

Maximum 175.1 53.2 12.4 21.8 0.98

98th %ile 192.8 59.5 12.0 26.9 1.44

6.

Manhcha

(AAQ-6)

Average 254.2 92.2 11.0 28.4 1.66

Minimum 165.5 55.5 8.7 18.4 0.65

Maximum 210.7 73.4 13.5 23.6 1.25

98th %ile 249.6 89.8 13.4 28.3 1.64

7.

Salehpur (AAQ-7)

Average 212.2 64.2 10.7 26.9 1.16

Minimum 145.0 43.2 8.7 15.8 0.45

Maximum 173.0 53.1 14.0 20.5 0.90

98th %ile 209.5 63.4 13.3 26.0 1.14

8.

Tilbegampur (AAQ-8)

Average 198.4 62.2 10.8 26.4 1.14

Minimum 148.5 43.2 6.9 10.6 0.68

Maximum 173.7 52.6 14.2 19.5 0.94

98th %ile 198.2 61.7 14.1 25.1 1.13

NAAQ STANDARDS 100 60 80 80 04

3.9.3 Observations

Respirable Particulate Matter (PM10)

A minimum value of 132.5μg/m3 was observed at Mandaora and maximum value of

269.5μg/m3 was observed at Sikandrabad. The average values were observed to be in

the range of 194.0μg/m3 to 344.2μg/m3. The values for Respirable Particulate Matter

at all the eight sampling locations are above the prescribed standards of CPCB.

Particulate Matter (PM2.5):

A minimum value of 42.0μg/m3 was observed at Faridpur and maximum value of

162.3μg/m3 was observed at Sikandrabad. The average values were observed to be in

the range of 52.6 μg/m3 to 130.1 μg/m3. The values for PM2.5 at sampling locations

are above the prescribed limits by CPCB.






Sulphur Dioxide (SO2)

Minimum concentration of SO2 is observed to be 5.4 μg/m3 at Faridpur & maximum

value of 18.2 μg/m3 observed at Project Site. The average values were observed to be

in the range of 9.3 μg/m3 to 12.6 μg/m3. All the values are well within the prescribed

limit of CPCB.

Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx)

Minimum concentration of NOx is observed to be 10.6 μg/m3 at Tilbegampur &

minimum value of 42.1μg/m3 observed at Sikandrabad. The average values were

observed to be in the range of 19.5μg/m3 to 31.6 μg/m3. All the values are well within

the prescribed limit of CPCB.

Carbon Monoxide (CO):

Minimum concentration of CO is observed to be 0.45 mg/m3 at Salehpur and

maximum value of 2.64 mg/m3 observed at Sikandrabad. The average values were

observed to be in the range of 0.90 mg/m3 to 1.97 mg/m3. All the values are within

the prescribed limit of CPCB.

3.10. Water Environment

3.10.1 Hydrogeology

The project site falls in Sikandrabad block of Bulandshahar District, which comes under

Non-notified–Over exploited area as per CGWB classification. Bulandshahar district

forming a part of Ganga-Yamuna Doab, lies in the western part of Uttar Pradesh, Eastern

boundary of the district being defined by river Ganga. The district is an almost

monotonous plain with occurrence of sand dunes, and sandy ridges, ravineous tracts and

depressions close to river Ganga. At times, close to other minor rivers also, occurrence

of minor sandy mounds can be seen. At places, close to river system, badland

topography has developed which is due to differentiated erosions. Kankar-lenses and

beds are seen exposed and form mounds. The fertile and cultivated soil expanses are

sometimes broken by barren expanses of flat lands which are user lands having kankar

at shallow depth as well as alkaline soils on the surface spread as white sheet.






The elevation of land surface varies from 207.4 amsl at Gulaothi in the north to 193.8

amsl in the south at the boundary of district.

Major part of the land surface lies within the upland surface between the valleys of two

rivers- Ganga and Karwan Nadi. This upland surface is dissected by minor drainages

namely Kali Nadi & Nim Nadi which run more or less parallel to each other in the

district and have developed district valley floor.

Ground water occurs in the pore spaces of the unconsolidated alluvial sediments in the

zone of saturation. The near surface sediments are dominantly sandy clays and clays

which grade into sediments having varied proportions of sand and clays. These

sediments occur as inter layered sequence and pockets. Kankar is generally present in

clay in the form of lenses and layers as well as is interspersed. These mixed sediments

occur down upto 20 m and support large number of dug wells. The depth of dug wells

range between 6 m to 20 m.

3.10.2 Climate & Rainfall:

The normal annual total rainfall is 696 mm. In the year 2011 the total average rainfall

was only 258.35. About 90% of rainfall takes place from June to September. During

monsoon surplus water is available for deep percolation to ground water.

During monsoon season the relative humidity is generally high which decreases rapidly

till summer which is the driest part of the year. The mean monthly morning relative

humidity is 65% and mean monthly evening relative humidity is 45%.

3.10.3 Geomorphology

The district of Bulandshahar can be divided into two broad geologic units namely –.

1. Younger alluvium

(i) Younger Flood Plain

(ii) Older Flood Plain

2. Older Alluvium occupies the entire upland area

(i) Sandy soil/sandy ridges






Depth to Water Level

Depth to water level in Bulandshahr district during pre-monsoon varies from 5 mbgl to

15 mbgl and after post monsoon it varies from 4 to 10 mbgl.

Ground water flows from NNW to SSE following the general drainage pattern. Upper

Ganga Canal contributes a substantial amount to ground water. Upper Ganga Canal

more or less coincides with the ground water divide.

Source: DGWB Publication, Bulandshar district, 2013

Fig. 3.11: Depth of water level pre Monsoon (May 2012)

Source: DGWB Publication, Bulandshar district, 2013 Fig. 3.12: Depth of water level Post Monsoon (Nov 2012)






Status of Ground Water Development

Development of ground water in the district is mainly through dug wells, hand - pumps

and tube-wells.

Table 3.10: Status of Ground Water Development

S. No Particular Details

1 Net annual GW availability 1451MCM

2 Existing Ground Water Draft for all uses 1119 MCM

3 Stage of GW development 77.15 %

4 Area Type Non- notified – Over Exploited

5 Fresh water requirement for the project 4.0 KLD (from tanker supply)

At the time of site visit the actual ground water of the study area was recorded as 32-35

m bgl during pre - monsoon season.

3.10.4 Ground Water & Surface Water Quality

Ground water resources and surface water in the study area have been studied for

assessing the water environment and evaluate anticipated impact of the proposed

project. Understanding the water quality is essential in preparation of Environmental

Impact Assessment and to identify critical issues with a view to suggest appropriate

mitigation measures for implementation.

The purpose of this study is to:

Assess the water quality characteristics for critical parameters;

Evaluate the impacts on agricultural productivity, habitat conditions, recreational

resources and aesthetics in the vicinity; and

Predict impact on water quality by this project and related activities.

The information required has been collected through primary surveys and secondary

sources.






3.10.4.1 Methodology

Reconnaissance survey was undertaken and monitoring locations were finalized based

on:

Drainage pattern and main water bodies;

Location of industrial and residential areas representing different activities/likely

impact areas; and

Location of residential areas representing different activities/likely impact areas;

and

Likely areas, which can represent baseline conditions.

Eight ground water samples & five surface water samples were taken from the study

area.

The water samples were examined for physico-chemical parameters, heavy metals and

bacteriological parameters in order to assess the present ground water & surface water

quality of the area. The samples were collected and analyzed as per the procedures

specified in ‘Standard Methods for the Examination of Water and Wastewater’

published by American Public Health Association (APHA). Samples for chemical

analyses were collected in polyethylene carboys. Samples for bacteriological analyses

were collected in sterilized bottles. Samples collected for metal content were acidified

with 1 ml HNO3. Temperature, pH, conductivity and dissolved oxygen were measured

at site itself.

Analytical Techniques

Table 3.11: Analytical Protocol followed for Water Quality Monitoring and Analysis

S. No. Parameter Protocol Followed Detection Limit

1. pH IS:3025 (Part-11) 2

2. Total Hardness (as CaCO3), mg/l IS:3025 (Part-21) 6.6

3. Iron (as Fe), mg/l IS:3025 (Part-53) 0.3

4. Chlorides (as Cl), mg/l IS:3025 (Part-32) 1

5. Fluoride (as F), mg/l IS:3025 (Part-23) 0.1

6. Total Dissolved solids, mg/l IS:3025 (Part-16) 25

7. Magnesium (as Mg), mg/l IS:3025 (Part-46) 10






S. No. Parameter Protocol Followed Detection Limit

8. Calcium (as Ca), mg/l IS:3025 (Part-40 1

9. Copper (as Cu), mg/l IS:3025 (Part-42) 0.01

10. Manganese as Mn, mg/l IS:3025 (Part-35) 0.01

11. Phenolic Compounds (as C6H5OH), mg/l IS:3025 (Part-43) 0.001

12. Mercury (as Hg), mg/l IS:3025 (Part-48)

Mercury Analyzer

0.001

13. Cadmium (as Cd), mg/l IS:3025 (Part-41) 0.002

14. Selenium (as Se), mg/l

IS:3025 (Part-56)/IS

15303

0.01

15. Arsenic (as As), mg/l IS:3025 (Part-37) 0.01

16. Cyanide (as CN), mg/l IS:3025 (Part-27) 0.002

17. Lead (as Pb), mg/l IS:3025 (Part-47) 0.01

18. Zinc (as Zn), mg/l IS:3025 (Part-49) 0.2

19. Chromium (as Cr+6), mg/l IS:3025 (Part-52) 0.01

20. Alkalinity (as CaCO3), mg/l IS:3025 (Part-23) 0.5

21. Aluminium (as Al), mg/l IS:3025 (Part-55) 0.01

Table 3.12: Primary Water Quality Criteria for Designated-Best-Use-Classes

Designated-Best-Use Category Criteria Description

Drinking Water Source

without conventional

treatment but after

disinfection

A Total Coliforms Organism MPN/100ml shall be 50 or less

pH between 6.5 and 8.5

Dissolved Oxygen 6 mg/l or more

Biochemical Oxygen Demand (5 days 20oC) 2mg/l or less

Outdoor bathing (Organized) B Total Coliforms Organism MPN/100ml shall be 500 or less

pH between 6.5 and 8.5



Drinking water source after

conventional treatment and

disinfection

C Total Coliforms Organism MPN/100ml shall be 5000 or

less

pH between 6 to 9







Source: CPCB

3.10.4.2 Water Sampling Locations

Water samples were collected from eight locations for Ground water. These samples

were taken as grab samples and were analyzed for various parameters to compare with

the standards as prescribed for drinking water (IS: 10500). The ground water sampling

location details are given in Table 3.2. The water sampling locations for surface water

are given in table below:

Table 3.13: Surface water monitoring locations

S. No. Location Name Station

Code

Distance from project

site (Km)

Direction from

project site

1. Sikandarabad

Distributary SW1 2.1 NE

2. Pond near Tilbegampur SW2 2.2 WNW

3. Upper Ganga Canal SW3 8.9 NE

4. Hasanpur Drain SW4 6.0 NNW

5. Drain SW5 4.0 WSW


Propagation of Wild life and

Fisheries

D pH between 6.5 to 8.5

Dissolved Oxygen 4mg/l or more

Free Ammonia (as N) 1.2 mg/l or less

Irrigation, Industrial Cooling,

Controlled Waste disposal

E pH between 6.0 to 8.5

Electrical Conductivity at 25oC micro mhos/cm Max.2250

Sodium absorption Ratio Max. 26

Boron Max. 2mg/l

Below-E Not Meeting A, B, C, D & E Criteria

Project: Common Hazardous Waste Incinerator & Other waste treatment facility at UPSIDC, Sikandrabad Industrial Area, District Bulandshahr, Uttar Pradesh




3.10.4.3 Presentation of Results

The analytical results of ground water & surface water samples are given in follow-up sections. The quality of ground water samples

were compared with IS: 10500 standards. Surface water sample were analyzed for various parameters and assessed using the CPCB’s

BDU Criteria.

Table 3.14: Ground water analysis result of the study area

S. No. Parameter

Limits Units Analysis Results of Ground Water-Locations

Acceptable Permissible GW-1 GW-2 GW-3 GW-4 GW-5 GW-6 GW-7 GW-8

1. pH 6.5-8.5 NR -- 7.26 7.61 7.22 7.98 6.88 7.85 7.91 7.58

2. Conductivity $ $ µS/cm 906.5 870.9 811.6 687.0 806.5 818.5 768.2 692.5

3. Total Dissolve Solids 500 2000 mg/l 536 521 495 423 496 504 475 423

4. Alkalinity as CaCO3 200 600 mg/l 236.5 209.5 189.5 165.8 215.5 233.9 214.8 197.5

5. Total Hardness as CaCO3 300 600 mg/l 289.8 298.8 257.0 236.6 278.8 295.2 259.8 237.9

6. Calcium as Ca 75 200 mg/l 81.2 81.5 72.5 68.1 79.1 81.2 76.9 72.6

7. Magnesium as Mg 30 100 mg/l 21.2 23.2 18.5 16.2 19.8 22.5 16.5 13.8

8. Sodium $ $ mg/l 38 33 12 19 21 18 22 15

9. Potassium $ $ mg/l 5 6 9 7 8 5 8 5

10. Bicarbonate $ $ mg/l 236.5 209.5 189.5 165.8 215.5 233.9 214.8 197.5

11. Chloride as Cl 250 1000 mg/l 96.5 91.2 68.5 79.6 89.3 76.1 82.5 74.3

12. Sulphate as SO4 200 400 mg/l 45.5 61.5 41.6 39.5 36.9 32.6 21.5 18.5

13. Nitrate as NO3 45 NR mg/l 4.6 8.2 5.7 4.9 5.5 6.4 5.9 7.7





S. No. Parameter

Limits Units Analysis Results of Ground Water-Locations

Acceptable Permissible GW-1 GW-2 GW-3 GW-4 GW-5 GW-6 GW-7 GW-8

14. Flouride as F 1.00 1.5 mg/l 0.69 0.87 0.94 0.55 0.78 0.68 0.79 0.68

15. Phenolic compound as C6H5OH 0.001 0.002 mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL

16. Cyanide 0.05 NR mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL

17. Aluminium 0.03 0.2 mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL

18. Arsenic 0.01 0.05 mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL

19. Cadmium 0.003 NR mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL

20. Chromium as Cr+6 0.05 NR mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL

21. Iron 0.3 NR mg/l 0.22 0.29 0.15 0.09 0.15 0.11 0.18 0.24

22. Copper 0.05 1.5 mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL

23. Lead 0.01 NR mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL

24. Manganese 0.1 0.3 mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL

25. Mercury 0.001 NR mg/l BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL

26. Zinc 5 15 mg/l 3.6 2.5 2.2 1.9 1.7 2.8 1.6 2.4

Note: CL: Colourless, Al: Agreeable, U/O: Unobjectionable, ND: Not Detected.

BDL (Below Detectable Limits) Values: Cu<0.05 mg/l, Mn<0.005 mg/l, F<0.05 mg/l, C6H5OH<0.001 mg/l, Hg<0.001 mg/l, Cd<0.001 mg/l,

Se<0.001mg/l,As<0.001mg/l,Pb<0.01mg/l,Zn<0.05mg/l,Cr+6<0.05mg/l,Al<0.001mg/l,B<0.01mg/l, PAH<0.0001µg/l.





Table 3.15: Surface water analysis result of the study area

S.No. Parameter

Units CPCB Water Quality Criteria Analysis Results of Surface Water Locations

SW-1 SW-2 SW-3 SW-4 SW-5

1. pH -- Class A 7.58 7.95 7.58 8.22 7.68

2. Conductivity µS/cm $ 890.2 520 739.1 802.5 930.5

3. Total Dissolve Solids mg/l $ 524 311 445 492 562

4. Alkalinity as CaCO3 mg/l $ 198.2 89.2 108.2 169.2 182.5

5. Total Hardness as CaCO3 mg/l $ 231.8 189.1 277.6 223.6 285.6

6. Calcium as Ca mg/l $ 69.5 57.5 89.5 69.5 91.2

7. Magnesium as Mg mg/l $ 14.2 11.1 13.2 12.2 14.1

8. Sodium mg/l $ 58 16 28 48 51

9. Potassium mg/l $ 3 2 8 11 7

10. Bicarbonate mg/l $ 198.2 89.2 108.2 169.2 182.5

11. Chloride as Cl mg/l $ 115.2 71.2 154.6 116.2 138.2

12. Sulphate as SO4 mg/l $ 36.5 51.3 25.2 36.5 46.5

13. Nitrate as NO3 mg/l $ 16.2 10.5 14.2 18.2 26.2

14. Flouride as F mg/l $ 0.65 0.91 0.55 0.75 0.89

15. Phenolic compound as C6H5OH mg/l $ BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL

16. Cyanide mg/l $ BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL

17. Aluminium mg/l $ BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL





18. Arsenic mg/l $ BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL

19. Cadmium mg/l $ BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL

20. Chromium as Cr+6 mg/l $ BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL

21. Iron mg/l $ 0.22 0.65 0.35 0.48 0.92

22. Copper mg/l $ BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL

23. Lead mg/l $ BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL

24. Manganese mg/l $ BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL

25. Mercury mg/l $ BDL BDL BDL BDL BDL

26. Zinc mg/l $ 9.2 10.2 7.5 12.7 21.2

27. Dissolve Oxygen mg/l Below E 1.1 3.6 2.1 1.8 1.5

28. COD mg/l $ 89.5 16.5 56.2 112.2 126.5

29. BOD, 27°C 3 days mg/l Below E 31.2 6.2 18.2 41.2 43.6

30. Total Coliforms MPN/100ml Class C >2900 >1600 >2900 >2900 >2900

Note: $- Not Specified;

BDL (Below Detectable Limits) Values: Cu<0.05 mg/l, Mn<0.005 mg/l, F<0.05 mg/l, C6H5OH<0.001 mg/l, Hg<0.001 mg/l, Cd<0.001 mg/l,

Se<0.001mg/l,As<0.001mg/l,Pb<0.01mg/l,Zn<0.05mg/l,Cr+6<0.05mg/l,Al<0.001mg/l,B<0.01mg/l, PAH<0.0001µg/l.






3.10.4.4 Observation

Ground Water

The pH for drinking water samples as per IS 10500:2012 is from 6.5 to 8.5;

beyond this range the water will affect the mucus membrane and or water

supply system. During study period the pH in the ground water samples was

varying from 7.22 to 7.98 showing that they are within the acceptable range.

The acceptable limit for total dissolved solids as per IS 10500:2012 is 500

mg/l, whereas the permissible limit in absence of alternate source is 2000 mg/l,

beyond this palatability decreases and may cause gastro intestinal irritation. In

ground water samples collected from the study area, the total dissolved solids

in groundwater are varying from 423 mg/l to 536 mg/l in study area. Three of

the eight samples i.e. Project site, Rajarampur & Manhcha are falling in

permissible range whereas the remaining are falling in acceptable range.

The acceptable limit as per IS10500 for total hardness is 300 mg/l whereas the

permissible limit for the same is 600 mg/l. Hard water is an aesthetic problem

that causes soap and scaly deposits in plumbing and decreased cleaning action

of soaps and detergents. In the ground water samples collected from the study

area, the total hardness is varying from 236.6 mg/l to 298.8 mg/l which though

high; is still in the acceptable range.

Fluoride is the other important parameter, which has the acceptable limit of 1

mg/l and permissible limit of 1.5 mg/l. However the optimum content of

fluoride in the drinking water is 0.6 to 1.5 mg/l. If the fluoride content is less

than 0.6 mg/l it causes dental caries, above 1.5mg/l it causes staining of tooth

enamel, higher concentration in range of 3 – 10 mg/l causes Fluorosis. In the

water samples collected from the study area, the hardness is varying from 0.94

mg/l to 0.55 mg/l.

All the samples collected from the study area were found to be fit for human

consumption; however the total dissolved solids in some of the ground water

samples are above acceptable limits but well within the permissible limits






The water analysis results indicate that the ground water at all locations is free

from heavy metals. (BDL as per detection limit of instrument used: what is the

DL of instrument used?)

Surface Water

pH in the surface water samples was found to be varying from 7.58 to 8.22.

The total dissolved solids in surface water samples are varying from 311 mg/l

to 562 mg/l in study area.

In surface water samples, the total hardness is varying from 189.1 mg/l to

285.6 mg/l.

Dissolved Oxygen content for the water samples is quite low & water quality

can be compared to Class E as per classification of Inland Surface Water and

use for Irrigation, industrial cooling etc.

3.11. Noise Environment

The environmental assessment of noise from the proposed project activity and vehicular

traffic can be undertaken by taking into consideration various factors like potential

damage to hearing, physiological responses, and annoyance and general community

responses.

Characteristics of noise sources (instantaneous, intermittent or continuous in nature).

It can be observed that steady noise is not as annoying as one which is continuously

varying in loudness;

The time of day at which noise occurs, for example high noise levels at night in

residential areas are not acceptable because of sleep disturbance; and

The location of the noise source, with respect to noise sensitive land use, which

determines the loudness and period of exposure.

The main objective of noise monitoring in the study area is to establish the baseline

noise levels, and assess the impact of the total noise expected to be generated by the

construction and operation of the project activity around it.






Table 3.16: Noise Level as Per CPCB Norms

S. No. Category of Area Noise Level Leq. dB (A

Day time Night time

1. Industrial area 75 70

2. Commercial area 65 55

3 Residential area 55 45

4 Silence Zone 50 40

Note:

1. Day time is reckoned in between 6 a.m. and 9 p.m.

2. Night time is reckoned in between 9 p.m. and 6 a.m.

3. Silence zone is referred as areas upto 100 meters around such premises as hospitals, educational

institutions and courts. The Silence zones are to be declared by the Competent Authority.

4. Use of vehicular horns, loudspeakers and bursting of crackers shall be banned in these zones.

5. Mixed categories of areas should be declared as one of the four above mentioned categories by the

Competent Authority and the corresponding standards shall apply.

3.11.1 Identification of Sampling Locations

A preliminary reconnaissance survey has been undertaken to identify the major noise

generating sources in and around the proposed project site area. Noise level at

different noise generating sources has been identified based on the activities in the

study area and ambient noise due to traffic.

The noise monitoring has been conducted for determination of ambient noise levels at

eight locations in the study area for winter season (Dec.’ 2018 to Feb.’2019). The

noise levels at each location were recorded for 24 hours. The environment setting of

noise monitoring locations is given in above Table 3.2.

3.11.2 Method of Monitoring

Noise levels are more annoying in the night time particularly in the residential areas.

The environmental impact of noise can have several effects varying from annoyance

to hearing loss depending on loudness of noise levels. The monitoring for noise levels

were done in 8 locations keeping considering the population and traffic of the area.

The locations are depicted in Fig 3.2 and levels recorded stated in table below:






3.11.3 Presentation of Results

Table 3.17: Noise levels of the study area

S.

No. Noise

Location

Area Type Location

Code

Day Time Night Time

Standard Leq

Day Standard LeqNight

1. Project Site Industrial N-1 65 57.3 55 36.4

2. Rajarampur Residential N-2 55 52.6 45 34.7

3. Mandaora Residential N-3 55 51.4 45 34.4

4. Sikandarabad Commercial N-4 65 59.4 55 38.8

5. Faridpur Residential N-5 55 50.8 45 33.3

6. Manhcha Residential N-6 55 54.5 45 35.3

7. Salehpur Residential N-7 55 53.0 45 34.2

8. Tilbegampur Commercial N-8 65 54.9 55 35.4

3.11.4 Observations

Ambient noise levels were measured at 8 locations around the proposed project site.

Minimum and maximum noise levels recorded during the day time were from 50.8

Leq dB and 59.4 Leq dB respectively and minimum and maximum level of noise

during night time was 33.3 Leq dB and 38.8 Leq dB respectively. Noise levels

during day & night time at the respective sampling stations were observed to be

within CPCB prescribed limits.

3.12. Socio-Economic Environment

In this section, the prevailing socio-economic aspects of people in the study area have

been described, which would form the basis for making planning efforts for the socio-

economic development of people in the study area.

The broad objectives of the socio-economic impact assessment are as follows:

a) To study the socio-economic status of the people living in the study area of the

proposed project.

b) To assess the impact on socio-economic environment due to proposed project.






c) To assess the impact of the project on State Gross Domestic Product (SGDP)

d) To evaluate the community development measures proposed to be taken up by the

Project Proponent, if any.

e) To suggest Community Development measures needs to be taken for the study

area

3.12.1 Methodology

The methodology adopted for impact assessment is as follows:

a) The details of the activities and population structure have been obtained from

Census 2011 and analyzed.

b) Primary data was collected by a door-to-door survey in urban area and

household’s living therein. The data collected during the above survey was

analyzed to evaluate the prevailing socio-economic profile of the area.

c) Based on the above data, impacts due to construction operation on the

community have been assessed and recommendations for further improvement

have been made.

3.12.2 Concept & Definition

a) Study Area: The study area, also known as impact area has been defined as the

sum total of core area/project area and buffer area with a radius of 10

Kilometers from the periphery of the core area/project is. The study area

includes all the land marks both natural and manmade falling herein.

b) Household: A group of persons who normally live together and take their meals

from a common kitchen are called a household. Persons living in a household

may be related or unrelated or a mix of both. However, if a group of related or

unrelated persons live in a house but do not take their meals from the common

kitchen, then they are not part of a common household. Each such person is

treated as a separate household. There may be one member households, two

member households or multi-member households.






c) Sex ratio: Sex ratio is the ratio of males to females in a population. It is

expressed as number of females per 1000 males.

d) Literates: All persons aged 7 years and above who can both read and write with

understanding in any language are taken as literate. It is not necessary for a

person to have received any formal education or passed any minimum

educational standard for being treated as literate. People who are blind but can

read in Braille are also treated as literates.

e) Literacy rate: Literacy rate of population is defined as the percentage of

literates to the total population aged 7 years and above.

f) Labour Force: The labor force is the number of people employed and

unemployed in aerographical entity. The size of the labour force is the sum total

of persons employed and unemployed. An unemployed person is defined as a

person not employed but actively seeking work. Normally, the labour force of a

country consists of everyone of working age (around 14to 16) and below

retirement (around-65) that are participating workers, that is people actively

employed or seeking employment. People not counted under labour force are

students, retired persons, stay-at home parents, people in prisons and

discouraged workers.

g) Work: Work is defined as participation in any economically productive activity

with or without compensation, wages or profit. Such participation may be

physical and/or mental in nature. Work involves not only actual work but also

includes effective supervision and direction of work. The work may be part time

or full time or unpaid work in a farm, family enterprise or in any other economic

activity.

h) Worker: All persons engaged in 'work' are defined as workers. Persons who are

engaged in cultivation or milk production even solely for domestic consumption

are also treated as workers.

i) Main Workers: Those workers who had worked for the major part of the

reference period (i.e. 6 months or more) are termed as Main Workers.

j) Marginal Workers: Those workers who did not work for the major part of the

reference period (i.e. less than 6 months) are termed as Marginal Workers






k) Work participation rate: The work participation rate is the ratio between the

labour force and the overall size of their cohort (national population of the same

age range). In the present study the work participation rate is defined as the

percentage of total workers (main and marginal) to total population.

3.12.3 Legislative and Regulatory Considerations

To review laws and regulations governing the project’s implementation and the access

of poor and excluded groups to goods, services and opportunities provided by the

project. In addition, review the enabling environment for public participation and

development planning. SIA should build on strong aspects of the legal and regulatory

systems to facilitate program implementation and identify weak aspects while

recommending alternative arrangements.

3.12.4 Social Impact Assessment

Social Impact Assessment (SIA) is an instrument used to analyze social issues and

solicit stakeholder views for the design of projects. SIA helps in making the project

responsive to social development concerns, including options that enhance benefits for

poor and vulnerable people while mitigating risk and adverse impacts. It analyzes

distributional impacts of intended project benefits on different stakeholder groups, and

identifies differences in assets and capabilities to access the project benefits. The scope

and depth of SIA should be determined by the complexity and importance of issues

studied, taking into account the skills and resources available. SIA should include

studies related to involuntary resettlement, compulsory land acquisition, impact of

imported workforces, job losses among local people, damage to sites of cultural,

historic or scientific interest, impact on minority or vulnerable groups, child or bonded

labour, use of armed security guards. However, SIA may primarily include the

following:

3.12.5 Social Issues

SIA provides baseline information for designing social development strategy. The

analysis should determine the key social and Institutional issues which affect the

project objectives; identify the key stakeholder groups in this context and determine






how relationships between stakeholder groups will affect or be affected by the project;

and identify expected social development outcomes and actions proposed to achieve

those outcomes.

3.12.6 Strategy to Achieve Social Development Outcomes

Identify the likely social development outcomes of the project and propose a social

development strategy, including recommendations for institutional arrangements to

achieve them, based on the findings of the social assessment. The social development

strategy could include measures that:

strengthen social inclusion by ensuring inclusion of both poor and excluded groups

as well as then intended beneficiaries in the benefit stream, offer access to

opportunities created by the project

empower stakeholders through their participation in design and implementation of

the project, their access to information, and their increased voice and

accountability (i.e. a participation framework); and

enhance security by minimizing and managing likely social risks and increasing

the resilience of intended beneficiaries and affected persons to socioeconomic

shocks

3.12.7 Description of the Study Area

The study area of the proposed project falls in Sikandrabad Tehsil of Bulandshahr

District area, some village of Vikas Khand Gulaothi,Vikas Khand Dadri and Vikas

Khand Dankaur of district Gautam Buddha Nagar are also falling in the 10 km radius

of the project site. Detailed administrative setup is given in figure below. About 8

Villages are falling within 2 Km radius of project site and 160 villages & 4 urban

settlements are located in 2 to 10 Km buffer zone, total 165 villages, 4 urban

settlement & 3 uninhabited villages are located within the study area.






Fig. 3.13: Administrative Map of Study Area

3.12.8 Baseline Socio-Economic condition of the study area

The baseline status for the proposed expansion project primarily consists of

demographic particulars and amenities. These were collected from the secondary

sources i.e. Census of India website. The data presented in the tables below of

following sections pertain to study area as a whole. The following sections describe

the demographic structure like population composition, households, sex ratio, social

composition, literacy status and also the occupational structure of the whole study area

which are highlighted in the forms of tables. These tables provide area wise, sector

wise and gender wise population, sex ratio, literacy rate, workers participation rate and

dependency rate etc. of the Core and Buffer area of the study area.

Table 3.18: Demographic Profile of the Villages in the study area

S. No. Demographic Feature Study area

Core zone (Project area) 0-2 Km Buffer 2-10 Km Buffer

1 Total Population 0 13811 572101

2 Household 0 2466 97578

3 Children 0 2357 89958

4 Worker 0 4830 182358

5 Non Worker 0 8981 389743

6 Main Worker 0 3605 145452

7 Cultivator 0 861 31053

8 Agricultural labour 0 291 13901

9 Household worker 0 97 10745

10 Other Worker 0 2356 89753






*figures in parenthesis represent percent value

3.12.8.1 Population

According to Census 2011, Core zone doesn’t have any human habitation however

2 Km buffer and 10 km buffer have the total population of 13811Individuals &

572101Individuals respectively. 53 percent of total population is male and 47

percent are female, this creates a gender gap of 6 percent. The study area also

involves rural villages of Bulandshahr District, Uttar Pradesh.

The total population of the study area (0-10 km) is 175812 the males constitute of

52.75% and females are 47.25 %. The 0-6 population constitute of 16.45 %. In

each household approximately 5 to 6 persons live together.

Table 3.19: Population of the study area

S. No. Village name Household Male

Female

Male

(0-6)

Female

(0-6)

1. Andhel 318 1066 928 219 182

2. Bharana 554 1906 1547 385 258

3. Bhatpura 318 982 846 175 154

4. Bhogpur 89 253 204 39 20

5. Bilsuri 801 2377 2059 335 272

6. Chandrawali 354 1368 1143 278 222

7. Chiti 162 607 537 84 84

8. Dabka 257 713 667 112 99

9. Dadupur Neela 310 943 861 139 127

10. Faridpur 500 1590 1354 260 222

11. Fatahpur 266 816 712 116 105

12. Fazilpur 188 514 502 65 58

13. Gesupur 1360 4246 3845 812 629

14. Girdharpur Nabada 431 1317 1164 151 130

15. Gopalpur 245 639 435 94 89

16. Hamidpur 172 532 428 79 70

17. Hasanpur 299 981 897 153 135






S. No. Village name Household Male

Female

Male

(0-6)

Female

(0-6)

18. Hirdeypur 218 728 655 103 100

19. Inayatpur 241 863 724 132 104

20. Luharli 428 1390 1291 220 192

21. Mahepa Jagir 583 1724 1518 339 279

22. Masauta 273 967 888 146 136

23. Nagal 164 513 500 89 93

24. Nayagaon 534 1613 1403 302 254

25. Nekrampur Urf Visanpur 77 287 249 51 46

26. Nizampur 172 547 442 101 75

27. Nurpur 195 732 616 131 91

28. Pilakhanwali 583 1844 1713 269 252

29. Rajarampur 77 292 249 65 34

30. Rajpur Khurd 91 308 261 54 43

31. Ramgarh 122 395 334 60 45

32. Ramgarhi 250 746 636 115 95

33. Salempur 999 3093 2584 396 290

34. Sanwali 496 1419 1189 217 178

35. Saraijagannath 152 444 415 66 74

36. Sherpur 370 1162 1068 188 136

37. Sikandrabad 14523 47041 43200 7308 6424

38. Tilbegumpur 1756 5788 5002 1241 959

Total 28928 92746 83066 15089 12756

Grand Total 28928 175812 27845

*Sources: Census of India, 2011

Fig. 3.14: Total Population of Study Area, District, State and Country






Fig. 3.15: Thematic Map depicting Population distribution

3.12.8.2 Sex Ratio

The sex ratio works out to 855 females per 1000 males for 2 Km buffer and 876

for 10 Km buffer. The sex ratio of Bulandshahr District is 896 & Uttar Pradesh

State is 908. The sex ratio less than 908 females per thousand males were in 124

villages & 2 Urban Settlements. The details are given in table below

Table 3.20: Male & Female of the Villages in the study area

S. No Demographic Feature

Study area

Core zone (Project area) 0-2 Km Buffer 2-10 Km Buffer

1 Male 0 7444 304975

2 Female 0 6367 267126

3 Sex ratio 0 855 876

Fig. 3.16: Thematic Map depicting Distribution of Sex-ratio

Fig. 3.17: Chart Depicting Sex Ratio in 2 & 10 Km Buffer

3.12.8.3 Scheduled Caste and Schedule Tribe Population

The SC Population is 15.96 % of the Total Population. The Male, Female

Population in SC constitutes 16.03 % for males and 15.87 % for female. The ST

Population is 0 % of the Total Population.






Table 3.21: Scheduled Caste Population of Study Area

S. No. Village name Male Female

1. Andhel 365 315

2. Bharana 414 331

3. Bhatpura 559 466

4. Bhogpur 0 0

5. Bilsuri 636 565

6. Chandrawali 54 53

7. Chiti 143 117

8. Dabka 20 21

9. Dadupur Neela 106 79

10. Faridpur 487 426

11. Fatahpur 14 10

12. Fazilpur 112 119

13. Gesupur 1196 1055

14. Girdharpur Nabada 238 203

15. Gopalpur 81 77

16. Hamidpur 413 334

17. Hasanpur 288 278

18. Hirdeypur 83 71

19. Inayatpur 258 208

20. Luharli 105 103

21. Mahepa Jagir 253 236

22. Masauta 336 303

23. Nagal 184 179

24. Nayagaon 510 432

25. Nekrampur Urf Visanpur 101 80

26. Nizampur 424 345

27. Nurpur 64 46

28. Pilakhanwali 376 361

29. Rajarampur 5 4






S. No. Village name Male Female

30. Rajpur Khurd 4 4

31. Ramgarh 158 133

32. Ramgarhi 173 155

33. Salempur 529 442

34. Sanwali 30 29

35. Saraijagannath 88 86

36. Sherpur 104 89

37. Sikandrabad 5397 4951

38. Tilbegumpur 567 484

Total 14875 13190

Grand Total 28065


Fig. 3.18: Chart Depicting Scheduled Caste Population in Study Area 10 Km Buffer Zone

3.12.8.4 Literacy

The illiteracy in the 2 Km and 10 Km buffer zone of study area are 38 & 36

percent respectively, while district Bulandshahr and state Uttar Pradesh have

illiteracy percentage of 42% and 30 % respectively. The literates in 2 Km and 10

Km buffer zone of study area are 62 & 64 percentage respectively. Literates are

58 % in district Bulandshahr while 70 % in Uttar Pradesh.

The literate total population of the study area (0-10 km) is 101944 which

constitute to be 57.98 %. The male literacy with respect to male population is

66.45 % and female literacy total 48.53 % with respect to female population in the

study area.

The non- literate total population of the study area is 73868 which constitute to be

42.01 %. The male non-literacy with respect to male population is 33.54 % and

female non-literacy total 51.46 % with respect to female population in the study

area.






Table 3.22: Literate & Illiterate in the Villages of the Study Area

S. No.

Demographic

Feature

Study area

Core zone (Project area) 2 Km Buffer 2-10 Km Buffer

1. Literate 0 8566 363363

2. Illiterate 0 5245 208738

Fig. 3.19: Literates& Illiterates in 2 & 10 Km Buffer

Fig. 3.20: Thematic Map depicting Literate & Illiterate in Study Area

Table 3.23: Literacy & Non- Literacy Status of the Study Area (0-10 km)

S. No Village name Male literates Female literates Male

(non-literates)

Female

(non-literates)

1. Andhel 701 427 365 501

2. Bharana 1283 719 623 828

3. Bhatpura 706 419 276 427

4. Bhogpur 198 128 55 76

5. Bilsuri 1867 1141 510 918

6. Chandrawali 883 444 485 699

7. Chiti 478 289 129 248

8. Dabka 548 355 165 312

9. Dadupur Neela 684 403 259 458

10. Faridpur 1209 703 381 651

11. Fatahpur 605 328 211 384

12. Fazilpur 400 282 114 220

13. Gesupur 2844 1652 1402 2193

14. Girdharpur Nabada 1029 654 288 510

15. Gopalpur 459 195 180 240

16. Hamidpur 393 213 139 215

17. Hasanpur 691 432 290 465

18. Hirdeypur 535 333 193 322

19. Inayatpur 624 371 239 353






S. No Village name Male literates Female literates Male

(non-literates)

Female

(non-literates)

20. Luharli 1064 632 326 659

21. Mahepa Jagir 1199 721 525 797

22. Masauta 749 444 218 444

23. Nagal 340 229 173 271

24. Nayagaon 1037 537 576 866

25.

Nekrampur Urf

Visanpur 193 105 94 144

26. Nizampur 364 194 183 248

27. Nurpur 534 358 198 258

28. Pilakhanwali 1410 882 434 831

29. Rajarampur 197 154 95 95

30. Rajpur Khurd 212 145 96 116

31. Ramgarh 309 161 86 173

32. Ramgarhi 569 317 177 319

33. Salempur 2353 1370 740 1214

34. Sanwali 1124 669 295 520

35. Saraijagannath 344 208 100 207

36. Sherpur 862 605 300 463

37. Sikandrabad 29132 20912 17909 22288

38. Tilbegumpur 3501 2183 2287 2819

Total 61630 40314 31116 42752

Grand Total 101944 73868


3.12.8.5 Occupational Structure

The total working population of the study area is 55246 accounting to be 31.42 %.

From the total working population the main workers constitute of 83.60 % and

marginal working population is 16.39 %. The female working population is % with

respect to female population of the study area. The majority of the main population in

the study area is engaged in agriculture and related activities. In the study area people






are also occupied in other works like government services, private jobs,

manufacturing, retailing etc.

Table 3.24: Occupational Structure of Study Area, District Bulandshahr, Uttar Pradesh, India

S.

No. Item

Number of

Individuals %

Number of

Individuals %

Number of

Individuals %

Number of

Individuals %

1

Name of

area Study area

Bulandshahr

District* Uttar Pradesh* India*

2

Type of

Population Rural & Urban

3

Number of

Household 100044 - 587529 - - - - -

4

Total

Population 585912 - 3499171 - 199581477 1.2 x 109 -

5

Total Male

Population 312419 53 1845260 53 104596415 52 6.2 x 108 52

6

Total

Female

Population 273493 47 1653911 47 94985062 48 5.9 x 108 48

7

Persons

(0-6) 92315 16 549796 16 29728235 15 1.6 x 108 13

8

Total

workers 187188 32 1173260 34 - - - -

9

Main

workers 149057 80 885216 75 - - - -

10

Non

workers 398724 68 2325911 66 - - - -

Source: Census of India 2011

Fig. 3.21: Thematic Map depicting Distribution of Worker & Non Worker






Table 3.25: Employment Status of the Study Area (0-10 km)

S. No. Village name

Main working

population

Marginal working

population

Non-working

Population

Male Female Male Female Male Female

1. Andhel 411 13 60 36 595 879

2. Bharana 768 61 103 177 1035 1309

3. Bhatpura 297 44 137 56 548 746

4. Bhogpur 131 64 23 30 99 110

5. Bilsuri 1048 101 91 91 1238 1867

6. Chandrawali 490 17 102 2 776 1124

7. Chiti 298 28 13 10 296 499

8. Dabka 350 24 54 208 309 435

9. Dadupur Neela 389 48 75 15 479 798

10. Faridpur 692 99 107 20 791 1235

11. Fatahpur 389 159 24 9 403 544

12. Fazilpur 234 18 30 102 250 382

13. Gesupur 1803 149 178 341 2265 3355

14. Girdharpur

Nabada 557 180 104 25 656 959

15. Gopalpur 325 26 16 1 298 408

16. Hamidpur 244 143 9 28 279 257

17. Hasanpur 314 77 159 125 508 695

18. Hirdeypur 318 21 43 55 367 579

19. Inayatpur 282 22 204 291 377 411

20. Luharli 571 41 130 32 689 1218

21. Mahepa Jagir 739 250 111 54 874 1214

22. Masauta 365 120 146 62 456 706

23. Nagal 240 70 26 57 247 373

24. Nayagaon 751 177 99 141 763 1085

25. NekrampurUrf

Visanpur 115 2 23 1 149 246

26. Nizampur 222 5 11 1 314 436

27. Nurpur 301 276 41 30 390 310






S. No. Village name

Main working

population

Marginal working

population

Non-working

Population

Male Female Male Female Male Female

28. Pilakhanwali 729 51 90 112 1025 1550

29. Rajarampur 150 1 2 1 140 247

30. Rajpur Khurd 130 6 2 0 176 255

31. Ramgarh 191 44 1 5 203 285

32. Ramgarhi 394 8 7 196 345 432

33. Salempur 1507 304 147 98 1439 2182

34. Sanwali 609 51 270 463 540 675

35. Saraijagannath 176 90 52 71 216 254

36. Sherpur 460 126 120 72 582 870

37. Sikandrabad 21196 2575 1948 961 23897 39664

38. Tilbegumpur 2347 166 213 106 3228 4730

Total 40533 5657 4971 4085 47242 73324

Grand Total 46190 9056 120566

Total Working Population 55246 120566


Fig. 3.22: Chart Depicting Employment status of the study area (0-10 km)

Fig. 3.23: Thematic Map depicting Distribution of Occupational Structure






3.12.8.6 Amenities/Infrastructure

The study area is located in UPSIDC area. The UPSIDC area has shown multiple

growth in terms of industries and simultaneously its infrastructure development.

The said study area is hence provided with various amenities like transport

services, educational institutions, institutional health services , hospitals, nursing

homes etc, places of worships, hotels and restaurants, libraries , clubs etc.

However the area within 2km radius of the proposed project site is lacking of some

basic infrastructure like health care facilities and safe and sufficient drinking water

facilities.

Some of the existing basic facilities (as provided by the Govt.) available near to

the project site within the study area are listed in the Table below:

Table 3.26: Existing basic facilities in the study area

S. No Basic Amenities Components Description

1. Primary School Primary School of Jokhabad, Sherpur

2. Middle School & Secondary Schools

Purwa Madhyamik Vidyalaya, Shepur

Private Schools like Goodwill Convent School

Sherpur; AM Public School, SS Public School

Gopalpur; Eagle Public school, RK

Educational School, Sawnli

(All Middle and Secondary schools are about 3-

6 km away from Jokhabad)

3. Higher Secondary Schools

Agrasen Inter College, Shri Swami Dayal

Bhatnagar Girls Inter College, New Lancers

Senior Secondary Schools

(All schools are about 4-6 km away from

Jokhabad)







Primary School of Jokhabad has been adopted by M/s Orient Bel Tiles and upgradation of the school

building and the toilets are done and maintained by the company.

Fig.3.24 Primary & Middle schools and Of Village Jokhabad & Sherpur

4. Primary Health Centre No Primary Health centre within 2-3 km Radius.

5. Hospital

Nearest Hospitals are Rajinder Hospital & Shiv

Arogya Maternity centre and Nursing Home in

Shawnli around 3.5-4 km away by road from

Jokhabad & Sherpur.

All other Hospitals are located in Sikandrabad

Town which is around 5-6 km by road from

Jokhabad & Sherpur.

6. Drinking Water Water Supply from Panchayat Tank of every

village (not safe always and sufficient for the







villagers)

7. Irrigation Water

Upper Ganga Canal 8.76 km towards NE,

Tubewell

Fig. 3.25 Part of the Upper Ganga Canal

near Sherpur

8. Power Supply All the villages are electrified. Nearest Power

Substation is in Jokhabad with capacity of 33/11

kV. Powercut is very frequent.

Fig. 3.26 Power Substation at Jokhabad built under Din Dayal Upadhyay Gram Jyoti Yojna

9. National Highway & Roads NH-91 approx. 0.51 KM in NE direction

Metalled Roads inside Villages

10. Transportation Govt. Buses at frequent intervals, Autos, Private

vehicles

11. Entertainment facilities

Public parks and Children Playground in

Sherpur, Shawnli.

Cinema Theaters & Malls in Sikandrabad Town

(5-6 km away from project site by road)

3.12.8.7 Site visit observations

The nearest village is Jokhabad and Sherpur. The Project area is located in the

Sikandrabad Industrial Area of UPSIDC. So the villages nearby already have

well connected roads and other infrastructure facilities. Primary schools and






Transportation facilities are available in the surrounding 2-5 km radius of the

project area.

The primary school of Jokhabad is adopted by M/s. Orient Bell Limited in the

area. The school building and its premises are well maintained. Beautification of

the school has been sustained with proper painting of the building and

maintaining the garden. Students in need get supply of the books and some

medical aid by the company on periodical basis.

A site visit was done to comprehend a clear perception about the quality of life,

socio-economic status of people and their views towards the proposed project.

The Primary data collection was done by door-to-door socio-economic sample

survey conducted by a team of experts that consisted of a demographer, Social

Scientist and Environmental experts. The survey was done through a basic

questionnaire. Following steps have been followed for the whole Site

Observation Study:

i. Kick off meeting with the client and/or his representatives

ii. Having the perception of the study area through maps

iii. Questionnaire Preparation for Social Survey

iv. Site visit for the following :

Collection of baseline data from primary sources onsite via social survey

using questionnaire and evaluation of existing scenario as shown in the

pictures below.

Acquiring the perception of people about the project.

v. Finalizing the Data and Analysis & Interpretation of the same.

Following observations were noted while doing the Socio-economic survey which

is elaborated with remarks and suggestions in the given table below:

Table 3.27: Site Visit Observations with Remarks and Suggestions

Components Description Remarks/Suggestions






Social set up:

The no of households in the villages ranges

from 0 to 300 or more in some villages. Mostly

male dominated society. Mostly joint families

prevail with one kitchen in the house. In some

households there are 2 or more kitchens under

one roof.

Villagers are mostly Hindus in the area with

some villages like Tilbegumpur, Salehpur etc.

have some Muslim population.

Gurjars who belongs to OBCs are predominant

in the surrounding region of 5 km radius buffer

area. Other castes are Harijans who are SCs.

Some 20-30% of Brahmans also reside in the

villages. STs are absence in the 2 km radius of

the study area.

Society related to women

is little backward.

Gurjars dominate in the

area and are rich and

wealthy.

Culture Women in the families are mostly busy in

household work. Girls get married at early age

of 16-20 years and are not allowed to work and

earn for their living. Few girls get opportunity

to earn but are not allowed to stay in other

cities for study or doing jobs. Typically after

marriage the girls are no longer considered part

of the maternal households. Women don’t take

part in any economic matters of the households

and stay in the house with veil covering their

head and look after the children.

Women should get more

opportunity to education

and jobs or business.

Marital age should be

improved.

More freedom to women

is needed for receiving

more education and to

stand by their own feet.

Women should be allowed

to move out of the villages

to other cities for job. And

to change the perception

of the localities about

women to allow them to

work, more campaigns

from govt. and NGOs

should be held in the area






who can educate the

villagers about the same.

Property

Structure

People in the area live in Pucca houses. The

houses consist of some elongated rooms, living

or drawing rooms and an open courtyard. Most

of all the houses have cattle shed like in the

below picture where they keep their buffaloes

and another animals.

Fig. 3.28 Typical Animal shed in the houses

Houses are pucca houses

and have all the modern

amenities.

All houses have courtyard

and an animal shed.

Pet animals are mostly

buffaloes.

Education The present generation population is literate.

There are households where males are pursuing

Bachelors and Master Degrees or Technical

graduation studies like B.Tech. and B.Pharm.

Whereas females are mostly Secondary or

Higher Secondary/ High School passed and

only few with 5-10% have done higher studies.

Women are not aimed to be educated to earn.

They only get the education to be literate or to

manage the households or to teach their

children.

Many private schools have opened in the

nearby areas offering secondary level

education. But for further higher studies the

children have to go to Sikandrabad town in

Agrasen Inter College, about 2-4 km away from

the nearby villages or to Bulandshahr which is

more than 5 km away from the project area.

For College & Higher Technical education, the

Women Education should

be given more priority

More girl schools with

proper good teachers and

infrastructure should be

opened.

Infrastructure of Govt

schools should be

improved.

More schools upto Higher

Secondary level should be

established.






villagers had to go to Bulandshahr, Greater

Noida, Noida or to Delhi.

Occupational

Structure/Economi

Condition

The occupations of the villagers in the study

area are small scale businessmen, contract

laborers or small farmers. Few among the

nearby villages work in the nearby industries.

Some of the people work as daily laborers in

the construction site or in any other industries

or shops in Sikandrabad, Bulandshahr, Noida

etc.

Farmers grow Wheat in the land with other

vegetables. Other than wheat Rice and maize

are also cultivated. The crops are sold in

Sikandrabad market.

The land for agriculture is unirrigated.

Tubewell irrigation is used to irrigate the crops.

Some farmers have Kishat Credit cards to avail

loan from Govt grameen Banks under Kishan

Awas Vikas Yojna. The farmers have buffaloes

in their house to meet the daily necessity of

milk. Some people also sell the milk at the

market and earn their living.

People in the villages are well settled and

maintain a good life style with all household

amenities inside their home. As visited in the

house of Mr. Bijay Pal, it was observed that the

family has all the modern facilities in the house

like Air Condition, big screen colour T.V, new

mobiles and other gadgets, costly cars etc.

Likewise the people in the villages also have

huge savings of around 5-10 lakhs.

Some middleclass farmers and middleclass

small business men with shops or small

Economic condition in the

study area is in improved

condition. People in the

area have wealth and

occupation. But a

considerable educated

youth generation is still

unemployed in the area.

Jobs should be created for

these youth generation by

govt.

Local industries should

give more to hire the

skilled and educated local

youth.

Vocational training can be

provided to the youth in

the area.

Some programmes should

be initiated to engage the

women to earn.

Motivation through

lectures and camps should

be provided to the local

villagers to educate and

motivate them to allow the

women in the house to

work or to allow them to

go out of the villages to

towns and cities for jobs.

Women should take active






workshops also stay in these villages.

Some youths in the area, as per the opinion of

the people in the area, are unemployed. Inspite

of having Engineering degrees they are not

receiving good job offers. Mr. Ratan Singh (a

respondent in Sherpur, worked as guard)

discussed that the nearby industries in the area

hire workers from Noida and other parts of

India. The villagers hardly get a decent job in

the nearby industries. Even during construction

phase cheap labors are hired who are from

Bihar, Orissa or West Bengal.

Women of the households don’t go outside to

earn money. They also don’t have any say on

financial or business or any economic related

matters of the household and the men.

participation in financial

matters.

Health and

Medical

Facilities

The medical facilities in the area are poor.

There are no PHCs in Jokhabad, Sherpur,

Sawli, and Andhel. Due to surrounding

industries groundwater and air is contaminated

which has made the people in the surrounding

villages of Jokhabad, Sherpur, Sawli,

Rajarampur etc suffer from Asthma, respiratory

problems, skin throat and nasal allergeies,

arthritis etc diseases. As told by Mr. Subhash

Bhati (a respondent of Sherpur village) that

most of the households have atleast one person

suffering from either bone related problems or

asthma.

For serious medical emergencies or serious

disease people has to rush to Government or

Private hospitals in Sikandrabad which is

around 6-8 km away from the villages. Even

for small diseases the villagers have to

The area need more nos.

of health Centres.

The PHCs should exist in

almost every village with

updated medical

infrastructure.

More hospitals should be

established in the village

vicinities with low cost

checkup facilities.






approach the private clinics in Sikandrabad or

in Bulandshahr.

Tranportation The villages are well connected to other cities

and towns like Bulandshahr, Noida, and

Greater Noida etc. by metalled roads. Frequent

movement of buses is there for the villagers.

Also autos and private taxi services are present

to help the villagers to commute from one place

to another. However, the taxis will be available

by advanced booking. Although the interior

roads are metalled but easily pot holes form on

the roads during rains or heavy vehicles

movement.

Although the area is well

connected by buses and

other vehicles, yet the

frequency of buses should

be improved.

Jokhabad village need one

bustop near the village

entrance.

Dankaur is the nearest

railway station to the

project site area.

Drinking water Drinking water facility consists of tap water

from Panchayat tanks. The people of

surrounding villages near to the project site are

unsatisfied with the drinking water facility in

the area.

The government hand pumps in many villages

do not work properly. Moreover the

groundwater in many villages is contaminated

causing skin allergies. So people rely only on

timely tap water supply which is not sufficient

for the people.

Quality of potable

groundwater is needed to

be checked.

More tanks should be

established in the villages

of Sawli, Gopalpur,

Jokhabad, Sherpur etc.

Treatment of the

groundwater should be

given importance.

Electricity All the villages in the study area are electrified.

There is a power substation in Jokhabd village.

Inspite of the presence of a Power House,

Jokhabad and surrounding villages face

maximum power cuts. Around 6-10 hours of

power cuts occur in a day in these villages.

Electricity facility

available in all villages

but the cases of frequent

powercuts should be

reported and taken care of

with immediate effect so

that it can be reduced.






3.13. Ecological Environment

Biological impact assessment includes identification and evaluation of the likely

impacts of proposed project, plans on the biological components of the surrounding

environ. Activities of the some projects have undesirable impacts on the peripheral

ecosystems. Generally it is believed that waste disappears when it is burnt. However,

in true sense the burnt waste transforms into ashes and gas, in which chemical

reactions lead to the formation of new compounds which may be toxic. Incinerator

plants are the source of serious toxic pollutants: like dioxins; furans; acid gases;

particulates; heavy metals; which need to mitigate. Incinerators also produce around a

million tonnes of contaminated ash each year.

This report characterizes prevailing biodiversity status of the proposed project site

(Core Zone) and its surrounding area of 10 km. radius (Buffer Zone). Efforts have

been made to predict likely impacts due to project activities, and suggest mitigation

measures to reduce / mitigate impacts on ecological components of the surrounding

area.

Study Period

Ecology and biodiversity study was carried in January 2019.

3.13.1 Scope, Aim and Objectives

1. To enlist floral & faunal groups of the proposed project site and its buffer zone

2. To understand ecological setting / ecological sensitive areas within project study

area.

3. To identify Schedule / rare / endangered and endemic species within the study

area and prepare conservation plan for them.

4. To identify likely impacts of the proposed project activities surrounding habitats

/ species components of the project study area.

5. To formulate mitigation measures for likely impacts on the biodiversity of the

project area.






3.13.2 Field Data Collection

Project site floral species were enlisted with actual observation during the site visit.

Also buffer zone was surveyed visiting various habitats to record floral and faunal

groups of the study area.

3.13.3 Threat Assessment

Threat status of flora has been assessed by following Red Data Book and similarly

faunal threat status has been assessed by following Indian Wild Life Protection Act

(IWPA), 1972 and IUCN.

3.13.4 Ecological Sensitivity / Habitats of the Study Area

Buffer zone of the site does not possess National Parks / Wildlife Sanctuary / Tiger

reserve / Mangroves / Biosphere Reserve/ Tiger Reserves and Elephant corridor etc.

Project site is situated in the industrial area and possess scanty vegetation and some

trees. Buffer zone of the study area mostly consists of agriculture land / agro

ecosystem.

Fig. 3.29.: Photographs Showing Project Site / Core Zone

3.13.5 Terrestrial Biodiversity

3.13.5.1 Core Zone / Project Site

Flora: Project site possess floral species belonging to 5 Species. Detail taxonomic

account of all species is given in the following table.

Table 3.29: Floral Species Enlisted from of Project Site

S. No. Habit Species Name Common Name Family

1. Tree Ficus bengalensis Bargad Moraceae

2. Tree Albizia leback Siris Fabaceae

3. Shrub Prosopis juliflora Vilayati Babool Fabaceae

4. Herb Parthenium hysterophorus Congress Grass Asteraceae

5. Herb Lantana camara Lantana Verbenaceae






Fauna: Among fauna, project site observed with common species namely, oriental

garden lizard, five-striped palm squirrel, little Indian field mouse along with

avifauna like ring-necked dove, rock pigeon and Jungle babbler during the site

visit.

3.13.5.2 Buffer Zone

Buffer zone mainly encompasses agriculture land, waste land, some village ponds

habitats which support following floral and faunal species:

Flora: Buffer zone of the project area has been reported with the 120 plant species

which includes 39 tree species, 36 shrubs, 23 herbs, 11 grasses and 11 climber

species. Taxonomic status of all the species are enlisted in the following table:

Table 3.30: Trees Recorded from Buffer Zone Area

S. No. Habit Scientific Name Local/Common Name Family

1. Tree Acacia leucopholea Harmo Fabaceae

2. Tree Acacia nilotica Babul Fabaceae

3. Tree Aegle marmelos Bili Rutaceae

4. Tree Albizia lebbeck Siris Fabaceae

5. Tree Albizia procera Kala Siras Fabaceae

6. Tree Alstonia scholaris Saptparni Apocynaceae

7. Tree Azadirachta indica Neem Meliaceae

8. Tree Bauhinia variegata Kachnar Fabaceae

9. Tree Bombax ceiba Semal Bombacaceae

10. Tree Butea monosperma Palas tree Fabaceae

11. Tree Cassia fistula Amaltas Fabaceae

12. Tree Cassia siamea Kesia Fabaceae

13. Tree Dalbergia sisoo Sissoo Fabaceae

14. Tree Delonix regia Gulmohar Fabaceae

15. Tree Emblica officinalis Amla Euphorbiaceae

16. Tree Eucalyptus sp. Nilgiri Myrtaceae

17. Tree Ficus benghalensis Bargad Moraceae

18. Tree Ficus religiosa Pipal Moraceae







19. Tree Ficus tomentosa Roxb. Barun Moraceae

20. Tree Holoptelea integrifolia Chilbil Ulmaceae

21. Tree Madhuca indica Mahua Sapotaceae

22. Tree Mangifera indica Aam Anacardiaceae

23. Tree Melia azadarach Bakain Meliaceae

24. Tree Moringa oleifera Saragvo Moringaceae

25. Tree Morus alba Shetur Moraceae

26. Tree Phoenix sylvestris Khjoor Arecaceae

27. Tree Pithecellobium dulce Jungle Jalebi Fabaceae

28. Tree Polyalthia longifolia Ashoka Annonaceae

29. Tree Pongamia pinnata Karanj Fabaceae

30. Tree Poplar sp. Poplar Salicaceae

31. Tree Prosopis cineraria Khejri Fabaceae

32. Tree Prosopis juliflora Gando baval Fabaceae

33. Tree Psidium guajava Amrud Myrtaceae

34. Tree Syzgium cumini Jambu Myrtaceae

35. Tree Tamarindus indica Imli Fabaceae

36. Tree Tectona grandis Sagwan Verbenaceae

37. Tree Terminalia arjuna Arjun Combretaceae

38. Tree Terminalia bellirica Bahera Combretaceae

39. Tree Ziziphus mauritiana Bor Rhamnaceae

Table 3.30: Shrubs Recorded from Buffer Zone Area


1 Shrub Calotropis gigantea Aak Apocynaceae

2 Shrub Calotropis procera Aak Apocynaceae

3 Shrub Adhatoda vasica Adosa Acanthaceae

4 Shrub Ricinus communis Arand Euphorbiaceae

5 Shrub Thespesia lampas Ban kapasi Malvaceae

6 Shrub Ipomoea carnea Beshram Convolvulaceae

7 Shrub Sida acuta Chikan Malvaceae

8 Shrub Sesbania sesban Dhaincha Fabaceae







9 Shrub Woodfordia fruticosa Dhawai Lythraceae

10 Shrub Crotolaria juncea Indian Hemp Fabaceae

11 Shrub Zizyphus nummularia Jhahrberi Rhamnaceae

12 Shrub Murraya Koenigii Kadi patta Rutaceae

13 Shrub Carissa carandas Kanwar Apocynaceae

14 Shrub Sida cordifolia Khareti Malvaceae

15 Shrub Lantana camara Lantana Verbenaceae

16 Shrub Achyranthes aspera Latjeera Amaranthaceae

17 Shrub Argemone mexicana Mexican poppy Papaveraceae

18 Shrub Randia dumetorum Mowar Rubiaceae

19 Shrub Vitex nigundo Nirgundi Verbanaceae

20 Shrub Agave americana Ram bass Agavaceae

21 Shrub Jatropha curcas Ratanjyot Euphorbiaceae

22 Shrub Asparagus racemosus Satawar Liliaceae

23 Shrub Triumfetta rhomboidea Thinjhira Malvaceae

Table 3.31: Herbs Recorded from Buffer Zone Area

S. No. Habit Scientific Name

Local/Common

Name Family

1 Herb Urena lobata Bachita Malvaceae

2 Herb Cassia glauca Bathu Fabaceae

3 Herb Chenopodium album Bathua Amaranthaceae

4 Herb Cannabis sativa Bhang Cannabaceae

5 Herb Cassia tora Chakor Fabaceae

6 Herb Amaranthus viridis Chaulai Amaranthaceae

7 Herb Xanthium strumarium Chhota Gokhru Solanaceae

8 Herb Mimosa pudica Chuimui Mimosaceae

9 Herb Datura stramonium Dhatura Solanaceae

10 Herb Euphorbia hirta Dudhi Euphorbiaceae

11 Herb Parthenium hysterophorus Gajar ghas Asteraceae

12 Herb Tribulus terrestris Gokharu ygophyllaceae

13 Herb Aloe vera Gwarpatha Liliaceae






S. No. Habit Scientific Name

Local/Common

Name Family

14 Herb Blumea lacera Jangli Muli Asteraceae

15 Herb Aggeratum conozoid Jangli pudina Asteraceae

16 Herb Solanum indicum Kantakari Solanaceae

17 Herb Cassia occidentalis Kasunda Fabaceae

18 Herb Amaranthus spinosus Kateli maranthaceae

19 Herb Tridax procumbens Khal-muriya Asteraceae

20 Herb Malvestrum coromandelianum Kharenti Malvaceae

21 Herb Leucas aspera Kubi Lamiaceae

22 Herb Silene conoidea Large Sand Catchfly aryophyllaceae

23 Herb Borreria articularis Madanaghanti Rubiaceae

24 Herb Solanum nigrum Makoi Solanaceae

25 Herb Anagallis arvensis Neel Primulaceae

26 Herb Boerhavia diffusa Punarnava Nyctaginaceae

27 Herb Sonchus brachyotus Sadhi Asteraceae

28 Herb Tephrosia purpurea Sharpunkha Fabaceae

29 Herb Hygrophila spinosa Bhankari Acanthaceae

30 Herb Sphaeranthus indicus Chhagul-nudi Asteraceae

31 Herb Xanthium indicum Chota dhatura Asteraceae

32 Herb Alternanthera sessilis Garundi Amaranthaceae

33 Herb Aerva lanata Gorakhbuti, khari Amaranthaceae

34 Herb Solanum surattense Oonth Kateli Solanaceae

35 Herb Sida rhombifolia Sahadeva Malvaceae

36 Herb Elephantopus scaber Samdudri Asteraceae

Table 3.32: Climbers Recorded from Buffer Zone Area


1 Climber Cuscuta reflexa Amarbel Convolvulaceae

2 Climber Acacia pinnata Arar Mimisaceae

3 Climber Mukia maderaspatana Bilari Cucurbitaceae

4 Climber Butea parviflora Cihut Fabaceae

5 Climber Tinospora cordifolia Giloy Menispermaceae






6 Climber Convolvulus arvensis Hiranpug Convolvulaceae

7 Climber Momordica charantia Jungli Kerala Cucurbitaceae

8 Climber Abrus precatorius Karjani Fabaceae

9 Climber Vitis latifolia Khopri Vitaceae

10 Climber Cissampelos pareira Padh Menispermaceae

11 Climber Asparagus racemosus Shatavari Asparagaceae

Table 3.33: Grasses Recorded from Buffer Zone Area


1 Grass Dendrocalamus stricus Bans/Bamboo Poaceae

2 Grass Bambusa arundinaceae Bara bans Poaceae

3 Grass Cyndon dactylon Dub Poaceae

4 Grass Cyperus rotundus Java grass Cyperaceae

5 Grass Arundinella setosa Jharu/Motaminjhar Poaceae

6 Grass Vetiveria zizanoides Khus-Khus Poaceae

7 Grass Saccharum munja Munj Poaceae

8 Grass Cymbopogon martini Nanha dudhe Poaceae

9 Grass Eulaliopsis binata Sabai Poaceae

10 Grass Heteropogon contortus Sukhala Poaceae

Fig. 3.30.: Photograph of Flora in study area






Fauna: Buffer zone is recorded with 35 species of birds / avifauna, 09 mammals,

05 species of herpetofauna on the basis of direct and secondary / indirect

evidences. Taxonomic status and threatened status is given in the following table

(IWPA, 1972: Schedules of Indian Wildlife Protection Act, 1972 & IUCN

Category: LC-Least Concern, EN-Endangered, NT-Near Threatened, VU-

Vulnerable, R-Rare).

Table 3.34: Birds / Avifauna Reported from Buffer Zone

S. No. Scientific Name Common Name

IWPA,

1972* IUCN Category

1 Dicrurus macrocercus Black drongo IV LC

2 Elanus caeruleus Black winged Kite IV LC

3 Himantopus himantopus Black Winged Stilt IV LC

4 Columba livia Blue Rock Pigeon IV LC

5 Tadorna ferruginea Brahminy Duck IV LC

6 Bulbulcus ibis Cattle Egret IV LC

7 Turdoides caudatus Common Babbler IV LC

8 Centropus sinensis Common Crow Pheasant IV LC

9 Corvus splendens Common Crow V LC

10 Aythya ferina Common Pochard IV VU

11 Tadorna tadorna Common Shelduck IV LC

12 Anas crecca Common Teal IV LC

13 Passer domesticus House Sparrow IV LC

14 Eudynamys scolopacea Indian Koel IV LC

15 Gallinule chlorophus Indian Moorhen IV LC

16 Ceryle rudis Indian Pied Kingfisher IV LC

17 Cinnyris asiaticus Indian Purple Sunbird IV LC

18 Saxicoloides fulicata Indian robin IV LC

19 Coracias benghalensis Indian roller IV LC

20 Lonchura punctualata Indian Spotted Munia IV LC

21 Turdoides striata Jungle Babbler IV LC

22 Corvus macrorhynchos Jungle Crow V LC

23 Milvus migrans Pariah Kite IV LC






S. No. Scientific Name Common Name

IWPA,

1972* IUCN Category

24 Pavo cristatus Peafowl I LC

25 Clamator jacobinus Pied Crested Cickoo IV LC

26 Anas acuta Pintail IV LC

27 Porphyrio porphyrio Purple Moorhen -- LC

28 Amandava amandava Red munia IV LC

29 Pycnonotus cafer Red vented Bulbul IV LC

30 Vanellus indicus Red Wattled Lapwing IV LC

31 Psittacula krameri Rose ringed Parakeet IV LC

32 Grus antigone Sarus Crane IV VU

33 Merops orientalis Small Green Bee-Eater IV LC

34 Streptoplia chinensis Spotted Dove IV LC

35 Halcyon smyrensis White Breasted Kingfisher IV LC

Table 3.35: Mammals Reported from Buffer Zone

S. No. Scientific Name Common Name IWPA, 1972 IUCN Category

1 Macaca mulatta Monkey III LC

2 Mus musculus Mouse V LC

3 Hesperoptenus tickelli Tickell’s Bat II LC

4 Lepus nigricollis Indian Hare IV LC

5 Hystrix indica Indian Porcupine IV LC

6 Herpeste edwardsi Mongoose II LC

7 Rattus norvegicus Common House rat V LC

8 Vulpes bengalensis Indian Fox II LC

9 Funambulus pennanti Striped squirrel IV LC

Table 3.36: Herpetofauna Reported from Buffer Zone

S. No. Scientific Name Common Name IWPA, 1972 IUCN Category

1 Rana tigrina Indian Frog IV LC

2 Bufo bufo Common Toad V LC

3 Chamaeleo chamaeleon Girgit IV LC

4 Ramphotyphlops braminus Blind snake II --






5 Calotes vesicolor Garden lizard IV --

3.13.6 Status of threatened and endemic biodiversity

Among flora, no species found to be in rare / threatened category, while among

fauna, only Peacock (Pavo cristatus) falls in the Schedule-I category of IWPA,

1972.

Fig. 3.31.: Photograph of Peacock (Pavo cristatus) in study area

********



Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter IV

Chapter IV

Anticipated Environmental Impacts

& Mitigation Measures



Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter-IV: Anticipated Environmental Impacts




Chapter IV

Anticipated Environmental Impacts


4.1 Introduction

This chapter presents identification and appraisal of various impacts from the proposed

Common Facility for Hazardous Waste incineration, E-Waste dismantling &

segregation and recycling/reconditioning of discarded containers in the study area based

on the inventory of pollution sources as well as the baseline environmental setting

described in Chapter III of the EIA report.

The impacts have been assessed for the proposed project assuming that the pollution

due to the existing activities of the surrounding industries in the area has already been

covered under baseline environmental monitoring.

The operation of the project comprises various activities each of which have an impact

on some or other environmental parameters. Various impacts during the operation

phase on the environment parameters have been studied to estimate the impact on the

environment and are discussed briefly below and elaborated in the subsequent sections.

Mitigation measures at the source level and an overall management plan at the study

area level are elicited so as to improve the supportive capacity of the study area and

also to preserve the assimilative capacity of the receiving bodies.

4.2 Impacts during construction phase

Various activities during the erection and commissioning phase such as movement of

vehicles, heavy machinery, remaining construction work etc. will lead to emission of

particulate matter. The impacts of construction phase are temporary in nature and

subside once the construction activities get over. Major pollutants generated from







remaining construction, erection & commissioning activities are particulate matter

(PM10 and PM2.5), NOx, SO2 & CO. Generation of dust from construction activities will

be main cause of increase in PM10 and PM2.5.

However, no major construction activity will be required at site for the proposed

project.

The impacts of construction phase on various environmental attributes are tabulated

below:

Table 4.1: Construction Phase: Impact & Mitigation Measures

S.

No.

Environmental

Attribute

Impact Mitigation measures

1. Land The existing land cover of the

proposed project site will get

minimally affected as only activities

like clearance of shrubs, preparation of

internal roads, excavation and paving

of site for installing plant equipment

and machineries, is required.

The present land use of plot area is for

industrial use only.

Proposed greenbelt development & plantation

will improve the aesthetics of the area.

2. Soil No significant adverse impact on the

soil in the surrounding area is

anticipated from construction &

installation work.

Construction waste will be reused within site;

storm water will be properly channelized to

avoid water logging.

3. Air quality Exhaust emission from vehicles.

Exhaust from construction

machinery

Dust generation

Regular sprinkling of water will be done at

the construction site.

No unpaved roads will be kept

Vehicles will be kept in good order to

minimize automobile exhaust.

4. Noise levels Noise generation due to heavy

machinery.

The noise produced during the

construction, erection and

commissioning activities will have

significant impact on the existing

The construction work will be carried out

during daytime only.

The machineries/vehicles will be kept in

good order to reduce excessive noise.







S.

No.

Environmental

Attribute


ambient noise levels.

5. Water quality Ground water as well as surface

water contamination due to improper

management/handling of

construction wastes.

Non-point discharges of solids

Improper discharge of Sewage

generated from the construction

work force stationed at the site

No surface water will be used for

construction phase.

The construction in the project will be more

related to mechanical fabrication, assembly

and the erection; hence the water

requirements would be small.

Temporary sanitation facilities will be set up

for disposal of sanitary sewage generated by

the work force as per the prevailing labor

laws.

6. Ecology The impact on the surrounding ecology

due to the project will mainly occur

from the deposition of dust generated

due to construction activities onto the

nearby vegetation or clearing/cutting of

trees etc in the project area.

No national park, wildlife sanctuary,

biosphere reserve exists within 10 km area of

the project. Agriculture fields dominate the

terrestrial ecology in the study area.

Adequate measures will be taken to suppress

dust generated due to construction activities.

The incremental emission of air pollutants

during construction phase is not likely to

induce any significant changes in the

terrestrial ecology.

No cutting of trees will be done.

7. Socio-economic

Environment

The project will have positive impact

on the socio-economics of the area.

Local labour particularly unskilled

labour will be employed based on

eligibility, during construction as well

as post-construction phase.

The locals would get opportunities for

employment due to the project.

The socio-economic conditions of the area are

expected to improve.

In addition to the opportunity of getting

employment as construction laborers, the local

population would also have employment

opportunities based on the educational

qualification like petty commercial







S.

No.

Environmental

Attribute


establishments, small contracts/sub-contracts

and supply of construction materials for

buildings and ancillary infrastructures etc.

8. Occupational &

Community

Health

Over-exertion, and ergonomic

injuries and illnesses, such as

repetitive motion, over-exertion, and

manual handling, are among the

most common causes of injuries in

construction activities.

Respiratory issues due to dust

High blood pressure etc. due to

continuous working near noise

generating machinery

PPEs such as dust masks & ear muffs will be

provided to workmen to reduce occupational

health hazards.

Implementation of administrative controls

into work processes, such as job rotations

and rest or stretch breaks will be done.

Sprinkling of water for dust suppression to

minimize dust from vehicle movements &

construction activities.

Table 4.2: Identification of Impacts during Construction Phase

Parameter/ Activity Air Water Land Noise Ecology Health &

Safety

Socio

Economic

Site cleaning √ x √ √ √ √ x

Leveling and road laying √ x x √ x √ x

Earthwork comprising of

excavation, grading, trenching √ x √ √ x √ x

Transportation of construction

materials √ x √ √ √ √ x

Civil work √ √ x √ x √ x

Mechanical erection √ x x x x √ x

Employment x √ x x x √ √

Domestic Activities by workers x √ √ x x √ x

Greenbelt development √ √ √ √ √ √ √

Note: (√):Possibility of Impact (x): No impact will occur







Table 4.3: Prediction of Impacts during Construction Phase


Safety

Socio

Economic

Site cleaning (-ve) ST - (-ve) ST (-ve) ST (-ve) ST (-ve) ST -

Leveling and road

laying (-ve) ST - - (-ve) ST - (-ve) ST -

Earthwork comprising

of excavation, grading,

trenching

(-ve) ST - (-ve) ST (-ve) ST - (-ve) ST -

Transportation of

construction materials (-ve) ST - (-ve) ST (-ve) ST (-ve) ST (-ve) ST -

Civil work (-ve) ST (-ve) ST (-ve) ST (-ve) ST - (-ve) ST -

Mechanical erection (-ve) ST - - - - (-ve) ST -

Employment - (-ve) ST - - - (-ve) ST (+ve) LT

Greenbelt

development (+ve) LT (+ve) LT (+ve) LT (+ve) LT (+ve) LT (+ve) LT (+ve) LT

Note: (+ve):Positive Impact; (-ve):Negative Impact; ST: Short Term; LT: Long Term

4.3 Impacts during operational phase

Table 4.4: Identification of impacts during operation phase


Safety

Socio

Economic

Raw material & product

storage and handling √ √ √ x x √ x

Transportation of raw materials

and finished products √ x x √ x √ x

Process √ √ √ √ x √ x

Emergencies or disaster √ √ √ √ √ √ x

Breakdown of critical systems √ √ √ √ x √ x

Employment x x x x x √ √

Greenbelt development √ √ √ √ √ X √








Safety

Socio

Economic

Infrastructure development &

CER activities x x x x x √ √

Note: (√):Possibility of Impact (x): No impact will occur

Table 4.5: Prediction of Impacts during operation phase


Safety

Socio

Economic

Raw material & product

storage and handling

(+ve)

LT

(+ve)

LT

(+ve)

LT - - (+ve) LT -

Transportation of raw

materials and finished

products

(+ve)

LT

(-ve)

ST

(-ve)

ST

(-ve)

ST - (-ve) ST -

Process (+ve)

LT

(+ve)

LT

(+ve)

LT

(-ve)

ST - (-ve) ST -

Emergencies or disaster (+ve)

LT

(+ve)

LT

(+ve)

LT

(-ve)

ST (-ve) ST (+ve) LT -

Breakdown of critical

systems

(-ve)

ST

(-ve)

ST

(-ve)

ST

(-ve)

ST - (-ve) ST -

Employment - - - - - (+ve) LT (+ve) LT

Greenbelt development (+ve)

LT

(+ve)

LT

(+ve)

LT

(+ve)

LT

(+ve)

LT - (+ve) LT

Infrastructure development

& CSR activities - - - - - (+ve) LT (+ve) LT

Note:(+ve):Positive Impact; (-ve):Negative Impact; ST: Short Term; LT: Long Term

The activities related to the operational phase have varying impacts on the environment

and are also considered for impact assessment for the following attributes:

Topography and drainage

Land use;







Soil quality;

Solid & Hazardous waste;

Air quality;

Water resources and quality;

Noise levels;

Socio-economic environment;

Ecological environment;

4.3.1 Impact on Topography and Drainage

This proposed project is located in Sikandrabad industrial area. The study area is

characterized by a relatively flat terrain with elevation of 206 meters above sea level.

The project is situated in the flat terrain region of Bulandshahr district. For this

proposed project, no surface drainage is modified/ diverted; as such no disturbance is

caused to the natural drainage system. Hence, the impact on the topography and drainage

of the study area is negligible.

4.3.2 Impact on Land use

No definite additional impacts to land use occur during the operational phase. The

proposed project will have negligible impact on the landuse of the project site as the

present landuse of plot area is for industrial use only. Proposed greenbelt development &

plantation will improve the aesthetics of the area.

4.3.3 Impact on Soil

Potential impacts on soil quality due to proposed project activities are given below:

Top soil during site preparation: soil erosion;

Construction & commissioning of the project: compaction of soil & top soil loss;

Fuel leakages on soil during vehicular activities: compaction of soil & soil

contamination;







Leakages due to storage and handling of fuel, solid hazardous waste- soil

contamination.

Standard practices for handling of waste & no discharge of waste water outside the

plant premises will ensure no contamination of the soil and hence the impacts due to the

facility on the soil quality are negligible. The impact will be confined to the core zone

only. Due care shall be taken to mitigate any adverse impact on soil quality

Stock piling of the top soil for landscaping purpose.

Proper storage of construction materials

Proper storage and handling of waste water/sludge

Management of leaching losses of liquid and solid wastes by provision of cemented

flooring.

4.3.4 Impact of waste generation

Municipal waste generated at the site will be collected and handled in line with the

provisions of the Solid Waste Management Rules 2016.

Hazardous wastes generated at site will be handled & stored as per Hazardous & Other

Waste (Management and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016 and will be disposed

as per guidelines. Details are given in Chapter II, section 2.12.5 of the EIA report

Mitigation measures

This waste will be sent to nearest TSDF as per Hazardous and Other Wastes

(Management and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016.

All the hazardous waste generated is stored in storage area provided with

impervious flooring & also having catchment garland drains for collecting run-off

water. Garland drains will be connected to ETP.







4.3.5 Impact on Air Quality

4.3.5.1. Assessment of Impact on Air Quality

To support the application for the project, an assessment including an air dispersion

modelling study (to evaluate the effects from the emissions from the project under

normal operations) and surrounding baseline levels on the ambient air quality was

performed. Predictions were made for maximum ground level concentrations of the

pollutants of concern.

In this modelling approach only those sources are considered which are potential

sources of air pollution due to the proposed project operations. The major air pollution

will be caused due the operation of Incinerator, DG sets and introduction of vehicular

emissions due to transportation activities. The major air pollutants are given below:

NOX (Nitrogen Oxide): The amount of produced NOx is a function of the maximum

temperature, oxygen concentrations, and residence time. NOx will be mainly

generated during the high-temperature burning of fuel in the Incinerator, DG Set &

vehicle engines & thermal treatment of hazardous waste in incinerator, and the

amount being formed depends greatly on the combustion temperature. The higher the

burning temperature and the more intense the oxygen concentration, the longer the

reaction time would be and thereby generating more NOx emissions.

CO (Carbon monoxide): CO is generated due to the incomplete combustion of fuel in

the Incinerator, DG Set & vehicle engines & thermal treatment of hazardous waste in

incinerator. CO emissions will be controlled from the Incinerator & DG sets based on

the combustion design efficiencies to be achieved. The Incinerator & DG sets will be

designed to achieve a maximum efficiency of fuel burning for the less emissions of

CO.

PM: Particulate Matter Emissions are generated from combustion of fuel in the

Incinerator, DG Set & vehicle engines & thermal treatment of hazardous waste in

incinerator.

SO2: Sulphur in the feeding waste upon thermal oxidation forms sulphur dioxide.







Air Dispersion Modelling Methodology

Prediction of impacts on air environment has been carried out employing mathematical

model based on a steady state Gaussian plume dispersion model designed for multiple

volume and point sources for short term modelling. In the present case, Industrial

Source Complex-Short Term [ISCST3] dispersion model based on steady state

Gaussian plume dispersion, designed for multiple volume and point sources for short

term modelling and developed by United States Environmental Protection Agency

[USEPA] has been used for modelling simulations. The maximum 24-hourly

incremental concentrations of pollutants in ambient air are estimated using the ISCST3

model. This model can account for the point sources, settling and dry deposition of

particles, downwash, separation of point sources and limited terrain adjustment. The

computations deal with major pollutants viz., particulate matter, carbon monoxide,

hydrochloric acid, oxides of nitrogen & TOC.

Model Input Data

The modeling scenario considered is as follows:

Normal operations where hazardous waste is incinerated at a rate of 500 kg/hr;

Emergency power generation where a diesel generator of 420 kVA is used to

produce power in an event of power failure of UPPCL and the waste incineration is

expected to continue after the power failure.

The Ground level concentrations were modeled at selected geographical locations

within the modeling domain using cartesian grids with different spacing of receptor

points. The map showing the various settlements / sensitive receptors considered is

given as Figure 3.2 which has the details of baseline details of ambient air quality in the

study area.

Emission Inventory

The emission rates of the point sources from the proposed project and emission factors

for the respective pollutants are provided in Table 4.6 (a) & 4.6 (b) below.







The emission rates of the point sources from the project and emission factors for the

respective pollutants are provided in Table below:

Point Source:

S. No. Particulars Capacity Fuel Consumption (lt/hr) Fuel

1. DG Set x 3 No. 125 kVA 10.0-12.0 HSD

2. DG Set x 3 No 15 kVA 10.0-12.0 HSD

3. Incinerator 500 kg/hr 125

(102 kg/hr -106 kg/hr)

HSD/LDO

Table No. 4.6(a): Emission Factors for DG Set

S. No. Particulars

Emission Factors

SO2 PM

NOX

(NO and NO2 expressed as

NO2 )

CO

1. Diesel Generator 0.05 % of Sulphur in

HSD

0.3

g/kw-hr

9.2

g/kw-hr

3.5

g/kw-hr

DG set SO2 emissions are based on sulphur content of 0.05% and The Environment (Protection) Third

Amendment Rules 2002, at serial No. 95 & 96, under the Environment (Protection) Act, 1986.

Table No. 4.6(b): Emission Factors for Incinerator (high energy scrubber)

S. No. Pollutant Emission Rating

High energy scrubber (Kg/Mg)

1. Carbon Monoxide 3.00E-02

2. Nitrogen oxides 2.04 E+00

3. PM 4.27 E-01

4. TOC 1.08 E-02

5. HCl 1.47 E+01

6. H2SO4 1.49 E+00

Source: AP-42 Compilation of Air Pollutant Emission Factors, US-EPA







Table No. 4.7: Emission Estimates for Point Sources

Particular Units Incinerator

500 kg/hr

DG Set

125 kVA

DG Set

15 kVA

Exhaust release height m 30 5 5

Exhaust diameter m 0.4 0.12 0.085

Exhaust gas velocity m/s 18 13 11

Flue gas temperature ₒC 800 473 350

Line Source:

Transportation Activities: Total 07 no. of vehicles are proposed for transportation

purpose. The proposed project has a manpower requirement of 15 persons.

Meteorological Data

The AERMOD model requires hourly surface data values for wind speed, wind

direction, temperature, rainfall, relative humidity, pressure, cloud cover and ceiling

height and solar radiation and at least once daily mixing height data. Surface data

(temperature, rainfall, relative humidity, pressure, cloud cover and solar radiation as

well as wind data (direction and speed) for year 2019 for the winter season was utilized

for the study which is collected from automatic weather station set up at the proposed

project site during the study period.

Both data files for the surface and mixing heights were then used to generate the

meteorological file required by the AERMOD dispersion model using the AERMET

meteorological pre-processor programme. This AERMET programme has three stages

to process the data. The first stage extracts meteorological data and assesses data

quality through a series of quality assessment checks. The second stage merges all data

available for 24-hour periods and writes these data together in a single intermediate file.

The third and final stage reads the merged meteorological data and estimates the

necessary boundary layer parameters for dispersion calculations by AERMOD.

The 2019, winter season (Dec., 2018 to Feb., 2019) meteorological pre-processed data

was used to determine its corresponding Wind Rose plot, given in chapter III. The







Wind rose show that the most predominant wind direction blows from North West, this

means that the emissions plume will be dispersed mainly in the South East direction.

4.3.5.2. Presentation of Results

In the present case, model simulations have been carried out for the study period. The

Ground level concentrations are computed for 24-hr average for NOx, SO2, PM10, and

1-hr average for CO. Maximum Ground level concentrations of various parameters are

tabulated in Table 4.8 and were falling within the proposed site premises from the

point source. The incremental ground level concentrations for PM, CO, NOx are given in

Table 4.10.

Table No. 4.8: Maximum Ground level concentrations of Pollutants

S. No. Parameter

Maximum

GLC

(µg/ m3)

Coordinates

Distance (m)

wrt Project Site

Direction

wrt

Project

Site

X Y

1 Particulate Matter

(PM10)

7.6 760804.17 3151832.2

within project

site boundary -

2 Sulphur Dioxide

(SO2)

2.9 760804.17 3151832.2

within project

site boundary -

3 Oxides of Nitrogen

(NOx)

16.5 760804.17 3151832.2

within project

site boundary -

4 Carbon Monoxide

(CO) (mg/m3)

5.3 760804.17 3151832.2

within project

site boundary -

Resultant Concentrations after Implementation of the Project

The maximum incremental GLCs due to the proposed project for NOx, SO2, PM10, and

CO are superimposed on the maximum baseline concentrations recorded during the

study period. The cumulative concentrations (baseline + incremental) after







implementation of the project are tabulated below. The predicted ground level

concentration isopleths for various parameters during study period is given in Fig. 4.1 to

4.4.

It is seen from the table 4.9, the resultant GLC’s obtained at various locations are

exceeding the CPCB standards for PM10.

Table 4.9: Results of Air Modelling

Receptor Location Pollutants

CO

(mg/m3)

NOx

(µg/m3)

PM

(µg/m3)

SO2

(µg/m3)

Project Site 5.28696 16.52921 7.60224 2.88567

Faridpur 0.2361 0.7438 0.33433 0.08573

Mandaora 0.22075 0.69665 0.31641 0.07972

Manhcha 0.14324 0.45237 0.2071 0.05204

Rajarampur 0.6293 1.98781 0.90875 0.22719

Salehpur 0.07766 0.24341 0.10056 0.02537

Sikandraba 0.2143 0.67607 0.30642 0.07749

Tilbegampu 0.2008 0.63203 0.28732 0.07596

Table 4.10: Incremental concentration of pollutants on sampling locations

S.

No.

Location Parameter

Baseline

Levels

(average)

Incremental

GLC

(µg/ m3)

Resultant

GLCs

(µg/ m3)

Limits as per

NAAQS

1. Project Site

(AAQ-1)

PM(µg/m3) 256.7 7.60 264.3 100 µg/m

3

NOx (µg/m3) 28.0 16.53 44.53 80 µg/m

3

CO (mg/m3) 1.90 5.29 7.19 2 mg/m

3

SO2 11.1 2.9 14 60 µg/ m3

2. Rajarampur

(AAQ-2)

PM(µg/m3) 223.8 0.91 224.71 100 µg/m

3

NOx (µg/m3) 29.1 1.98 31.08 80 µg/m

3

CO (mg/m3) 1.47 0.62 2.09 2 mg/m

3

SO2 9.9 0.23 10.13 60 µg/ m3







S.

No.

Location Parameter

Baseline

Levels

(average)

Incremental

GLC

(µg/ m3)

Resultant

GLCs

(µg/ m3)

Limits as per

NAAQS

3. Mandaora

(AAQ-3)

PM(µg/m3) 170.3 0.32 170.62 100 µg/m

3

NOx (µg/m3) 21.6 0.69 22.29 80 µg/m

3

CO (mg/m3) 1.03 0.22 1.25 2 mg/m

3

SO2 11.4 0.80 12.2 60 µg/ m3

4. Sikandrabad

(AAQ-4)

PM(µg/m3) 306.0 0.31 306.31 100 µg/m

3

NOx (µg/m3) 31.6 0.67 32.27 80 µg/m

3

CO (mg/m3) 1.97 0.21 2.18 2 mg/m

3

SO2 12.6 0.08 12.68 60 µg/ m3

5. Faridpur

(AAQ-5)

PM(µg/m3) 175.1 0.33 175.43 100 µg/m

3

NOx (µg/m3) 21.8 0.74 22.54 80 µg/m

3

CO (mg/m3) 0.98 0.23 1.21 2 mg/m

3

SO2 9.3 0.09 9.39 60 µg/ m3

6. Manhcha

(AAQ-6)

PM(µg/m3) 210.7 0.21 210.91 100 µg/m

3

NOx (µg/m3) 23.6 0.45 24.05 80 µg/m

3

CO (mg/m3) 1.25 0.14 1.39 2 mg/m

3

SO2 11.0 0.05 11.05 60 µg/ m3

7. Salehpur

(AAQ-7)

PM(µg/m3) 173 0.10 173.1 100 µg/m

3

NOx (µg/m3) 20.5 0.24 20.74 80 µg/m

3

CO (mg/m3) 0.9 0.077 0.977 2 mg/m

3

SO2 10.7 0.03 10.73 60 µg/ m3

8. Tilbegampur

(AAQ-8)

PM(µg/m3) 173.7 0.28 173.98 100 µg/m

3

NOx (µg/m3) 19.5 0.63 20.13 80 µg/m

3

CO (mg/m3) 0.94 0.20 1.14 2 mg/m

3

SO2 10.8 0.08 10.88 60 µg/ m3







Fig 4.1:-Isopleth Showing Maximum Ground Level Concentrations of PM10

Fig 4.2: Isopleths Showing Maximum Incremental Ground Level Concentrations of NOX







Fig 4.3: Isopleths Showing Maximum Incremental Ground Level Concentrations of CO

Fig 4.4: Isopleths Showing Maximum Incremental Ground Level Concentrations of SOX

4.3.5.3. Impact & Mitigation

The following activities may cause impact on air quality during the operational phase:

Table 4.11: Operation Activity, Impact & Mitigation Measures

S. No. Activity Impact Mitigation Measures

1. Transportation of waste to

the facility from member

industry

Generation of dust and

emission of HC & CO.

Maintenance of roads,

Water sprinkling for dust

suppression

Properly covered vehicles for

transportation

Vehicle manifest system will be

implemented.







S. No. Activity Impact Mitigation Measures

PUC Certified vehicles will be

used.

Regular & preventive

maintenance of vehicles.

2. Temporary waste material

storage, stabilization &

handling, dismantling &

segregation

Particulate matter

emissions & odour

generation

Storage will be done as per HOW

rules, 2016.

Standard operating will be

developed & implemented

Development of green belt for

dust & odour suppression

3. Incinerator operations Generation of PM, SO2,

NOx, HCl, CO,TOC,

dioxin & furan etc.

Adequate APCS will be installed

like Bag Filter, Scrubbers, Mist

eliminator, rapid quencher, dioxin &

furan control system, ID Fan, HEPA

filter & stack of 30 m height.

4. ETP operations Generation of Odour Development of green belt &

landscaping with selection of plant

species for odor suppression

5. Operation of DG set Generation of SO2, NOx,

HC, CO & PM emissions

D.G set is used as back-up power

source.

Adequate Stack Height provided

for proper dispersion of air

pollutants.

4.3.5.4. Air Pollution Control Devices

Air pollution control system cleans the incinerator products of combustion. The

functional requirements of flue gas cleaning system are:

Control the acid gas emissions

Control of particulate emissions







The incineration facility will be designed to ensure the wastes are destroyed in a safe,

controllable and efficient manner:

The combustion and flue gas cleaning system operates under safe negative pressure

at all times. This prevents the escape of combustible products to atmosphere prior

to being processed through the entire Incineration process.

Both Rotary Kiln and secondary combustion chamber (S.C.C.) are maintained at

excess air condition at sufficient temperature and residence time to ensure the

complete oxidation of wastes.

The tumbling action of wastes inside the kiln due to continuous rotation ensures

good heat transfer and complete destruction of wastes.

The flue gases from Rotary Kiln due waste burning are retained at S.C.C. for a

residence time which is in excess of the minimum residence time required for

complete oxidation.

The highly efficient air cleaning system traps the particulate matters and neutralizes

the acidic gases prior to their release into the atmosphere

System has got the inbuilt safety interlocks. If any operational parameter goes

outside the pre-determined boundary limits, it will cause an automatic shutdown of

portion / all of the Incineration System depending upon the particular upset

parameter.

The air pollution control system includes:

Rapid quencher: Rapid quenching system to prevent reformation of dioxins by rapidly

lowering the flue gas temperatures, particularly from 500 °C to less than 200 °C & to

cool down hot gases coming from incinerator

Bag House: Flue gases will be passed through bag filters for removal of particulates.

Wet alkaline scrubber (Venturi and Packed Bed): Dry lime and activated carbon are

injected for neutralization of acidic gases (HCl, HF, and SO2) and removal of organic

constituents. Adsorption by activated carbon to remove any dioxin & furans, mercury (if

present in waste feed) in the flue gases







Mist eliminator: Often there is a need to eliminate the mist in the stack emissions,

therefore, de-mister will be provided.

ID Fan: to maintain the entire system in negative draft for proper removal of flue gases.

HEPA Filter: The gases from the ID fan would be allowed to pass through a fine

particulate filter in order to remove the very fine particulates before they are let out

into the atmosphere though the chimney.

Stack: Incinerator & DG Set will be provided with a stack height meeting MOEF&CC

Guidelines (minimum 30 m & 5.0 m, respectively) for proper dispersion of cleaned

gases in atmosphere.

Controls and monitoring: Operation within the key parameters of the combustion

process is assured by systems of monitors and computer controls. These systems make

automatic adjustments to key functions as necessary. For example, if temperatures

begin to drop below desired range; supplemental waste fuels are automatically

injected.

Conversely, if temperatures rise above the desired range, waste feeds rate is reduced.

All regulated incinerators have waste feed cut-offs (WFCOs) to assure protective

operations. WFCOs automatically stop the feeding of waste into the incinerator if any

of the key parameters falls outside the narrow range of operating requirements even

momentarily.

In order to monitor key parameters “Online Flue gas analyzer” will be installed as per

norms laid down by CPCB.

Dioxins & Furan control

To prevent reformation of dioxins, rapid lowering of the flue gas temperatures,

particularly from 500 °C to less than 200 °C by adopting rapid quench will be done.

To reduce the precursors essential for formation of Dioxins & Furans, complete

combustion to the extent possible, will be ensured in secondary chamber by







maintaining minimum temperature of about 1050 ± 50° C and a residence time of

at least 2 seconds.

4.3.5.5. Impact of Odour on Air Quality

Odour sensation is induced by inhaling airborne volatile organics or inorganic, which

may or may not have toxic effects. Odour is typically generated if the waste is not stored

properly before or after treatment or from the operations of effluent treatment plant.

Odor Control Measures

Suction hood to be provided in hazardous waste storage area.

Afterburner (direct) technique (doubling residence time to enable afterburner

temperature to be reduced to 20°C to 100°C and flue gas handling systems to

achieve better destruction or removal efficiency;

Flue gas shall be passed through wet scrubbing system involving removal of odour

by absorption;

Providing mask to the employees at the site to avoid health issues due to obnoxious

odor.

Development of vegetation growth to cover of the open areas of the site reduces

odour. Good plantation cover forms a surface capable of absorbing and forming

sinks for odourous gases. Leaves, with their large combined areas in a tree crown,

sorbs pollutants on their surface, thus effectively reduce odourous compound

concentrations.

Adequate green belt will be developed. (spp. Like Alstonia scholoris, etc. to control

odour).

Dilution of odourant by odour counter action or neutralize by spraying Ecosorb

(organic and biodegradable chemical) around odour generation areas at regular

intervals.

Good housekeeping practices will be followed.







4.3.5.6. Fugitive emissions/effluents & management

Fugitive emissions from storage & handling area for hazardous materials are envisaged

due to proposed project. Odor of raw materials & end waste/end product shall be limited

to project area. Fugitive emissions shall be controlled by taking following steps:

All liquid raw materials and intermediates shall be charged into incinerator with

pumps or under gravity through closed pipes.

All vents of holding tanks and dosing vessels shall be connected to a Vent Scrubber

system comprising of a suction blower, Alkali Scrubber and an Activated Carbon

Column before venting through a tall stack.

All process emissions will be passed through properly designed scrubber and

finally released in to atmosphere through adequate stack height;

TOC present in the vent gas stream shall be absorbed in the Activated Carbon

tower.

All pumps handling hazardous chemicals shall be provided with mechanical seals

to prevent fugitive emission. Wherever possible magnetic coupled pumps will be

used.

Any spillage from drums etc. will be absorbed with saw dust / soda ash and moped

clean. The contaminated absorbent will be safely disposed off along with hazardous

waste.

Storage tank will be provided with level gauge, dyke wall, automated loading and

unloading for the chemicals to avoid human contact.

All storage tanks will be designed and placed according to the Industrial Safety &

Health Department.

Measuring Instruments with sound alarm and having strategically placed sensing

elements will be provided for alerting the personnel in case of any escape of gases.







4.3.6 Impact of off-Site Traffic on Existing Infrastructure

The proposed project approximately requires around 07 vehicles for transportation of

the waste. Adequate road transport facility is already available in the area which is

sufficient to cater the needs of excess vehicular movement.

4.3.7 Impact on Water Resources and Quality

4.3.7.1. Water Consumption and it’s Source

The daily fresh water requirement for the proposed project is 4.0 KLD which will be

met through tanker supply. No changes in water bodies or the land surface affecting

drainage or run-off are envisaged. No disturbance is envisaged for water courses.

4.3.7.2. Waste Water Generation, Treatment and Disposal

The wastewater will be generated from:

– Vehicle/Floor washing;

– Scrubber;

– Discarded container recycling; and

– Laboratory

Effluent generation from the hazardous waste treatment & incinerator operations will

be about 3.14 KLD. Effluent generated will be treated in effluent treatment plant

(ETP) of capacity 7.0 KLD.

Treated water will be recycled into scrubbing process and reused for floor/vehicle

washing, greenbelt & domestic (flushing) purpose. Zero discharge condition of waste

water will be maintained.

4.3.7.3. Impact on Surface Water & Ground Quality

Water contamination may occur due to:

Discharge of untreated wastewater outside the project premises.

Depletion of water sources due to use of surface water.

Run-off contamination in case of any leakage from hazardous waste storage area.







However, no wastewater will be discharged outside the project premises hence impact

on surface water quality will be negligible.

4.3.7.4. Mitigation Measures

Domestic wastewater will be discharged through septic tank into soak pit.

All the hazardous waste will be stored as per guidelines in storage area with

impervious flooring to control any leachate and prevent ground/surface water

contamination.

Garland drains connected to ETP will be provided around storage area, vehicle

washing area.

Periodical monitoring of Ground & surface water quality will be done as per

guidelines.

4.3.7.5. Rain Water Harvesting

The proposed project will properly utilize rainwater by implementing appropriate rain

water-harvesting mechanism.

The average annual rainfall (based on last 5 years rainfall data) at Bulandshar station is

500 mm.

Table 4.12.: Rain Fall Data (last 5years)

S. No. Years Rainfall (mm)

1. 2014 340.3

2. 2015 552.4

3. 2016 589

4. 2017 548.2

5. 2018 468.3

Average 499.64 say as 500 mm

Source: India Meteorological department







Calculation of No. of RWH Structures:

The rain water harvesting structures are calculated on the basis of peak intensity of

rainfall recorded as 40 mm/hr considering 15 minutes of peak rainfall. The same has

been done to avoid flooding of the area.

Table 4.13: Calculation for Rain Water Harvesting Structures

S.

No

Type of Structure/

Surface

Area

[A]

(sq. m.)

Run off

Coefficient

[C]

Intensity

of rainfall

(m/hour) [I]

Total discharge

[Q = CIA]

(m3/hr)

1. Roof Top 737 0.85 0.04 25.058

2. Landscape 612.81 0.15 0.04 3.67

3. Paved/Open 507.19 0.65 0.04 13.18

Grand Total (1-3) 1857 - - 41.908

Total Rain Water Flow : 42 m3/hr

Considering 15 minutes of peak rainfall,

Runoff volume : 10.50 m3/hr

Volume of each pit : 12 m3 (2 m x 2m x 3 m)

Total no. of rain water harvesting pits required :Total run-off

volume/volume of each pit

: 10.50 / 12

: 1 nos.

Therefore, 1 Nos. rain Water Harvesting pit of size 2 m length x 2 m width x 3 m

depth with PVC slotted pipe upto minimum depth of 50 m.

Design of Rain Water Harvesting Structure:

The dimensional parameters of Desilting/Settlement chamber would be 2 m (length)

x 2 m (width) x 3 (depth). In Desilting chamber, 0.30 m depth below outflow is kept

for silt deposition. The filtration tank dimension would be 2 m (length) x 2 m







(width) x 3 m (depth) with 0.20 m dia recharge well of 50 m depth depending upon

the formation for recharge in aquifer through vadose zone. Each structure will be

capable of handling rainwater volume @ 12 m3/day.

Fig. 4.5: Schematic design of Rain Water Harvesting Structure

Table 4.14: Calculation of annual recharge

S. No Type of

Structure/ Surface

Area [A]

(sq. m.)

Run off

Coefficient [C]

Intensity

of rainfall [I]

(m/annum)

Total discharge

[Q= CIA]

(m3/ annum)

1. Roof Top 737 0.85 0.500 313.225

2. Landscape 612.81 0.15 0.500 45.96075

3. Paved 507.19 0.65 0.500 164.83675

Grand Total (1-3) 1857 - - 524.02

Total Annual Recharge to Ground Water Regime of the area through rainwater

harvesting structure would be 524.02 m3/ annum.

The proposed project will help improve the ground water availability through rain water

harvesting to the tune of 524.02 m3/ annum.







4.3.8. Impact on Noise Levels

The major source of noise generating source during the operation phase of the proposed

hazardous waste treatment & incinerator project are incinerator, diesel generator set,

shredder, pumps and compressors, ID Fan, E-waste segregation & dismantling, vehicles

etc.


Indian Standard for noise level specifies the limiting value of an overall noise level for

a specified area. However, OSHA standard calls for regulations of noise level around

the noise emitting equipment.

All equipments in the proposed project will be designed /operated to have a noise

level not exceeding prescribed standard in line with the requirements of OSHA.

Acoustic enclosures for considerable noise generating point sources such as DG Set

will be provided for noise attenuation.

Workers will be provided with suitable personal protective equipment (PPE) such

as earmuffs and earplugs.

Rotation of workers in the high noise area will be done.

Green belt will be developed to reduce noise.

Equipment will be maintained in good working order to reduce noise.

All equipment will be operated within specified design parameters.

4.3.9. Impacts on Socio-Economic Environment

TSDF projects are economical and environment friendly solutions for tackling the

problem of Hazardous Waste. While assessing the socio-economic and health impact

of the people of surrounding villages of the project site it has been noticed that the

proposed project will generate some job opportunities in the area during the

construction & operation phase and also will solve the hazardous waste management

problems in the area.







4.3.9.1. During Construction Phase

Construction phase generally will have very limited impacts which are as under:

1. Influx of population:

Unskilled labor will be hired at cheap cost from different region including the

nearby villages. This may create a feeling of insecurities among the local villagers

due exposure to unknown people and their cultures. But as local people will be

given priority, so a few population from other state will not pose any serious threat

to local culture.

2. Dust Emissions impacting health & hygiene

Dust will me emitted during construction phase due to vehicular movement and

construction activities which will in turn impact the health of the people nearby

villages and the passerby. This may cause breathing problems to the villagers.

However this impact is temporary and will be limited to the site only.

3. Increase of Temporary Employment opportunities

Construction phase will require unskilled laborers for the development of the site.

Local unskilled population is expected to get job in the development phase of the

project. Hence temporary increase of job opportunities is envisaged.

4.3.9.2. During Operation Phase

The operation phase of the project will have positive impact in the surrounding areas.

However, some side effects cannot be ignored which may arise for any developmental

projects. The positive and negative impacts are highlighted in the following sections.

Positive Impact

1. Employment Opportunities for Job Seekers







The proposed project will require unskilled, semiskilled and skilled people during

its operation and construction phases which in turn would generate some direct and

indirect employment. Although only about 15 people are proposed to be directly

employed for the proposed project among which maybe some of them will be from

local villages, however any developmental project creates alternate indirect

employment. The proposed project will benefit the small scale business men or

other semiskilled laborers indirectly due to the requirement of workers in trail

making, auxiliary and ancillary works, supply of raw material, or for opening

snacks corners near the facility, or for supply of medicines for the plant workers

etc. This will lead to generation of employment at local level. This will improve the

living standard of society and will provide safe & hygienic surrounding. The

proposed activities shall generate indirect employment in the region which would

marginally improve the economic status of the people in local area, and hence also

reduce the rate of migration to outside.

2. Improvement of the local Infrastructure:

The proposed project is expected to improve the infrastructure in the surrounding

villages.

Approach roads will be upgraded to facilitate movement of the heavy equipment

required in the project which in turn would lead to improvement in transport

facilities. Lighting will be provided on the approach roads. Developed roads lead to

better connectivity.

3. Improvement of the living standard area due to CSR activities

Nearby villages will get developed through Corporate Social Responsibility (CER)

activities of the company. Project proponent may provide educational aid to local

villages based on need and request from the village Panchayat. This project will

bring social change in the society with improved socio-economic life of the local

people

.

4. Improvement of the Nation’s Economic conditions







Government will get different types of taxes, Excise duty, state sale tax or VAT etc.

5. Augmentation of the water table

The company is going to recharge groundwater through rainwater harvesting which

will improve ground water table of the area.

6. Impact on Aesthetic Beauty, foul smell & health of the people and animals

Due to non-availability of appropriate land parcel away from human settlement, the

hazardous waste management is a problem to the society. The toxic hazardous

substances in the wastes in the local area generated from surrounding industries and

households are lying as heap on adjacent roads near Jokhabad village which are

harmful to human and animal health. Also the aesthetic beauty of the area is

affected. Also foul smell sometimes comes out from the area creates odor problem

in the surrounding. The plastics if eaten by cows could be fatal. The leachates from

these Solid wastes can pollute water and their burning can lead to air pollution.

Besides these, these solid waste dumps are the source of food for various rodents

like rats, flies, mosquitoes and the like which can cause many diseases.

The proposed waste treatment facility will manage the hazardous waste in the area

which in turn will check the smell and control the rodents and flies reducing the

impacts on health of the local people. Also it will improve the aesthetic beauty of

the area by clearing the garbage of the road.

7. Impact on Demographic Scenario of the Project Area.

There is no massive employment augmentation is expected in the proposed project,

hence there will be no in-migration of people from the nearby areas of the project.

The setting up of expansion of Waste to Energy project will not lead to any

increase in local population as the local people from the neighboring areas will only

be recruited for the job. Also neither there will be any out-migration for the

proposed project. Therefore, there will be no change in the demographic pattern of

the study area including sex ratio.







Negative impact

1. Impact on Human health & Environment

There is a need to handle the Hazardous Solid Waste (MSW) with due care while

transporting, storing and managing the same. The risks involved are:

i. Potential risks to the public may arise not through direct contact with the waste,

but off-site, as a result of exposure to the hazardous waste.

ii. Due to the proposed project activities fugitive emission will be generated which

is due to spreading of waste at landfill. Also during material handling and

vehicular movement and loading/unloading of hazardous waste brought to the

site will generate large amount of dust and gaseous emission if no action is taken

for suppressing it at source. While the immediate effects of the dust and

particulate matters will be poor visibility but intake of dust and other gaseous

emissions through inhalation and oral route can have health impacts at the

secondary stage. Dioxin is a poisonous gas, if inhaled directly may lead to

cancerous diseases.

iii. Accidental emissions and discharges to air, water and land from events such as a

collision involving a waste tanker on the public highway or a fire in a tank farm

can cause health effects the surrounding people on the road and to workers.

iv. Although the gaseous emission during plant operation will be at Low-level,

continuous, controlled‘ emissions, however due to any accidental failure of the

plant or due to poor incinerator combustion conditions the uncontrolled flow of

hydrocarbon during blow out may cause serious long term health injuries

including fatality to workers as well as to the surrounding communities through

inhalation or ingestion. These health injuries will be mainly respiratory damage,

cancerous effect, or neurological effect, morbidity or mortality.

v. Discharge of leachate and any other fluid owing to poor landfill containment or

due to poor design or operational practices during routine operation of plant also







can mix with the ground water table or with any surface water bodies which may

come in contact with the human skin or mix with the drinking water. These

emissions and discharges may create precarious health problems like cancer,

skin damage and irritations, disruptive reproductive effects, neurological

damage, thyroid systems, etc.

2. Impact on Property rate

Social impacts like property price depreciation represent an external ‘cost’ of waste

disposal and treatment facilities. Property values are also affected by their

proximity to a new landfill.

3. Impact on groundwater level and quality

As this project is going to use ground water for its requirement, its impact will be

reflected on ground water level. The villagers may have problem for access to

groundwater after certain years. Also if in any other operation practice like poor

storage maintenance, there may be leachate discharge or any toxic fluid discharge

from the project site which may contaminate the groundwater which in turn may

have health effects in the surrounding villages.


Waste treatment projects can form an essential part of an integrated waste

management system, yet strict controls are necessary to prevent its negative impacts

on human health and environment. The proposed project site is located within an

industrial area of Sikandrabad. Already, the area has problems of drinking water

facilities, groundwater depletion and air pollution which may aggravate due to

proposed project. During the course of the study, some social factors were identified

that might influence the human life socially and economically due to the proposed

project.

Following precautionary mitigation measures should to be followed to mitigate

adverse impacts:







i. Vehicle used for transportation of hazardous waste will be in accordance with the

provisions under the Motor Vehicles Act, 1986, and rules made there under.

Transporter will possess valid authorization from State Pollution Control Board for

transportation of wastes. The words "HAZARDOUS WASTE" will be displayed on

all sides of the vehicle. Name of the facility operator or the transporter, as the case

may be, also will be displayed.

ii. Vehicles will be fitted with roll-on/roll-off covers if the individual containers do

not possess the same.

iii. In the event of a leak or accidental spill of hazardous waste during its transport, the

transporter will take immediate and appropriate actions, including notifying local

authorities of the discharge. An area may have to be diked to contain the wastes,

and efforts must be undertaken to remove the wastes and reduce environmental

or public health hazards

iv. Periodic Monitoring for environmental quality for air, water, soil and noise by third

parties will be done and its frequencies will be increased with. A proper

groundwater monitoring system and leakage detection and monitoring system is

proposed in the project. The Proponent assures to take immediate action if the

report contains any alarmed values.

v. Periodic checking of the functioning of the machineries is proposed done to check

any unsatisfactory performance of the machineries to avoid any mishap of

environmental and social concerns.

vi. The project proponent ensures proper health and safety facilities for all the

employees at work. He is committed to maintain safe work environment and ensure

that the machinery and equipment in use are safe for the employees.

vii. Proper medical facilities will be available within the facility in case of emergencies.

viii. In the CER activities some free medical camps may be conducted at the

surrounding areas to check the health status of the people to get confirm that

whether their health is affected by any emission related reasons or any other

reasons. Also in turn the local people will be medically benefitted by the help of the

project authorities.

https://www.britannica.com/topic/public-health







ix. Adequate health education and information related to the job must be provided to

the workers. Baseline health information should be recorded for future references.

x. Tie up with the nearest hospitals will be done to meet the medical needs of the

plant workers.

4.3.10. Impact on Ecological Environment

4.3.10.1. Biological Impact Assessment Methodology

Impacts due to various project activities on biological components were identified by

following various steps as explained in following different sections. All biological

likely impacts have been assessed considering that, all operational / engineering

control suggested in EMP will be properly implemented.

Identification of Extent of Likely Impact Zone (LIZ) Area

Extent of LIZ area can be mapped through superimposing air pollution dispersion

model, noise dispersion model, drainage pattern on the project study area (Core Zone

+ Buffer Zone) map (toposheet or LULC map). Sometimes, in absence or

unavailability of above said details, extent of LIZ area can be considered around the

project boundary as suggested by EIA coordinator.

Identification of Likely Impacts

Likely impacts on the biological components have been identified on the basis of

activities and associated aspects involved in the different phases of project cycle and

various ecosystems or habitats falling in the identified LIZ area.

Scoring of Biological Consequences

The consequences due to impacts on various biological components have been

categorized into 5 levels ranging from insignificant to severe consequence and are

given in the following table. It consists of flora, fauna and habitat / ecosystem level

impacts.







Table 4.15: Biological Consequences Scoring Scheme

S. No Consequences

Score (CS)

Likely Impact Receiving Components (Ecosystem, habitat and Species

Level)

1.

Insignificant

Consequence

- 1 Score

Site specific clearing (removal) of common flora i.e. herbs, shrubs, grasses,

climbers.

Vegetation composition does not form a habitat character for any species of

conservation significance.

No short term or long term impacts are likely to adversely affect the

surrounding habitat / ecosystem.

Site specific disturbance to common / generalist faunal species (e.g.

movement pattern, displacement etc.).

No negative impacts on surrounding ecosystem functioning or habitat

ecology.

2.

Minor

Consequence

- 2 Score

Site specific loss (removal) of some common species of regenerating tree

saplings.

Minor temporary impacts on ecosystem functioning or habitat ecology of

common / generalist species.

Minor short term / long term impacts on surrounding / immediate / adjacent

habitats but are resilient to changes in habitat structure or condition.

Impact on surrounding agro-ecosystem / agriculture when environmental

data / parameters are within permissible limits.

3.

Moderate

Consequence

- 3 Score

Site specific clearing (removal) of some common well grown tree / trees

Site specific loss of nesting / breeding habitat of common / generalist

species of flora-fauna but will not result in permanent loss of habitat.

Short term or long term impacts having potential to affect adversely the

surrounding habitat character/ habitat ecology/ functioning of ecosystem.

Impact on surrounding agro-ecosystem / agriculture when physical

parameters with marginal increase but can be mitigated. Or likely

cumulative impact.

4. Major

Consequence

- 4 points

Site specific impact on threatened species but impacted species is widely

distributed outside the project site. Short term impacts may lead to loss of

abundance or extent, but unlikely to cause local population extinction.







S. No Consequences

Score (CS)

Likely Impact Receiving Components (Ecosystem, habitat and Species

Level)

Site specific habitat loss of fauna listed in IUCN, WCMC, Birdlife

International, or any other international literature - secondary information.

Impacts on habitats / ecosystems of international importance.

5.

Severe

Consequence

- 5 points

Impact on Notified areas / species having legal protection under various

acts / notifications including proposed areas / species or under

consideration. Species mentioned in BSI, Red Data Book, ZSI, or literature

published by any State Govt. Institute, University or Collage etc.

Quantifying the Probability of Occurrence of the Impact

After identifying the consequence severity, the possibility of occurrence also needs

to be estimated to visualize entire scenario of biological impact. Following table

provides probability / likelihood ratings on a scale of 1 to 5. These ratings are used

for estimating the likelihood of each occurrence.

Table 4.16: Occurrence Frequency Assessment

Description Occurrence Frequency Occurrence Frequency

Score (OFS)

Regular Definite / Constant / continuous event / each day 5

Frequent happen several times each year 4

Periodic May happen a few times each year 3

Occasional May happen few times during the project life cycle 2

Rare Rare / short term event during the project life cycle or

accidental / unintentional event 1

Quantifying Biological Impact

Biological Impact Score (BIS) is calculated by multiplying the Consequence Score

(CS) and the Occurrence Frequency Score (OFS) together. As a result,

{BIS = CS × OFS}







The final score is in relative point score, rather than actual impact. The impact

evaluation is carried out assuming an implementation of sound management

programmes to maintain healthy biological environment conditions. Also, helps to

frame mitigation measures for reducing the ecological impact and thereafter,

formulate effective Environmental Management Plans (EMPs).

Categorization of Intensity of Biological Impact

Biological impacts are categorized in to five levels from Insignificant to Extremely

Severe. Each level of impact needs different action to manage / control / supervise it

in proper way. Details are tabulated in the following table.

Table 4.17: Categorization of Biological Impacts

Score Biological

Impact Necessary Action

> 20 Extremely

Severe

Proposed project activity should not proceed in current form unless clearance /

approval / NOC (other than EC) from competent authorities (e.g. forest

clearance / wildlife clearance etc.).

11 to 20 Moderate

Severe

Operation subject to management by operational controls. Proposed activity

should be operated subject to strong management and strong operational

controls / or modification.

1 to 10 Less Severe No immediate action required unless escalation of risk is possible. Operation

subject to periodic monitoring / surveillance / observation.

4.3.10.2. Likely Impacts on Biological Environment

Identification of Extent of Likely Impact Zone (LIZ) Area

An area of 500 meter from the project site has been considered as a LIZ area to

identify impacting biological components. Accordingly, LIZ area includes

surrounding land, urban area and other industrial units.

Identification of Likely Impacts

Following impacts have been determined on the basis of the various project

activities, associated aspects involved in various stages of the project cycle, and







ecological setting / condition of the LIZ area. Details are given in the following

table.

Table 4.18: Identification of Likely Impacts

S. No. Proposed Project Activities Aspects Likely Impacts

1. Site Preparation Phase

1.1

Preparation of the site Uprooting of vegetation 1. Loss of floral diversity

2.Loss of habitat and

associated faunal

diversity

1.2

Movement of earth movers, heavy

vehicle / machinery & other

vehicles and workers during site

preparation.

Generation of noise&

vibration.

Generation of Dust

and emission of HC

& CO.

3. Disturbance to the fauna

/ faunal movement.

4. Impacts on the

surrounding habitats /

vegetation due to dust

deposition / gaseous

emissions.

2. Construction Phase

2.1

Plant construction & fabrication

work, influx of worker, etc.

Generation of noise&

vibration

1. Disturbance to normal

faunal movement

2.2

Dust from handling of construction

materials Dust emission

2. Dust deposition on

surrounding vegetation and

habitats.

3. Operation Phase

3.1

Operation of Incinerator and D.G.

Sets.

Release of NOx, SO2,

CO, TOC, Dioxins &

Furans, HCL, HF and

SPM etc.

1. Impact on surrounding

agriculture land, flora-

fauna and their habitats due

to gaseous emissions.

3.3

Cleaning, curing washing etc. which

contain suspended materials and

operation of ETP, Leachate storage

& handling

Generation of waste

water.

Generation of ruthless

odor

2. Contamination of

surrounding habitats

3. Impact on aesthetic

value of project area due to

spread of ruthless odor.







Quantifying Biological Impact

Impacts on the flora, fauna and habitats have assessed in the following table on the

basis of multiplication of Consequence Score (CS) and the Occurrence Frequency

Score (OFS) together.

Table 4.19: Biological Impact Scoring

S.

No. Likely Impact Description

Impact Scoring Remarks

CS OFS BIS


1.1

Impact-1:Loss of floral diversity

Impact-2: Loss of habitat and associated faunal

diversity.

The site is under notified industrial state of

UPSIDC which and possess common vegetation

which will be cleared. However trees will be

retained. Site does not form special habitat so there

is no threat of habitat loss also.

1 5 5 Less Severe

1.2.

Impact-3: Disturbance to the fauna / faunal

movement.

Since the project site recorded with common /

generalist faunal species which are common and

adapted to the normal routine urban activities.

These species will move adjacent similar habitats

during this phase. Therefore, no significant impact

on the normal faunal movement is expected.

1 5 5 Less Severe

1.3.

Impact-4: Impacts on the surrounding habitats /

vegetation due to dust deposition / gaseous

emissions.

Generation of dust and emission of HC & CO will

take place during this phase will be for short

1 1 1 Less Severe







S.



CS OFS BIS

duration and minor impacts will be site specific.

However, No negative impacts on surrounding

ecosystem functioning or habitat ecology are

expected.

2. Construction / Erection Phase

2.1.

Impact-5: Disturbance to the fauna / faunal

movement:

Site recorded with common faunal species which

are common component of the urban habitats and

well adapted to the routine urban activities. These

species will move adjacent similar habitats during

this phase.

1 5 5 Less Severe

2.2

Impact-6: Contamination of surrounding habitats

due to dust deposition.

This will be temporary phenomenon and will take

place during this phase will be for short duration

and minor impacts will be site specific. However,

No negative impacts on surrounding ecosystem

functioning or habitat ecology are expected.

1 1 1 Less Severe

3. Operational Phase

3.1.

Impact-7: Impact on surrounding agriculture land,

flora-fauna and their habitats due to gaseous

emissions.

Emissions of NOx, SO2, CO, TOC, Dioxins &

Furans, HCL, HF and SPM etc. having potential to

impact adversely on surrounding agriculture land

and other vegetation.

3 5 15

Moderate Severe

(considering presence

of agriculture are and

cumulative impacts of

industrial area)

3.2

Impact-8: Contamination of surrounding habitats

due to waste water. 1 1 1 Less Severe







S.



CS OFS BIS

This impact is not expected because treated water

from ETP will be reused for flushing and

horticulture activities.

3.3

Impact-9: Impact on aesthetic value of project area

due to spread of ruthless odor.

Ruthless odor is expected due to sludge storage &

handling. However, Dried sludge from the ETP will

be used as manure for horticulture development and

surplus manure will be sold to the farmers. Apart

from the operational control, odor suppressing

plants will be included in the greenbelt development

to mitigate this impact.

1 1 1 Less Severe


Considering above various impacts, apart from various operational / engineering

controls following mitigation measures will be implemented to improve / maintain

biological conditions of the project area environ. Detail description is given in the

following table.

Table 4.20: Likely Impacts and Mitigation Measures

Impact

S. No. Likely Impact Description Impact Justification and Mitigation Measures


1.1 Loss of floral diversity No trees will be uprooted. Greenbelt development will

provide habitat to the existing species in later stage.

Greenbelt will be developed with suitable species as

following CPCB guidelines. This greenbelt will serve as a

habitat for many local faunal species in later stage.

1.2.

Loss of habitat and

associated faunal diversity

1.3. Disturbance to the fauna /

faunal movement No specific mitigation measure required.







Impact

S. No.

Likely Impact Description Impact Justification and Mitigation Measures

2. Construction Phase



2.2.

Impact on surrounding

flora-fauna and their habitats

due to gaseous emissions

Apart from various operational / engineering control,

greenbelt will be developed by following CPCB guidelines

to mitigate this impact.



2.4.

Contamination of

surrounding habitats due to

dust deposition

No specific mitigation measure required. However,

operational control measure like sprinkling of water will be

required to suppress dust generation.

3. Operational Phase

3.1.

Impact on surrounding

agriculture land, flora-fauna

and their habitats due to

gaseous emissions.

Greenbelt will be developed using gas absorbing and fire

resistant species to reduce this impact. However, strong

Operational control will be required to mitigate gaseous

emissions. Additional plantation in the buffer zone area is

also recommended.

3.2.

Contamination of

surrounding habitats due to

waste water.

No specific mitigation measure required since no waste

water will be released in the surrounding environment.

3.3.

Impact on aesthetic value of

project area due to spread of

ruthless odor.

Apart from engineering control, some odor suppressing

(fragrant plants) plant species will be included in the inter-

spaces of greenbelt to mitigate this impact.

4.3.11. Conservation Plan for Schedule-I and Threatened Species

Since the buffer zone of the project area reported with Schedule-I & threatened

species like Peacock and Sarus Crane. This conservation plan is suggested to enhance







the biodiversity status of the study area which will be implemented in consultation of

“State forest department” to improve biodiversity status of the project study area.

Impact Zone Description

Likely impact zone consists of agriculture land, waste land and urban habitats.

Selection of Plant Species

Facts considered during selection of plant species for greenbelt development are:

Type of pollutant (mainly air) likely to disperse from project activities.

Adaptability of plant species to the local environment

Biological–filter Efficiency: Absorption of gases, Dust capturing

Plantation of threatened species to improve its population status in the study area.

4.3.11.1. Habitat Improvement through Plantation in Impact Zone

In identified impact zone around project site, plantation will be carried out at four

levels

1. Plantation Agriculture hedges

2. Plantation in public places

3. Plantation along roadside.

Table 4.21: List of plant species for Plantation in Impact Zone

S. No Scientific Name Common Name Ecological performance

1 Aegle marmelos Bel CN, DC

2 Azardirachta indica Neem CN, OGE, DC

3 Butea monosperma Palas CN, OGE, DC

4 Delbergia sissoo Shisham DC, DR, FR

5 Delonix regia Gulmohar DC

6 Ficus bengalensis Banyan, Vad CN, DC

7 Ficus religiosa Peepal CN, OGE, DC







8 Syzygium cumini Jamun, Jambu CN, DC

9 Tamarindus indica Emali CN, OGE, DC

10 Terminalia catappa Desi Badam CN, OGE, DC

11 Terminalia arjuna Arjun CN, OGE, DC

4.3.11.2. Budget Allocation for Habitat Improvement Programme

Following budget is allocated for additional greenbelt and conservation of threatened

species of the study area.

Table 4.22: Budget for Additional Greenbelt and Biodiversity Conservation

S.

No Activity 1

st year 2

nd year 3

rd year 4

th year 5

th year

Budget

(INR)

1 Plantation on agriculture hedges: 100 plants will be planted every year up to five years (Approx.

Cost @ Rs. 100 per plant)

Saplings Required 100 100 100 100 100 50,000/-

Amount 10000 10000 10000 10000 10000

2 Plantation along surrounding road connecting to site: 100 plants every year up to five years

(Approx. Cost @ Rs. 100 per plant)


Amount 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000

3 Plantation near public places: 100 sapling every year up to five years (Approx. Cost @ Rs. 100 per

plant)


Amount 5000 5000 5000 5000 5000

Total Budget 1,00,000/-

4.3.11.3. Biodiversity / Ecological Monitoring

Since the identified impact zone area encompasses agriculture area and also supports

species of conservation significance (Schedule-I and Endangered species) i.e.







Peacock and Sarus Crane, population of these species will be monitored. Every year,

status survey of these species will be conducted and report will be submitted to the

local forest department. Periodical crop health monitoring by horticulture expert is

also recommended.

*******



Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter V

Chapter V

Analysis of Alternative Site

and Technology



Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter V

Project: Common Hazardous Waste Incinerator & Other waste treatment facility at UPSIDC, Sikandrabad

Industrial Area, District Bulandshahr, Uttar Pradesh

Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter V: Analysis of Alternative site & technology

Gaurang Environmental Solutions Pvt. Ltd Page 5.1

Report Ref: GESPL/SWMP/EIA/258 Rev No. 01

Chapter V

Analysis of Alternative Site and Technology

5.1 Introduction

The identification of alternatives forming part of the EIA process, inter alia pursues

the legal principle of best practicable environmental options and by implication to

minimize the effect of the generation of waste on the environment.

The proposed common facility will have Hazardous Waste incinerator (10 MT/day),

E-Waste dismantling & segregation (10 MT/day) and recycling/reconditioning of

discarded containers (10 MT/day). In addition to the above, an Effluent Treatment

Plant of capacity 7.0 KLD & provisions for temporary and long term storages for

waste have been proposed. The proposed site will be guided under the Hazardous &

Other Waste (Management & Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016, E-Waste

Management Rules, 2016 & guidelines of CPCB.

5.2. Site Selection

For waste incineration, the local factors to be taken into account may, amongst others,

include:

Local environmental drivers, for example background environmental quality may

influence the required local performance in respect of releases from the installation, or

availability of certain resources;

The particular nature of the waste(s) that arise locally and the impact of the waste

management infrastructure upon the type and nature of waste arriving at the

installation;






The cost and technical possibility of implementing a particular technique in relation to

its potential advantages – this is of particular relevance when considering the

performance of existing installations;

The availability, degree of utilization and price of options for the recovery and

disposal of residues produced at the installation;

The availability of users and price received for recovered energy;

Local economic, market and political factors that may influence the tolerability of the

higher gate fees that may accompany the addition of certain technological options.

The site has been selected in view of providing infrastructure for treatment and safe

disposal of Hazardous Waste, E-Waste & discarded containers generated from various

industries. No site alternatives were analysed as the site located in UPSIDC

Sikandrabad Industrial Area, fulfills the requirements for the proposed project.

The Industrial area where the upcoming facility is proposed has various industries of

paints, printing & dyeing, automobiles, sugar, pesticides etc. These industries

generates considerable amount of incinerable Hazardous Wastes, E-Waste & generates

significant amount of discarded containers which can be recycled/reconditioned.

In view of the above, the selected location for the proposed project has been deemed

appropriate.

The Site location has the following advantages

Site is located in a notified Industrial Area.

Easy availability of infrastructure such as water and power.

Well connected by Road & Rail.

Industries can avail the benefit of proposed common waste treatment facility for

disposal of their incinerable hazardous waste, e-waste & discarded containers.

5.3. Technology Alternatives

The most common combustion technology in hazardous waste incineration is the

rotary kiln. Hazardous waste incineration offers the benefits of

Destruction of organic (including toxic) materials,






Volume reduction

Reduction in concentration of pollutants into relatively small quantities of ashes;

and,

Less frequently, energy recovery.

For the incineration of hazardous waste, rotary kilns are most commonly used but

grate incinerators (including co-firing with other wastes) are also sometimes applied to

solid wastes, and fluidized bed incinerators to some pretreated materials. Static

furnaces are also widely applied at on-site facilities at chemical plants.

It should be noted that technologies develop continuously, particularly as it relates to

waste management. The technology of treatment of hazardous waste to be adopted in

proposed project is thermal destruction based on Incinerator technology involving

combustion & oxidation of waste at suitable high temperatures in primary &

secondary combustion chambers followed by Quenching for control of dioxins

followed by Air Pollution Control Equipments like Cyclone separator, bag house/ESP,

Venturi Scrubber, Packed Bed Scrubber, HEPA filter leading to ID fan and Stack.

Thus a complete treatment system for burning of wastes including series of air

pollution control equipments for control of emissions to atmosphere to have a

complete process control. The entire system will be automated and controlled by

online measurements and monitoring system.

Table 5.1: Comparison between the different technologies of Incinerator

S. No Performance

Parameter

Moving Grate Fluidized Bed Rotary Kiln

1. Pros Adequate tender competition

Larger unit capacity

less land requirement

Relatively robust for mixed

MSW treatment

No requirement of pre-

treatment

More intense heat

and mass transfer

Minimal

mechanical

moveable parts

Less wearing and

lower relevant

Long retention

time

Favorable to treat

hazardous waste

Flexible in

feedstock e.g.,

solid and liquid






O&M costs wastes

2.

Cons Excess air requirement

Higher flue gas volume

High ash production

Limited track

record for mixed

MSW application

Smaller unit

capacity

larger land

requirement

Requirement of

pre-treatment

Less robust for

mixed MSW

treatment

Limited track

record for mixed

MSW application/

a supplier key

retreated from

market

High O&M costs

due to technical

problems

encountered for

mixed MSW

treatment such as

erosion of the

refractory

materials, plastics

deposition and

clinkering

Smaller unit

capacity

Larger land

requirement

Less robust for

mixed MSW

treatment

For hazardous waste, possible alternatives to incineration include:

Waste minimization and source separation with final disposal by other techniques

or to appropriate landfill;

Gas phase chemical reduction;

Base catalysed decomposition;






Sodium reduction;

Supercritical water oxidation

M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project has proposed to install a Rotary Kiln based

Incinerator with wet scrubbing based Air Pollution Control System for its proposed

hazardous waste treatment facility.

*******



Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter VI

Chapter VI

Environment Monitoring Program



Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter VI: Environmental Monitoring Programme



Chapter VI

Environment Monitoring Program

6.0 Introduction

This chapter presents the details of environmental monitoring, schedule, institutional

arrangements for pollution control, cost for environmental protection measures and

details of greenbelt development for the proposed project.

6.1. Environment Monitoring

Regular monitoring of the various environmental parameters is necessary to evaluate

the effectiveness of the management programme so that the necessary corrective

measures can be taken in case there are some drawbacks in the proposed programme.

Since environmental quality parameters at work zone and surrounding area are

important for maintaining sound operating practices of the project in conformity with

environmental regulations, the post project monitoring work forms part of

Environmental Monitoring Program. Environmental Monitoring Program will be

implemented once the project activity commences.

Environmental Monitoring Program includes:

1) Environmental surveillance

2) Analysis and interpretation of data

3) Preparation of reports to support environmental management system and

4) Organizational set up responsible for the implementation of the programme.

Environmental Monitoring will be taken up for various environmental components as

per conditions stipulated in Environmental Clearance Letter issued by MoEF&CC and






Consent to Operate issued by the Uttar Pradesh State Pollution Control Board.

Compliance of same will be submitted to respective authorities on regular basis.

The main objectives of environmental monitoring are:

To assess the change in the environmental conditions;

To monitor the effective implementation of mitigation measures;

To facilitate compliance with applicable acts, regulations and guidelines;

To recognize that social responsibility and environmental management are

among the highest corporate priorities;

To assign clear accountability and responsibility for environmental protection and

social responsibility to management and employees;

To facilitate environmental and social planning throughout the project life cycle;

To provide a process for achieving targeted performance levels;

To provide appropriate and sufficient resources, including training, to achieve

targeted performance levels on an on-going basis; and

Evaluate environmental performance and social responsibility for M/s Sheetala

Waste Management Project, environmental and other policies, objectives and

targets and seek improvement where appropriate.

The attributes, which merit regular monitoring, are specified underneath:

Air quality;

Water and wastewater quality;

Noise levels;

Soil quality; and

Ecological preservation and plantation.

The post project monitoring to be carried out at the industry level is discussed below:

6.1.1. Monitoring and Reporting Procedure

Regular monitoring of important and crucial environmental parameters is of immense

importance to assess the status of environment during plants operation. With the






knowledge of baseline conditions, the monitoring programme can serve as an

indicator for any deterioration in environmental conditions due to operation of the

plants and suitable mitigatory steps could be taken in time to safeguard the

environment. Monitoring is as important as that of control of pollution since the

efficiency of control measures can only be determined by monitoring. The following

routine monitoring programme would therefore be implemented.

Air Pollution and Meteorological Aspects

Air quality monitoring shall be done as per CPCB guidelines & as specified by SPCB

in their consents

Ambient Air Quality shall be monitored at four to six locations in line with the

guidelines of CPCB at upwind, downwind and at least three stations at 1200 angle

around the hazardous waste incinerator facility for PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx, CO,

Total Volatile Organic Compounds (VOCs) & Polycyclic aromatic Hydrocarbons

(PAH).

Stack Gaseous Emission from Incinerator: Periodical monitoring of parameters

as stipulated under the gaseous emission norms notified under the Environment

(Protection) Fifth Amendment Rules, 2008.

On line continuous stack emissions monitoring shall be carried out for parameters

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx, CO & HCl. In addition, flow rate, temperature, velocity

shall also be monitored for better interpretation of the results;

Automatic weather monitoring shall be installed within the plant premises. The

frequency of monitoring shall be one hourly. The parameters shall include wind

speed, wind direction, temperature, relative humidity, atmospheric pressure,

rainfall, evaporation rate, solar radiation and cloud cover.






Water and Wastewater Quality

Regular monitoring of Ground Water Quality for any contamination due to the

project activity will be done upto a distance of 5 km from the project location. If

no open wells or tube wells are available, action needs to be taken to provide at

least four monitoring wells (piezometric) around the project site i.e. one on up

gradient of the ground water flow and other three on the down gradient side of the

ground water flow at least upto first layer aquifer.

The ground water flow direction has to be ascertained periodically (in

consultation with State Ground Water Board) and reported at least once in three

years.

Monitoring of inlet and outlet of ETP treated water of parameters specified by

PCB in their consents

Monitoring of surface water (nullah, river, impoundments) at upstream &

downstream and in adjoining area will be done & monitoring report submitted

periodically as per guidelines.

Noise Levels

Noise levels in the work zone environment at incinerator, E-Waste dismantling &

segregation and recycling/reconditioning of discarded containers and effluent

treatment plant will be monitored. The frequency will be once in three months in the

work zone. Similarly, ambient noise levels at four locations in the surroundings will

be monitored on a seasonal basis.

Soil Quality

Soil quality will be monitored as per guidelines upto a radius of 500 m from the centre

of the project site. The parameters will include physico-chemical parameters and

heavy metals.

The environmental monitoring cell will co-ordinate all monitoring programmes at site

and data thus generated will be regularly furnished to the State regulatory agencies






and to the Regional office of MoEF&CC. The monitoring schedule is presented in

Table 6.1.

The monitoring results provide the basis for auditing, i.e. to identify unexpected

changes. The monitoring program will be as given in following sections.

6.1.1.1. Operation Phase

During operational stage period air emissions from incinerator, DG set and other

process if any, wastewater characteristics, ash generation quantity, etc. will be

monitored. The following attributes which merit regular monitoring based on the

environmental setting and nature of project activities are listed below:

Point Source emissions and ambient air quality;

Groundwater levels and ground water quality;

Water & wastewater quality & quantity;

Solid waste characterization;

Soil quality;

Noise levels (equipment and machinery noise levels, occupational exposures

ambient noise levels); and

Ecological preservation and plantation

The generic environmental measures that need to be undertaken during project

operation stage are given in the following table:

Table 6.1: Environmental Monitoring Program

S.

No.

Potential

Impact

Action to be

Followed

Parameters for

Monitoring

Frequency of

Monitoring

1. Air

Emissions

Stack emissions from Incinerator Particulate matter, VOCs,

HF, Total dioxins &

furans,

Cd & Th + their

compounds,

Quarterly monitoring

or as prescribed by

SPCB






S.

No.

Potential

Impact

Action to be

Followed

Parameters for

Monitoring

Frequency of

Monitoring

Hg & it’s compounds,

Sb + As + Pb + Co + Cr +

Cu + Mn + Ni + V + their

compounds

SO2, NOX (NO & NO2

expressed as NO2), HCl &

CO

Continuous

Monitoring using on-

line monitoring system

Stack emissions from DG sets. PM, SO2, NOx, CO, HC

Twice in a year or as

prescribed by SPCB

AAQ within the project premises

and adjacent areas (upwind,

downwind & 3 places at 120º

angle) to be monitored.

All vehicles to be PUC

certificate.

Vehicle logs to be maintained.

NAAQ Standards

Twice a week, 24

hourly

(minimum 104

measurements as per

NAAQS)

Additional Parameters:

VOCs, PAH

Twice in a year or as

prescribed by SPCB

Meteorological data Wind speed, direction,

temp., relative humidity

and rainfall.

Twice in a year

2. Noise Noise generated from

operation of incinerator, DG set etc

to be monitored

Spot Noise Level

recording;

Periodical during

operation phase;

Once in month

or as prescribed by

SPCB

3. Waste water

(Effluent

Treatment

Plant)

Compliance to wastewater

discharge standards

pH, SS ,Oil & Grease ,

BOD, COD, Bio-assay

test

(Heavy metals if required)

Daily at regular

Intervals






S.

No.

Potential

Impact

Action to be

Followed

Parameters for

Monitoring

Frequency of

Monitoring

4.

Hazardous

waste

generation,

storage,

disposal

Compliance to HOW Rules 2016.

Keep record of hazardous waste

generation, storage, pre

processing, treatment and

disposal.

Maintain transportation record

including Date, Manifest number,

Disposal quantity,

type of waste, category, type of

transportation vehicle, vehicle

number etc.

Ensure all the containers of waste

sent for disposal have proper

labels as specified in

HOW Rules 2016

Prepare and submit annual return

of Hazardous waste

to SPCB

Quality & quantity

monitoring

Periodically /

CPCB norms or as

prescribed by SPCB

Hazardous

Waste

Analysis

Ash from

Incinerator

5. Ground water

quality

Monitoring ground water quality

upto a distance of 5 km from the

project location

Comprehensive

monitoring as per IS

10500

Groundwater level BGL

Quarterly as per CPCB

guidelines or as

prescribed by SPCB

Ground water flow

direction

Once in three years as

per CPCB guidelines

6. Surface water

quality

Monitoring surface water quality

in adjoining area of project site

Sampling of benthal deposit of

stream upto a distance of 500 m

Parameters: pH, Colour,

EC, Turbidity, SS, TDS,

TOC, DO, BOD, COD,

heavy metals, Fe, CN, F,

Quarterly as per CPCB

guidelines or as

prescribed by SPCB






S.

No.

Potential

Impact

Action to be

Followed

Parameters for

Monitoring

Frequency of

Monitoring

from the project site. As, and Mn, Cl, NO3,

SO4, TKN, Total

Alkalinity, Total

hardness.

6. Flora &

Fauna

Vegetation, greenbelt /

green cover development

Number of plants, species Once a year or as

prescribed by SPCB

7. Soil Quality Checking & maintenance of good

soil quality upto a radius of 500 m

from the centre of the project site.

Physico-chemical

Parameters, PAH, heavy

metals and CN, F, As and

Mn

Once a year

(pre-monsoon)

8. Health Employees and migrant labour

health check ups

All relevant parameters

(BP, Sugar, chest X-ray,

Eye vision, etc.)

Regular checkups as

per rules & guidelines

Source: Protocol for Performance Evaluation and Monitoring of the Common Hazardous Waste Treatment

Storage and Disposal Facilities including Common Hazardous Waste Incinerators

6.1.2. Implementation Schedule of Mitigation Measures

The mitigation measures as delineated will be implemented so as to reduce the impact

on environment due to the operations of the proposed plant. In order to facilitate easy

implementation, mitigation measures are phased as per the priority implementation as

given in Table 6.2.

Table 6.2: Implementation Schedule

S. No. Recommendations Time Requirement (Months) Immediate Progressive

1. Air pollution control

Measures

Before commissioning of

respective units

* --

2. Water Pollution Control

Measures

Before commissioning of the

plant

* --






S. No. Recommendations Time Requirement (Months) Immediate Progressive

3. Noise Control Measures Along with the commissioning

of the plant

* --

4. Ecological Preservation and

Upgradation

Stage-wise implementation * *

Note (*) indicates implementation of recommendations

6.1.3. Monitoring Schedule – Operation Phase

Regular Monitoring of all the environmental parameters viz, air, water, noise and soil

as per the formulated program based on CPCB and MoEF&CC guidelines will be

carried out in order to detect any changes from the baseline status in the environment.

Table 6.3: Monitoring Schedule

S. No. Description Schedule of Monitoring

1. Air Quality Quarterly except Monsoon season

2. Water Quality

(Surface Water & Ground Water) Quarterly except Monsoon season

3. Noise Level Six monthly

4. Soil Quality Once in a year (pre-monsoon)

5. Socio-economic Condition Once in 5 Years

6. Plantation Monitoring Once in a year

6.1.4. Pollution Monitoring Facilities

Incinerator stack, DG set stack will have provisions of platform and port hold to stack

sampling meeting MoEF&CC standards with necessary power supply point.

Environmental laboratory will have equipment/instruments to analyze air and

wastewater parameters.






6.1.5. Pollution Monitoring Reporting

It is proposed that voluntary reporting of environmental performance with reference

to the EMP will be undertaken. The environmental monitoring cell will co-ordinate all

monitoring programs at site and data thus generated will be regularly furnished to the

State regulatory agencies. The frequency of reporting will be on six monthly basis to

the Uttar Pradesh SPCB officials and to Regional office of MoEF&CC. The

Environmental Audit reports will be prepared for the entire year of operations and

regularly submitted to regulatory authorities.

*******



Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter VII

Chapter VII

Additional Studies



Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter-VII: Additional Studies



Chapter-VII: Additional Studies

7.1. Introduction

Industrial activities including process, production, storage, handling, transportation

and operational practices presents levels of hazards to workforce, population and

environment at large due to accidents, spills, leaks etc. These accidents results in

personal and financial loss. The assessment of the threat posed, its control and

prevention through good design, management and operational controls is of primal

importance. Events like the Bhopal tragedy have emphasized the need to address both

on-site and off-site safety. It is against this background that the various Section and

Rules under the Environment Protection Act, 1986, the Factories Act, 1948 and other

Acts specify the requirements for a safe and reliable working of an industry. These

require carrying out various studies and analysis to assess and mitigate hazards

prevalent in the industry in line with the above goal of safe and reliable working.

These are more commonly known as “Risk Assessment Studies”. Risk assessment

refers to the technical, scientific assessment of the nature and magnitude of risk and

uses a factual base to define the health effects of exposure of individuals or

populations or ecological receptors to hazardous contaminants and situations.

This chapter explains the basis of Risk Assessment and its objectives.

7.2. Public Consultation

The proposed project is exempted from Public hearing as per point no. 7 of the ToR

prescribed to the project and para 7(i) III stage (3)(i)(b) of EIA notification, 2006, for

preparation of EIA/EMP report, being site is located in UPSIDC, Sikandrabad

Industrial Area (Annexure I). The project activities will be carried out as per

Environment Protection Act & Rules & EIA notification, 2006.






7.3. Risk Assessment

Industrial accidents results in great personal and financial loss. Managing these

accidental risks in today’s environment is the concern of every industry including

TSDFs, because either real or perceived incidents can quickly jeopardize the financial

viability of a business. Many facilities involve various manufacturing processes that

have the potential for accidents which may be catastrophic to the plant, work force,

environment, or public.

The main objective of risk assessment study is to propose a comprehensive but simple

approach to carry out risk analysis and conducting feasibility studies for industries and

planning and management of industrial prototype hazard analysis study.

7.1.1. Risk analysis

Risk analysis deals with identification and computation of consequence and risks.

Risk analysis follows an extensive hazard analysis. This requires a thorough

knowledge of probability of failure, credible accident scenario, vulnerability of

population to exposure etc. Much of this information is difficult to get or generate.

Consequently, the risk analysis is often confined to maximum credible accident

scenarios. It provides basis for preparation of on-site and off-site emergency plan

and also to incorporate safety measures.

7.1.2. Hazard Identification

Identification of hazards in the proposed project is of primary significance of the

analysis, and quantification of risk hazard indicates the characteristics of hazardous

wastes that pose potential for an emergency situation in the event of spillage and

accidental release of hazardous wastes from the site.

All the components of a system/plant/process need to be thoroughly examined to

assess their potential for initiating or propagating an unplanned event/sequence of

events, which can be termed as an accident.

Types of hazardous waste (solid & liquid):






Flammable wastes

Corrosive Wastes

Reactive wastes

Toxic wastes

Hazard Identification is a critical step in Risk Analysis. A classical definition of

hazard states that hazard is in fact the characteristic of system/plant/process that

presents potential for an accident. Hence all the components of a

system/plant/process need to be thoroughly examined in order to assess their

potential for initiating or propagating an unplanned event/sequence of events, which

can be termed as an accident.

In Risk Analysis terminology a hazard is something with the potential to cause

harm. Hence the Hazard Identification step is an exercise that seeks to identify what

can go wrong at the major hazard installation or process in such a way that people

may be harmed. The output of this step is a list of events that need to be passed on

to later steps for further analysis.

7.4. Responsibilities of the facility operator:

Accepting hazardous wastes at the unit from the generators authorized by

SPCB/PCC.

Establishing a system for optimal movement of hazardous wastes transportation,

treatment and disposal operations, this may include resource recovery/recycling as

the case may be.

Fingerprinting analysis to confirm the wastes shall be the responsibility of the

operator

Operating the unit as per conditions stipulated in the authorization

Ensuring waste treatment and/or disposal as per Hazardous and Other Wastes

(Management and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016, as amended

Undertake cleanup operation in case of contamination resulting from the unit.

Abatement of pollution and the odour arising out of the unit operations






Compliance of regulations concerning occupational safety and health of the unit

employees

In the event, there are differences in the analysis results, the generator may either

accept the results of operator or send their samples to a mutually agreed third

party analysis at their own cost.

7.5. Storage and handling of hazardous materials

Both hazardous and non-hazardous materials generated within the manufacturing

units in the project facility shall be temporarily accommodated in designated storage

units within the project facility built/made in line with the safety, health and

environmental standards.

7.6. Storage area (storage shed)

Huge quantum of incinerable hazardous wastes (organic wastes) will not be kept

haphazardly without any labeling at the location/proposed location of incinerators.

Automatic smoke, heat detection system will be provided in the sheds. Adequate

fire fighting systems will be provided for the storage area, along with the areas in

the facility.

In storage of wastes, general criteria for compatibility of selected waste will be

followed while storing or mixing of incinerable wastes to optimise the feed,

compatibility of wastes will be considered and tested

Flammable, ignitable, reactive and incompatible wastes will be stored separately

and never should be stored in the same storage shed

Storage area shall consist of different sheds for storing different kinds of

incinerable hazardous wastes and sheds will be provided with suitable openings

Adequate storage capacity (i.e. 50 % of the annual capacity of the hazardous

waste incinerator) will be provided in the premises

Storage area will be designed to withstand the load of material stocked and any

damage from the material spillage






Storage area will be provided with the flameproof electrical fittings and it will be

strictly adhered to

There will be at least 15 m distance between the storage sheds

Loading and unloading of wastes in storage sheds will be done under the

supervision of the well trained and experienced staff only.

Fire break of at least 04 meter between two blocks of stacked drums will be

provided in the storage shed. Storage capacity of one block of drum will not

exceed 300 MT.

Minimum of 1 m clear space will be left between two adjacent rows of drums in

pair for inspection.

The storage and handling will have at least two routes to escape in the event of

any fire in the area

Doors and approaches of the storage area will be of suitable sizes for entry of fork

lift and fire fighting equipment

The exhaust of the vehicles used for the purpose of handling, lifting and

transportation within the facility such as forklifts or trucks will be fitted with the

approved type of spark arrester

In order to have appropriate measures to prevent percolation of spills, leaks, etc. to

the soil and ground water, the storage area will be provided with concrete floor or

steel sheet depending on the characteristics of waste handled and the floor will be

structurally sound and chemically compatible with wastes.

Measures will be taken to prevent entry of runoff into the storage area

The storage area will be designed in such a way that the floor level is at least 150

mm above the maximum flood level.

Floor in the storage area will be provided with secondary containment such as

proper slopes as well as collection pit so as to collect wash water and the

leakages/spills, etc.

All the storage yards will be provided with proper peripheral drainage system

connected with the sump in order to collect accidental spills, if any, on roads or

within the storage yards as well as any accidental flow due to fire fighting.






7.7. Storage drums/containers

The container will be made or lined with suitable material, which will not react

with, or in other words compatible with the hazardous wastes proposed to be

stored.

The stacking of drums in the storage area will be restricted to three high on pallets

(wooden frames). Necessary precautionary measures will be taken so as to avoid

stack collapse. However, for waste having flash point less than 65.5 OC, the

drums should not be stacked more than one height.

No drums will be opened in the storage sheds for sampling, etc., and such activity

should be done in designated places out side the storage areas

Drums containing wastes stored in the storage area will be labeled properly

indicating mainly type, quantity, characteristics, source and date of storing, etc.

7.8. Spillage/leakage control measures

The storage areas will be inspected daily for detecting signs of leaks or

deterioration, if any. Leaking or deteriorated containers will be removed and

ensured that such contents are transferred to a sound container

In case of spills/leaks, dry adsorbents/cotton will be used for cleaning instead of

water.

Proper slope with collection pits will be provided in the storage area in order to

collect the spills/leakages.

Storage areas will be provided with adequate number of spill kits at suitable

locations. The spill kits will be provided with compatible sorbent material in

adequate quantity.






7.9. Thermal Radiation Hazards

Thermal radiation hazards result from the ignition and subsequent burning of either a

flammable liquid or flammable gas. The severity of the hazard is a function of the

flame size, heat flux and exposure time. There are two concerns with thermal

radiation, namely its impact on humans and the potential for the development of

secondary fires. Table below summarizes the risk to humans and the limiting flux for

secondary fires.

Table 7.1: Potential Hazards of Exposure to Thermal Radiation

Heat Flux (Q) kW m-2 Time (t) Effects

4 15-18 s Limiting "safe" flux for humans.

Threshold of pain and for 2nd degree

burns

6.5 ~ 20 s Blistering of skin

8.5 ~ 15 s Blistering of skin

11 ~ 10 s Blistering of skin

20 ~ 5 s Blistering of skin

12.6 ~ 40 s Limiting flux for secondary fires. Pilot

ignition of wood, plastics, etc

37.8 ~ 1000 s Hazard to metal tanks

(Source, adopted from HSE, 1981)

7.9.1. Effects of Pressure/Blast Waves

During operational phase of incinerator, possibility of blast of incinerator cannot be

completely denied. The effects of over pressurization generated in a blast can

adversely affect either people or structures. Exposure of the body to shock over

pressurization from a sudden release of gas at high pressure can produce traumatic

effects. The degree of damage depends on both the pressure level and the area of the

body exposure. Humans are reasonably resilient to over pressure from explosions,

with a peak over pressurization of 34 kPa being the threshold of eardrum damage,

69 kPa being the threshold of lung damage (HSE, 1981). At higher pressure levels






death results, the probability of which is expressed in the probit equation (Eisenberg

1975):

Y = - 77.1+ 6.91 ln(Po)

where:

Y = is the probit

Po = over pressurization (Pa)

The probit equation can be converted to tabular form shown in Table below.

Table 7.2: Effect of Overpressure

Peak Overpressure (kPa) Probability of Death

100 0.01

120 0.1

140 0.5

175 0.9

200 0.99

Source: Eisenberg, N.A. 1975. NTIS Report AD-A015-245, Springfield, VA

At lower over-pressures, human effects will be associated with casualties resulting

from structural damage. The effects of peak over-pressure on structures are

summarized in table below, along with a casualty estimate (%C - the percentage of

people becoming casualties, including fatalities) associated with each type of

structural damage.

Table 7.3: Potential Hazards of Over Pressurization

Peak Over Pressurization

(kPa)

%C Structural Damage

<7 - Window Breakage

7 – 12 10 Walls Collapse

21 – 34 25 Reinforced structures distort.

Unpressurized storage tanks fail

34 – 48 70 Plant items overturn

>48 95 Extensive Damage






7.9.2. Safeguards Taken in Design Stage

Safety shall be given prime importance in the design of the incinerator. Right from

the layout of the plant to the selection of the material of construction of the

equipments, care shall be taken to incorporate safety considerations. The following

would be some of the safety considerations in the design.

All the waste handling vehicles in the plant premises shall be provided with

spark arresters at the exhaust

Emergency dump stack shall be provided next to the secondary chamber, in

order to vent out the gases by passing the subsequent systems in case of

emergency

Provision of standby arrangement for all critical equipments and pumps

Provision of standby ID fan

The main feature of the facility is the safe design of the equipment and pipelines.

Equipment is designed, inspected stage wise, tested and certified by an independent

third party in accordance with relevant codes and standards. Intrinsic safety is

largely built in into the design itself through use of time tested standards and codes,

which inherently incorporate a good margin of safety. Apart from the equipment

design and selection (only well known, reputed vendors with proven safe and

trouble free track record in similar service will be selected), there are other features

related to safety in the layout, operation, and shutdown systems etc. that are

provided.

Fire fighting system: A fire hydrant system is proposed to be laid that shall cover

the entire plant area. MS C class pipes will be used for laying the system. All

accessories such as valves, hose boxes, hose pipes, nozzles, single/double hydrants,

foam monitors and pumps will be complying to their respective IS standards. Pump

room will be nearer to water storage tank which has capacity of 200m3 for water

storage. The capacity of water storage tank is considered in such a way as to suffice






pumping for 1.5 hours by main electric/diesel pump (Flow: 137 m3/hr). Proposed

layout for firefighting system is provided in the figure below.

Pumps: Pumping sets shall be multi stage horizontal centrifugal single outlet with

cast iron body and bronze dynamically balanced impellers connecting shaft shall be

stainless steel with bronze sleeve and grease lubricated bearings. Pumps shall be

connected to the drive by means of spacer type love joy couplings, which shall be

individually balanced dynamically and statically. The coupling joining the prime

movers with the pump shall be provided with a sheet metal guard. Pumps shall be

provided with approved type of mechanical seals. Pumps shall be capable of

delivering not less than 150% of the rated capacity of water at a head of not less

than 65% of the rated head. The shut off head shall not exceed 120% of the rated

head.

Table 7.4: Details of Pumps

Sr. No Pumps Capacity

1. Electric Driven Pump Flow: 137 m3/hr, Head: 70 Meter

2. Diesel Driven Pump Flow:137 m3/hr, Head: 70 Meter

3. Jockey Pump Flow: 10 m3/hr, Head: 70 Meter

Along with the above measures provided both in design and operational phase for

control of risk due to proposed activities, GMB will ensure through its operator that

probability of risk will be avoided if not then minimized through proper

management of the facility.

7.9.3. Risk due to adjacent settlement

The proposed project is located in an industrial area. The unit is surrounded by

vacant plots on both left and right sides; however a shed is present on the right side

of the plot. There is a similar kind of industry at the opposite side of the unit on the






other side of the road. Risks associated with operational phase of incinerator also

include spillage of hazardous waste during transportation if the vehicle carrying

waste meets with an accident. Suitable safety measures are taken to address possible

risk during operational stage of incinerator i.e. safeguards taken during design stage,

management of hazardous waste during transportation, handling and storage, GPS

tracking of all the vehicles involved in transportation of hazardous waste so that

during emergency situation respective vehicle can be tracked and necessary actions

are taken to control the emergency situation.

7.10. Disaster Management Plan

Emergency prevention through good design, operation, maintenance and inspection

are essential to reduce the probability of occurrence and consequential effect of such

eventualities. However, it is not possible to totally eliminate such eventualities and

random failures of equipment or human errors, omissions and unsafe acts cannot be

ruled out. An essential part of major hazard control has therefore, to be concerned

with mitigating the effects of such Emergency and restoration of normalcy at the

earliest.

Disaster is a catastrophic situation in which the day-today patterns of life are, in many

instances, suddenly disrupted and people are plunged into helplessness and suffering

and as a result the need for clothing, shelter, medical and social care and other

necessities of life will be of paramount importance.

The disasters such as:

Disasters resulting from the natural phenomena like earthquakes, volcanic

eruptions, storms, surges, cyclones, tropical storms, floods, landslides, forest fires

and massive insect manifestation. Also in this group, violent draught will cause a

creeping disaster leading to feminine, disease and death must be included

Second group includes disastrous events occasioned by man or by man’s impact

upon the environment such as armed conflict, industrial accidents, factory fires,






explosions and escape of toxic gases or chemical substances, river pollution,

mining or other structural collapses, air, sea, rail and road transport accidents,

aircraft crashes, collisions of vehicles carrying flammable materials, oil spills at

sea and dam failures

The overall objective of a disaster management plan is to make use of the combined

resources at the site and outside services to achieve the following:

To localize the emergency and if possible eliminate it;

To minimize the effects of the accident on people and property;

Effect the rescue and medical treatment of casualties;

Safeguard other people;

Evacuate people to safe areas;

Informing and collaborating with statutory authorities;

Provide authoritative information to news media;

Initially contain and ultimately bring the incident under control;

Preserve relevant records and equipment for the subsequent enquiry into the cause

and circumstances of the emergency;

Investigating and taking steps to prevent reoccurrence

The DMP has therefore to be related to the identification of sources from which

hazards can arise and the maximum credible loss scenario that can take place in the

concerned area. The plan takes into account the maximum credible loss scenario -

actions that can successfully mitigate the effects of losses/ Emergency need to be well

planned so as they would require less effort and resources to control and terminate

emergencies, should the same occur.






7.10.1. Emergency Equipment

The site controller will maintain a list of emergency handling equipment including

details of fire extinguishers, protective clothing, and personal protective equipment

for emergency handlers etc. Details of fire management services of Bhavnagar city

and neighboring hospitals will be available with site controller in his operating

checklist.

7.10.2. Fire Fighting Arrangements

The complex is provided with storage of water and various types of portable fire

extinguishers namely Dry Chemical Powder type and CO2 type & Foam Type to

face any emergency arising due to the occurrence of fire.

Water Reservoir

1. Over ground water reservoir capacity: 2 Nos. X 5 m3

2. Water reserved for fire: 10 m3

Fire Extinguishers

Sufficient number of dry Chemical Powder type and CO2 type portable fire

extinguishers are installed on each floor of the plant. Suitable fire extinguishers are

also provided in all MCC room, PCC room & ETP, storage area & Security gate.

7.10.3. Actuation of the Plan

Any emergency starts as a small incident that may become a major accident if not

controlled in time. At the initial stages, the fire organization chart (would be

prepared separately for each facility) shall need to be put into action. If the incident

goes beyond control, the Main Incident Controller will need to actuate the on-site

plan at the appropriate stage as considered necessary. During idle shift/ holidays, the

security personnel will combat the incident as per the fire organization chart below

and at the same time inform various emergency controllers for guidance and control

of the situation. An emergency organization chart is prepared by appointing key






personnel and defining their specific duties that will be handy in emergency, details

of the chart is provided in the next section.

7.11. Emergency Organization Chart

No plan will succeed without effective emergency organization. Emergency

organization is a part and parcel of a good onsite and offsite emergency plan, without

which all resources, facilities etc. even available with us, cannot be put into services

as the right time is the key factor for management of an emergency. It is not possible

to envisage and detail every action which should be taken in emergency and to

harness the basic elements of emergency preparedness such as gravity of the

emergency, communications of information, onsite action for process and emergency

controls, mobilization of internal and external resources for fire and toxic release

control, warning people at right time, evacuation, medical preparedness, pollution

control etc. Emergency organization is set up specifying duties and responsibilities of

all to make best use of all resources to avoid confusion while tackling the emergency.

Figure below provided detailed information on emergency organization chart.

Fig. 7.1: Emergency Organization Chart

Onsite emergency plan highlights the flow of information and correlation among

various action groups within the factory. Offsite emergency plan indicates various

action groups at district levels which will get engaged in case of offsite emergency.

7.11.1. Offsite Emergency Plan

The off-site emergency plan prepared herein will deal with those incidents identified

in the onsite plan, which have the potential to harm persons or the environment

outside the boundary of the factory premises. In the recent past, in spite of the safety






planning there have been accidents in the Common Hazardous Waste Treatment,

Storage and Disposal Facilities in the Country.

Whenever such an emergency occurred there is a great need to control and isolate

the danger and to minimize the adverse affect to the greatest extent possible. This

plan has been drawn up with the District Contingency plan for an effective system

of command in control in combating the emergency.

7.11.1.1. Main purposes of the offsite emergency plan are:

To provide the local / district authorities, police, fire brigade, doctors,

surrounding industries and public, the basic information of risk and

environmental impact assessment and to appraise them of the consequences

and the protection / prevention measures and control plans and to seek their

help to communicate with the public in case of a major emergency

To assist the District Authorities for preparing the off-site emergency plan for

the district or any particular area and to organize rehearsal on regular basis and

initiate corrective action based on the lessons learnt.

Structure of the Off-Site Emergency Plan

The offsite emergency plan should be integrated properly with the District

Contingency Plan to tackle any kind of emergency. The site main controller will

keep liaison for this purpose with the District authorities. External telephone

facilities from site to Fire Brigades, Other units and Hospital, have been

established for quick and instantaneous communication. The names of the key

persons have been defined to establish contacts and co-ordinate Disaster

Management Centre.

In case of an occurrence of any major emergency:

In case of the occurrence of any off site emergency information shall be received

first by the Police Control Room on telephone No. 100 or by Fire Brigade. The

Police/Fire Brigade Control Room shall in turn inform the Police Commissioner,






Collector and Municipal Commissioner. The safety department and individual

plant have the list of quantities of the resources like breathing air sets, rescue

masks, fire extinguishers, water resources etc. available with various industries in

the vicinity which can be spared under Mutual Aid System to deal with

emergencies after receiving call from our factory.

Communication and Warning by Disaster Management Center

When any disaster occurs, the industry affected by the disaster will immediately

inform the Disaster Management Center (DMC). With all available information,

the DMC will act as per the Contingency Plan and also will immediately

communicate to the District Collectorate.

Role of the Factory Management

A copy of the Onsite / Offsite emergency plan has been given by the site Main

Controller to the Factory inspectorate who is acting as an Ex-officer Security to

the District Contingency Plan. The plan has to be continuously updated and

necessary changes have to be incorporated.

7.11.2. Emergency Response

A. Dangerous Situations

These are defined as the following:

Any fire or explosion in the facility

Any smoke outside/inside installation

Strong persisting smell of H2S within the facility

Any fire in the service buildings

Fire or explosion in the process area

Fire in the hazardous waste storage area

B. Emergency Response for Incinerator Plant






Basic Actions:

Immediate action is the most important factor in the emergency control

because the first few seconds count.

Take immediate steps to stop fire and raise alarm simultaneously.

Stop all operations and ensure closure of all isolation valves.

As fires develop and spread quickly, so all out efforts should be made to

contain the spread of fire.

Plant personnel without any specific duties should assemble at the nominated

place.

All vehicles except those that are required for emergency use should be moved

away from the operating area in an orderly manner at pre nominated route.

Electrical system except the lighting and fire fighting system should be

isolated.

If the feed to the fire cannot be cut off, the fire must be controlled and not

extinguished.

Start water spray systems in the areas involved in or exposed to secondary fire

risks.

Block all roads in the adjacent area and enlist police support for the purpose, if

warranted.

Actions in the Event of Fire:

Basic actions as detailed above.

Extinguishing fires: A small fire at a point of leakage should be extinguished

by enveloping with a water spray or a suitable smothering agent such as CO2

or DCP.

Fire fighting personnel working in or close to un-ignited vapour clouds or

close to fire, must be protected continuously by water sprays. Fire fighters

should advance towards the fire downwind if possible- BE CAREFUL TO

AVOID H2S EXPOSURE.

In case the only valve that can be used to stop the leakage is surrounded by

fire, it may be possible to close it manually. The person attempting the closure






should be continuously protected by water sprays, fire entry suit, water jet

blanket and SCBAs etc. The person must be equipped with a safety belt and a

manned lifeline. In case of rapid increase in decibel level, evacuate the area, as

there would have been over pressurization.

C. Post Emergency Follow Up

All cases of fire occurrence, no matter how small, must be reported promptly

to the Coordinator for follow up.

Under no circumstances should fire extinguishing equipment once used be

returned to its fixed location before it is recharged/ certified fit by the Fire

chief/ Safety Manager.

Used fire extinguishers must be laid horizontally to indicate that they have

been expended.

7.11.3. Communication System

As Effective and immediate communication of emergency is vital in the process of

emergency handling. It helps to mobilize the resources at the earliest and attack on

the emergency at its incipient stage. Under section 41B of the factories act, the

disclosure of information regarding chemicals & their hazards to the workers,

general public, local authority and the factory Inspectorate is compulsory. Such

communication is at the District level. This information is already given.

Communication system at site has been divided into four parts as mentioned below:

1. Internal communication for informing the emergency

2. To outside key personnel, emergency services and authorities

3. To neighboring factories and public in the vicinity.

4. The communication for declaring the emergency.






The communication system with regard to raising the alarm, declaring the major

emergency and procedures to make it known to other is explained below in brief

Alarm System

When the area of the site and the number of installations are more, siren has to be

installed for general communication to the people. It can be used for declaring the

Onsite as well as Offsite emergency and making the emergency known to the

people. The siren is installed at security gate for declaring the emergency.

SMALL FIRE: No Siren

MAJOR FIRE: A wailing Siren for two minutes. Sirens will be sounded three

times for thirty seconds with an interval of 15 seconds in between

EMERGENCY: Same type of Siren as in case of major fire but the same will be

sounded for three times at the interval of two minutes.

ALL CLEAR (For Fire): Straight Run Siren for two minutes.

TEST: Straight run Siren for two minutes.

Siren system is being tested every WEDNESDAY at 11.00 A.M.

7.11.4. Declaring the Major Emergency

The declaration of major emergency puts many agencies on action and the

consequences may be serious, therefore, such declaration should be based on careful

thoughts and matured judgment. Because of the scale of activity which will be

activated after the declaration of the emergency, it is advisable to restrict the

authority to declare it. In our case, Site Main Controller shall declare major

emergency. In case of extra ordinary emergency Incident Controller/Dy. Incident

Controller can take decision for declaring the emergency.






7.11.5. Emergency Control Centre (ECC)

The Emergency Control Centre is at Security Office. The emergency control center

or room is a place from where the operation to handle the emergency are directed,

coordinated and monitored. It will be attended by the site Main Controller and

senior officials of fire Dept., Police Dept., Factory Inspectorate, District Authorities

and emergency Services. Emergency control center is located in the security office

building. All communication facilities and other required facilities are provided.

ECC is located in the area having minimum potential to any risk and is close to the

road to allow for easy access by the external agencies.

The Emergency Control Centre should have the following resources available:

Copies of the DMP

Layout Plan of the complex

Information regarding Safety Equipment, Fire Fighting material

A list of telephones of key and essential staff of the company along with their

residential numbers.

Copies of the local Telephone Directories.

A list of important telephone numbers like those of neighbouring industries, Fire

Brigade, Hospitals etc.

Personal Protective Equipment.

First – Aid Kit.

Communication equipment – Internal and External telephones and other

communication equipment.

Requisite stationary items






Personnel to act as messengers

The communication equipment is checked periodically to ensure that they are

functional. The ECC is capable of being activated within a few minutes upon

declaration of an emergency.

7.11.6. Emergency Evacuation

Evacuation is an expedient option that depends on sufficient warning time to get

away from an impending emergency. The evacuation should establish clear and

detailed procedures for carrying out complete or partial evacuations from work

areas in an organized and consistent manner. A disorganized evacuation can result

in confusion, injury, and property damage. During natural or man-made disaster

following points will be considered in the emergency evacuation:

A clear chain of command and designation of the person in the facility authorized to

order an evacuation

In case of disaster, all non-essential technical workers (who are not assigned any

emergency duty) shall evacuate the area and report at the assembly point

The need to evacuate the non-essential technical workers will be determined by

the gravity of the emergency and assessment of the emergency by the Dy.

Incident Controller

With a view to accommodate the evacuated personnel from the affected

plants/departments and also to make the evacuation safe, we have clearly

marked an assembly point which has been displayed conspicuously by boards at

various locations in the premises

The assembly point is located near the Security Gate. The assembly point is

approachable from all the plants and departments

Security supervisor/guard are available round the clock and shall monitor the

assembled personnel






Before reaching the assembly point, it is required to pass through an affected

area, suitable personal protective appliances including masks, respirator etc. are

to be used which is available in the plants. For a short duration even a wet

handkerchief will be useful

In our case, Site Main Controller shall declare major emergency.

7.11.7. Medical Resources

The medical management for the possible emergency situations essentially consists

of treatment for burns and maybe some asphyxiation cases. They could cause burns

injuries. Material Safety Data Sheets and other relevant information is available at

the facility to enable ready treatment of any casualty, should the unfortunate need

arise. It is also proposed to circulate any important Health and Toxicology material

available through the latest research to all Doctors.

7.11.8. Record keeping and maintenance

Proper records will be maintained for

Industry-wise type of waste received,

Characteristics of waste,

Location of waste storage area,

Waste treatment and disposal methods

7.11.9. Other safety precautions to be taken:

Smoking to be prohibited in and around the storage areas

Only those vehicles with spark proof to be allowed

Good housekeeping to be maintained around the storage areas






Signboards showing precautionary measures to be taken in case of normal and

emergency situations should be displayed at appropriate locations

To the extent possible, manual operations with in storage area are to be avoided.

In case of manual operation, proper precautions need to be taken, particularly

during loading/unloading of liquid hazardous waste in drums.

A system for inspection of storage area to check the condition of containers,

spillages, leakages, etc., will be established and proper records will be

maintained

The wastes containing volatile solvents or other low vapor pressure chemicals

will be adequately protected from direct exposure to sunlight and adequate

ventilation will be provided

Tanks for storage of liquid waste will be properly dyked and will be provided

with adequate transfer systems

Storage sites will have adequate and prompt emergency response equipment

systems for the hazardous waste stored on-site. This will include fire fighting

arrangement based on the risk assessment, spill management, evacuation and

first aid

Immediately on receipt of hazardous waste, it will be analyzed and depending

upon its characteristics its storage will be finalized.

Only authorized personnel trained in hazardous waste handling procedures

should have access to the storage site

Mock drill for on-site emergency should be conducted regularly and records

should be maintained.






7.12. Occupational Health Management Plan

Industries, in general, where different activities are involved during construction,

erection, testing, commissioning, operation and maintenance, employ men, materials

and machines as the basic inputs. Occupational Health needs attention both during

construction and erection and operation and maintenance phases. However, the

problem varies both in magnitude and variety in the above stages.

Construction and Erection Phase

The problems envisaged at demolition, construction and erection stage can mainly be

due to accident, fugitive dust emissions and noise. To overcome these hazards, the

contractors in charge of construction and erection activities have to maintain noise

levels within threshold limit values and the workers should be provided with

personnel protective equipment. Mobile water sprinkler and wet drilling will be used

to control dust emissions.

Operation and Maintenance Phase

The problems envisaged during the operation and maintenance phase are accident,

exposure to heat, noise, fire etc. Suitable personnel protective equipments should be

provided to all employees, likely to be exposed to these situations. The working

personnel should be given the personnel protective equipment as listed in table below.

In addition, medical facilities should be made available round the clock for attending

any medical emergency during construction and operation phases.

Table 7.5: Personnel Protective Equipment

Protection For Equipment Protection Against

Head

Fire Helmet

Fall of objects / hitting against

objects during construction,

maintenance, etc.

Electrical resistance helmet Electrical Shock

Welder's leather cap Splashing of liquid etc.

Eye Panorama goggles with clear dust & high temperature






plastic vision

Ear Ear plugs or muffs High noise level

Nose

Dust masks Fine dust particles

Light fume mask Acid fumes, vapours and gases

(2.0%)

Body Asbestos apron Heat radiation

Hand

Leather gloves Cuts due to handling

Asbestos gloves Heat radiation

Leg

Leather safety boots

Striking by objects, fall of objects

and stepping on sharp or hot

objects.

Gum boots Chemically hazardous area

7.12.1. Noise

Noise will be regularly monitored at plant boundary for checking compliance

against environmental noise parameters as per CPCB norms. It will also be

monitored near noise generating equipment and corrective action (maintenance)

taken to ensure that all noise generating equipment do not emit noise in excess of

the statutory norms.

All workmen will be provided with required set of PPEs like ear plug, ear muff etc.

where noise levels in excess of 80 db (A) are regularly generated.

Preventive maintenance of noise generating equipment shall be regularly carried out

to ensure that noise levels are minimized to the extent possible. To the extent

feasible, equipment will be purchased considering noise generation as one of the

parameters.

7.12.2. Heat

The project does not envisage conditions that could lead to excess heating.

Consequently, special requirements for protection against heat stress are not

anticipated. However, the following shall be carried out:






Ventilation shall be provided to take care of heat evacuation.

Drinking water availability shall be ensured at several locations within the plant

to ensure workers have easy access to the same.

In case of occasional handling of heated equipment or materials, suitable PPEs

such as heat resistant gloves will be used.

7.12.3. Dust & Other Chemicals being suspended in the Environment

The possibility of suspended particles going into the body of the workmen,

either in the form of inhalation, ingestion or through skin absorption are least

and negligible as because the entire operation at the plant will be performed

under closed loop condition, right from charging till discharging, hence it’s a

rare possibility that the workmen will come in direct contact with raw material

or final goods.

At the same time the level of SPM and RPM will definitely be of least and

nominal value. But even though the same will be under closed monitoring and

periodical surveillance as per EIA norms and applicable legislations and any

minor deviation from the same will be dealt immediately and will be corrected.

Further to this all of the workmen will be provided with complete set of

appropriate PPEs, like dust masks, gloves, helmet, protective uniform and

clothing, eye protections etc.

7.12.4. Occupational Hazards Specific Pre-placement and Periodic Health

Monitoring

There will be routine observation of health of the workers. All the employees shall

be required to undergo a medical checkup before joining the facility. Medical

checkup will be conducted on regular basis and the health conditions will be

monitored. First aid facilities required to attend immediately for meeting emergency

situations shall be made available at the facility.






The following practices will be adopted to ensure good health condition of

employees.

Pre- employment check-up

Awareness programme

Routine check-up

Periodic vaccination programme etc.

*******



Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter VIII

Chapter VIII

Project Benefits



Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter-VIII: Project Benefits



Chapter-VIII: Project Benefits

8.0 Introduction

The Hazardous & Other Waste (Management & Transboundary Movement) Rules,

2016 & E-Waste Management Rules, 2016, bar the industries from dumping their

wastes indiscriminately. At the same time they permit the industries to dispose off

their wastes in safe & secured manner. It has been made mandatory by the

government that hazardous waste be disposed off in a systematic and scientific way

and pollution control boards have been asked to ensure it. For systematic & scientific

disposal of solid wastes, a facility has to be developed where care is to be taken to

restrict to the extent possible, any negative impacts on the environment.

Hazardous waste reuse, recycling, and reclamation can avoid environmental hazards,

protect scarce natural resources, reduce the nation's reliance on raw materials and

energy and provide economic benefits.

8.1 Environmental Benefits

There are several, interrelated environmental benefits of recycling of waste:

reducing the consumption of raw materials,

reducing pollution,

reducing energy use; and

reducing the volume of waste that must be treated and disposed of.

The extraction, refining, transportation and processing of new raw materials can have

a significant impact on the environment. Recycling of waste can mean less air, water,

and soil pollution associated with these practices.

Also, recycling can reduce emissions of greenhouse gases (GHGs). When wastes are

recycled, less energy is needed to obtain raw materials and to manufacture products.

When energy demand decreases, fewer fossil fuels are burned and less GHGs are






emitted into the atmosphere, which can help lessen the impacts of climate change and

decrease air pollution.

8.2 Economic Benefits

Environmentally sound treatment & disposal of Hazardous Waste & recycling of E-

Waste & discarded containers is not only good for the environment, but can benefit an

organization’s bottom line. Recycling of waste can increase production efficiency and

reduce costs associated with purchasing raw materials and waste management. A

business may also benefit from the positive or "green" image associated with

recycling, treatment & disposal efforts. For example, a company who values strong

corporate stewardship can increase goodwill with shareholders and consumers and

further distinguish itself from its competitors.

8.3 SOCIO-ECONOMIC BENEFITS

8.3.1 Employment Potential

Local, skilled & semi-skilled persons like Engineers, chemists, Technicians will have

permanent employment opportunities in plant operations, laboratory & maintenance

activities. Around 15 persons will be employed for the project activities. Drivers for

transportation will be outsourced. Thus the project is envisaged to generate direct &

indirect employment opportunities.

8.3.2 Corporate Environment Responsibility

Some socioeconomic issues were observed during the study which can be addressed

through CER activities. These issues are highlighted in the following table with the

mitigation measures that may be undertaken by the project proponent which may help

to improve the standard of living and health of the people in the surrounding area:

Table 8.1:

Issues in the Study Area and the Mitigation measures suggestion through CSR activities

S.

No Components Problem Issues

Mitigation Measures suggestion to

be done in the nearby areas in

future






S.




future

1. Health &

Hygiene

Area has limited PHCs(Primary

Health Centres)

Existing Health Centres are not well

equipped with all kind medical

facilities.

Assistance to old, Physically

Handicapped/Challenged

Arrangement of Free or very low

cost Medical & health checkup

camps at regular intervals for the

villagers.

Financial aid / arrangements of

infrastructure to local govt. health

centres for development of

important medical amenities.

Provision of financial aid to Local

Panchayat to develop Health

Centre building if possible.

2. Education Few women goes for higher studies

School infrastructure to be improved

Children from some poorer section of

the villages in Sherpur, Sawli,

Salehpur etc. cannot complete their

education

Financial aids to meritorious and

hardworking students in financially

weaker section of the society.

Distribution of school dresses and

Study materials to weaker section.

3. Drinking

Water

Scarcity of potable drinking water

Quality of potable groundwater is

needed to be checked.

More tanks should be established in

the villages of Sawli, Gopalpur,

Jokhabad, Sherpur etc.

Treatment of the groundwater should

be given importance.

Provision of arrangement of potable

drinking water is required in the

villages.

4. Employment Increase in the number of

unemployed youth

Women are not allowed to do jobs.

Income based activity training for

Youth & Women.

Workshops for Self sustainability

to the study area incumbents in

consultation with the families of

the beneficiaries.






S.




future

5. Sanitation &

Drainage

System

Inadequate household toilets.

Absence of gutter line in the villages

of the study area.

Community sanitary toilets are

absent in the study area.

The development and construction

of

sanitary toilets

Development of gutter line

facilities will be carried out in co-

ordination with the village

panchayat.

6. Construction

&

Upgradation

Jokhabad village need one bustop

near the village entrance.

Internal Village roads are not

maintained.

Construction/up gradation of the

internal village road

Renovation of Anganwadi,

Panchayat building and Primary

School buildings etc.

8.3.3 CSR Budgeting

The project is committed towards CER with respect to its applicability with ‘The

Companies Act, 2013’. Required amount to be earmarked for CER for the project as

per office memorandum dated 1st

May 2018 (MoEF&CC) is Rs. 4.0 Lac/- which is 2.0

% of the total Project cost i.e. Rs. 2.0 Crore/-, for green field projects.

The amount for CER will be spent on improving medical facilities, education &

community infrastructure in the nearby areas under following heads:-

Table 8.2:

CER Activities with Budgetary Allocation

S. No Particulars Total Amount (Rs.)

A. Education : Rs. 200,000/-

Govt. School in nearby Village

1. Repair & maintenance of school building 1.0

Distribution of sports item/kit in school 0.5






S. No Particulars Total Amount (Rs.)

Distribution of furniture (almirah, benches etc) 0.5

Tree plantation & greenbelt development

B. Community Infrastructure and Health & Family Welfare Programmes : Rs. 200,000/-

1. Arranging free multi-speciality health checkup camps for nearby

villages

0.5

Distribution of blankets etc in nearby villages 0.5

Construction of drains/naali for proper drainage system 0.5

Construction of toilets under Swacchh Bharat Mission 0.5

Total Rs. 4.0 Lac/-

This cost will be a onetime cost to be spent for the CER. However if required

maintenance for the above facilities might be undertaken as suggested by the local

Panchayat in future whose cost is not reflected in the above table of CER cost allocation.

The above budget breakup is the tentative plan for investment which may vary from time

to time depending upon the priority of the CER activity.

*******



Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter IX

Chapter IX

Project Benefits



Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter-IX: Environment Cost & Benefit Analysis



Chapter-IX

Environment Cost & Benefit Analysis

9.0 Introduction

The proposal involves Installation of Common Hazardous Waste Treatment Facility &

Incinerator (10 MT/day) to comply with the provisions of Hazardous & Other Waste

(Management & Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016. The project is envisaged for

disposal of common hazardous waste (through incineration), E-waste dismantling &

segregation and recycling of discarded containers, generated from various medium to

small scale industries in Uttar Pradesh.

Environmental Cost Benefit Analysis has not been recommended at the scoping stage,

and has therefore not been carried out.

*******



Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter X

Chapter X

EMP



Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter X: EMP



Chapter X: EMP

10.0 Introduction The Environment Management Plan (EMP) is a site-specific plan developed to ensure

that all necessary measures are identified and implemented in order to protect the

environment and comply with environmental legislation.

Preparation of environmental management plan is required for formulation,

implementation and monitoring of environmental protection measures during and

after commissioning of projects. The plans should indicate the details as to how

various measures have been or are proposed to be taken including cost components as

may be required.

The project is for a common hazardous waste incinerator & other waste treatment

facility located at Plot No. D- 26, UPSIDC, Sikandrabad Industrial Area, District

Bulandshahr, Uttar Pradesh over an area of 1857.0 sq. m..

10.1 Components of EMP

Following elements are the major components of Environment Management Plan:

Commitment and policy: The project strives to provide and implement the

environment management plan that incorporates all issues related to air, land and

water.

Planning: This head includes identification of environmental impacts, legal

requirements and setting of environmental objectives.

Implementation: This comprises of resources available to the developers,

accountability of contractors, training of operational staff associated with

environmental control facilities and documentation of measures to be taken.

Measurement and evaluation: This includes monitoring, corrective actions and

record keeping.






10.2 Environment Management During Installation And Construction

Phase

Air Environment

Air quality around the project is marginally impacted during the installation phase.

Various activities, especially related to construction & installation are likely to

generate dust and may adversely affect the air quality of the surrounding area of the

project site. Following measures shall be taken to minimize such impacts:

All the loose material either stacked or transported will be provided with suitable

covering such as tarpaulin.

For dust suppression due to vehicular movements, water sprinkling will be done

from time to time.

To minimize the occupational health hazard, proper mask are provided to the

workers who are engaged in activities that may lead to dust generation.

Water Environment

During the installation period, run-off from site shall not be allowed to stand (water

logging) or enter into the roadside or nearby drain. There is no surface water body

within 1.0 km radius of the project site. Adequate measures will be taken to avoid any

adverse impact on surface or ground water during construction/installation phase.

Domestic waste water generated through manpower engaged in construction

/installation will be disposed off to soak pit via septic tank.

Effluent water generated from operations will be treated in ETP & reused for

vehicle/floor washing, scrubbing & container washing etc. No waste water will be

discharged outside project premises.

Noise Environment

The proposed project site is located in notified industrial area. During the installation

stage, increase in ambient noise levels is expected, which will decrease with increase

in distance. All the construction/installation activities will be carried out during the

daytime. There will be some noise generation due to the traffic movement carrying






construction material, which is a temporary phenomenon. To prevent the occurrence

of any occupational hazard, earmuff/earplug will be given to the workers working

around and operating/plant machinery emitting high noise levels. Careful planning of

machinery operation and scheduling of operations will be done to minimize such

impacts. Development of green belt all around the project site will be helpful in

abatement of noise and act as barrier for noise generated from plant machinery.

Solid Waste Management

During the construction/installation, construction waste generated will be stacked and

disposed off at the designated disposal site and care will be taken to ensure that

temporary stacking and transportation does not cause any disturbance to the

surrounding environment.

10.3 Environment Management During Operation Phase

10.3.1 Air Environment

Air during the operational phase of the proposed project, the potential sources of air

emission is Incinerator & e-waste dismantling & segregation operations, DG set and

vehicular traffic.

Process gas emissions will be controlled by using adequate air pollution control devices.

The ambient air quality & stack emission norms will be adhered to as per UPCB/CPCB

norms.

Only vehicles having PUC certification will be used. Trucks will be adequately covered with

to minimize any spillage of hazardous material to be handled at site to control line

source emissions.

Emission from Incinerator

Air pollution control devices have been installed for final flue gas trapping. Low

sulphur content fuel is used in incineration to reduce SO2 emissions. To control

emissions from incinerator, stack of adequate height as per CPCB guidelines, Bag

House, venturi scrubber followed by packed bed scrubber & HEPA filter will be

provided as APCS to control the Particulate Matter, emissions & acidic gaseous






emissions. A lean concentration of NaOH solution /dry lime & activated carbon and

water is used to neutralize the flue gases/solutions. Stack as well as ambient air

monitoring will be done on periodical basis as per guidelines.

The air pollution control device provided for control of the emissions generated

from incineration process will comply with standards for Dioxins and Furans.

Emission from DG set

D.G. sets will be operated as emergency power back-up during power cuts.

For mitigation of impacts of air pollution, a stack of height 5.0 m (from ground) shall be

provided for proposed D.G. sets of capacity 420 kVA & periodical stack monitoring

will be done for environmental pollutants.

Emissions from E-waste dismantling & segregation operations:

Work stations for e-waste dismantling & segregation will be provided with a suction hood for

any dust particle coming out of the dismantling process.

The employees at this section shall be provided with all the required PPE's i.e. apron, safety

shoes, gloves, dust mask etc. Fire extinguishers shall be provided in the working

area.

Vehicular Pollution Control & Management

Fugitive emissions are likely to be generated from activities like storage & handling

of waste, transfer points of waste and movement of vehicles.

For effective prevention and control of fugitive emissions following measures will

be adopted:

Sprinkling of water to control airborne dust.

Maintenance of air pollution control equipment on a regular basis.

PPEs like dust mask shall be provided to workers.

Green belt will be developed in project premises to arrest fugitive emissions.

10.3.2 Water Environment

The total water requirement for the proposed project will be 4.0 KLD.






Adequate sanitary facility will be provided to construction workers to maintain

hygienic conditions at site. The sewage will be disposed off to soak pit via septic

tank.

Waste water generated in plant premises will be treated in ETP (7.0 KLD) &

reused within the process & other project activities.

Online flow meters will be installed at inlet and outlet of the ETPs.

Monitoring of inlet and outlet quality of wastewater.

Records of wastewater generation and reuse/disposal quantity will be

maintained. Records for recycled treated wastewater will be maintained.

ETP sludge will be disposed off by treating in in-house incinerator & ash to

approved Landfill site.

Proper housekeeping will be adopted to prevent spillages and contaminated

surface runoff going to storm water drains.

10.3.3 Noise Environment

The main sources of noise generation is due movement of vehicles carrying waste,

incinerator & waste treatment operations, operation of DG set. Following measures

will be taken to control the same:

Vehicles trips during daytime only & fixing route map to avoid populated area.

Records of vehicle movement, their trips scheduling and prescribed speed limits

will be maintained.

Periodic and preventive maintenance and cleaning of vehicles will be done

regularly so as to reduce noise levels.

For all the noise generating equipment in Incineration Plant including DG sets

etc., acoustic enclosures will be provided wherever feasible.

Regular use of PPEs (ear Plugs and Ear Muffs) to reduce impact on health will

be made compulsory while working near the noise generating equipments.

Records of preventive maintenance activity for all the equipments in

Incineration Plant, scheduled cleaning and maintenance of the plant etc. will be

done.






Periodic and preventive maintenance and cleaning of equipments will be

regularly done so the noise levels are reduced.

Plantation & greenbelt development to reduce/check noise levels.

10.3.4 Land Environment

Treated waste water will be utilized for plantation after ensuring norms specified

by pollution control board & storage areas will be properly lined & washing

water collected properly to ensure mitigation of any adverse impact on soil and

ground water.

Hazardous waste shall be stored as per guidelines in storage area

Impervious flooring shall be provided wherever storage & handling of

hazardous waste will be done in the project premises.

10.3.5 Odour Control

Various hazardous wastes will be handled at the site. Suitable control measures shall

be taken to control the fugitive emission (primary and secondary) during loading/

unloading, storage and handling of hazardous waste. Odor control measures at the

proposed plant are described below:

Flue gas shall be passed through wet scrubbing system involving removal of

odour by absorption;

Odour suppression chemicals (Odorants) will be sprayed as and when required;

Plantation shall be done with selection of odor suppressing plant species in the

project site.

Best management practices shall be in place;

Regular workplace monitoring shall be carried out.

10.4 Solid Waste Management

The proposed project has a manpower requirement of 15 persons. Municipal solid

waste generated at the site will be disposed off to municipal waste department.






Hazardous wastes generated at site will be stored & disposed off as per Hazardous &

Other Waste (Management and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016. Incinerator

ash & ash generated after treatment of ETP sludge in incinerator will be stored in

sealed containers & kept in storage area before being sent to authorized land fill site.

Used bags/containers, used oil etc. will be sent to authorized recyclers.

10.5 Green Belt Development

Green belt design and development has been attributed a great importance and is an

essential element of planning policy.

It is a well-known fact that the trees have substantial inter-specific as well as intra-

specific variation in air pollution tolerance. Therefore, plant species act as bio-

monitoring agent to monitor the air environment as well as to keep and maintain the

project environment healthy

The main objective of the green belt is to provide a buffer / barrier between the

sources of pollution and the surrounding areas. The green belt helps to capture the

fugitive emissions and attenuate the noise apart from improving the aesthetics quality

of the region. Greenbelt will be developed by using appropriate plant species as

suggested by CPCB guidelines to mitigate air pollution and to improve biodiversity

status of the study area.

As a control measure for atmospheric pollution, as a barrier to noise generated in the

plant premises and to utilize the wastewater generated as treated effluent, it is

recommended to develop green belt around the periphery of the plant, along the road

side and other area available for the plantation.

10.5.1 Selection of Plant Species

Greenbelt will be developed by following CPCB guidelines for greenbelt

development, 2000. Accordingly, evergreen and quick growing species have been

selected / suggested for greenbelt development.

10.5.2 Locations of Greenbelt & Plantation

Core Zone: Greenbelt will be developed in the 33% area of the project site as well

as in the buffer zone (as a part of conservation of Schedule-I species).






Buffer Zone: Identified LIZ area (agriculture land, urban area and other industrial

units)

Plantation will be carried out on project site boundary. Some odor fragrant plant

species will be included in the inter-spaces of greenbelt to suppress / control odor.

Also, landscaping will be carried out around the office premises to enhance

aesthetics. Similarly, plantation will be carried out with in various locations of the

above mentioned LIZ area. Following plant species are recommended as per CPCB

guidelines for greenbelt development.

Table 10.1: Plant Species Suggested for Greenbelt Development in the Project Site

S. No Scientific Name Local Name Pollution Control Environmental adaptation

DC OG DR SR FR

1 Albizia lebbeck Siris, Karo

Sirish * * * * *

2 Azardirachta indica Neem * * * * *

3 Bauhinia variegata Kanchnar * _ * * *

4 Ficus benghalensis Banyan, Vad * _ * * *

5 Ficus religiosa Peepal, Piparo,

Piplo * * * * *

6 Holoptelea

integrifolia. Kanjo, Papada * _ * * *

7 Leucaena

leucocephala

Shoe Babool,

Liso bavar * _ * * *

8 Melia azedarch Melia, Bakani

Nim * * * * *

9 Parkinsonia aculeate

L. Ram Baval _ _ * * *

10 Phoenix sylvestis Khajoor * _ * * *

11 Syzygium cumini Jamun, Jambu * _ * * *

12 Tamarindus indica Imli * _ * * *

13 Terminalia arjuna Arjun Sadad * * * * *

Biological filter (DC- Dust Control, OG – absorptions of Gases), Environmental Adaptation (DR -

Drought resistance, SR - Salinity resistance, FR - Fire Resistance).

Table 10.2: Fragrant Plant Species Suggested for Odor Suppression

S. No. Common Name Scientific Name Location of Plantation

1. Tagetes patula Genda Mixed plantation of these species will

be carried out in the inter-spaces of

trees of greenbelt.

2. Rosa indica Rose

3. Jasminum auriculatum Juhi






4. Jasminum grandiflorum Chameli

5. Jasminum sambac Madan Mogra

10.5.3 Budget Allocation

Greenbelt with in project site/ core zone will be developed within initial two years

while buffer zone plantation will be continued up to 5 years. Estimated budget for

same is as follows,

Table 10.3: Budget Allocation for Greenbelt Development

Particulars 1st Year 2

nd Year 3

rd Year 4

th

year

5th

Year Grand

Total

1. Core Zone: Greenbelt will be developed in the %33 area of the project site.

Saplings required for project

site greenbelt

60 10 10 10 10 100

Amount (@ INR. 200 per

sapling)

12,000 2000 2000 2000 2000 20,000

2. Buffer Zone: Every year 100 sapling will be planted upto 5 years with in LIZ area like, agriculture

hedges, various places of urban area (public places) and along road.

Saplings required for project

site greenbelt

130 120 120 120 120 500 sapling

Amount (@ INR. 200 per

sapling)

26,000 24,000 24,000 24,000 24,000 INR

122,000/-

All other costs like labor costs for plantation, soil filling dressing, irrigation etc. will also borne by

client / proponent.

10.5.4 Plantation Technique and Care

Plantation Technique

Following basic procedures need to be followed for greening the area.

Plantation of tree species required approx. 1m3 pit for soil enrichment

Pit should be filled with imported soil with 3:1:1 the ratio of sand, silt and






form yard manure

Procure well grown saplings of recommended species from the nearby Forest

Department nursery

Make 1m diameter ring bund around the planted saplings for water retention

Watering of sapling is species specific, therefore watering need to be done once

in 2 or 3 days for a period of two years

Soil wok and weeding need to be done once in a two months

Monitoring Protocol

The plantations need to be managed by regular watering, soil enrichment work,

applying manure, weeding and provide proper protection.

Replacement of sapling (replanting) required whenever mortality occurs in the

plantation during the growth stage.

Plantation requires after care for a period of minimum five years till the saplings

attain matured tree stage.

Any damage to the developed greenbelt due to any natural or cattle activity

should be redeveloped and maintained by the agency.

10.6 Environmental Management Cell

In order to maintain the environmental quality within the stipulated standards, regular

monitoring of various environmental components is necessary & the same will be

complied with as per conditions. For this, individual authorities will take decisions to

formulate an Environment Policy of the proposed project and constitute an

Environmental Management Cell and commit to operate the proposed project with the

objectives mentioned in approved Environment Policy. The System of reporting of

NC/violation of any Environmental law/Policy will be as per quality management

system. The internal audit will be conducted on periodic basis and any non-

conformities/violation to environment law will be closed and discussed in

Management Review Meeting of Partners of the company.






10.6.2 Organizational Structure

An Environmental Management Cell with adequate professional expertise and

resources shall be established to discharge responsibilities related to environmental

management including statutory compliance, pollution prevention, environmental

monitoring, etc.

The environment management cell will be responsible for:

Achieve objectives of the ‘Environment Protection Policy’ of the management.

Collect information from regular monitoring and create a database.

Analyze the data and decide thrust area.

Based on the data collected, decide target for each thrust area.

Carry out ‘Projects’ in each thrust area to arrive at practical solutions to

environmental problems.

Discuss the reports of study on environment and disseminate the information.

Work out ‘Action plan’ for implementation of the recommendations made in the

reports.

Prepare Management Information System (MIS) reports and budget for

environment management program.

Reporting Mechanism for non-compliance / violations of Environmental Norms

Before the plant start-up, the EMP for operation phase will be prepared

incorporating various environmental management aspects and requirements relevant

to the plant operating processes and its impact on the environment. This EMP would

also be revised in accordance with the requirement of additional impact mitigation

measures due to change in site conditions, natural calamities, unforeseen

eventuality, etc.

The Plant Manager / EHS Manager will look after all environmental issues and

ensure compliance with Environmental Clearance conditions/SPCB norms. EHS

Manager will report to the designated partner for EHS in the firm and discuss the

non-compliance, if so any. An immediate solution will be arrived at to ensure

compliance with norms.






The responsibilities of the various project management members including the

Environment Management Cell is presented in table below:

Table 10.4: Monitoring Schedule

S.

No. Designation Responsibility

1. Designated

Partner

Responsible for inception & execution of Environmental Policy and overall

operations for including Incinerator, ETP and other project activities & their

environmental management and decision making for all

Environmental issues.

2. Plant Manager

In-charge of each of the plant operations including environmental

management of each facility.

Ensure correct records of generation, handling, storage, transportation and

disposal of solid hazardous wastes.

Ensuring legal compliance by properly undertaking activities as laid down

by various regulatory agencies from time to time and interacting with the

same and arranging awareness programme among the operators and

workers on site.

3. Supervisor Supervisors for Smooth Operation of project operations – Shift wise

Supervisors

4. Engineer

Maintenance

Overall Maintenance of the different items of works & responsible for

trouble shooting and maintenance activity during break down or preventive

maintenance as per schedule prescribed

5. Laboratory

personnel

Ensure environmental monitoring as per appropriate procedures is carried out

for Incinerator System along with other waste recycling facilities & ETP.

10.6.3 Responsibilities of Environmental Management Cell

The department shall be the nodal agency to co-ordinate and provide necessary

services on environmental issues during construction and operation of the project.

This environmental management cell is responsible for implementation of

environmental management plan, interaction with the environmental regulatory

agencies, reviewing draft policy and planning. This department interacts with

MoEF&CC, Central Pollution Control Board (CPCB) and other environment






regulatory agencies. The department shall also interact with local people to

understand their problems and to formulate appropriate community development

plan.

10.7 Environmental Budget

In order to comply with the environmental protection measures as suggested in the

above sections, the project management has made budgetary provision for

environmental protection and safety measures. The total capital cost towards EMP is

Rs. 32.45 Lac and the recurring cost will be Rs. 4.0 Lac. The annual expenditure to

be incurred on plantation, maintenance, monitoring and analysis of ambient air,

effluent water and soil etc as shown in Table below:

Table 10.5: Annual Expenditure of Environmental Protection Measures

S. No. Pollution control system Cost

(Rs. Lac)

Recurring Cost

(Rs. Lac)

1. Air pollution control 17 1.8

2. Water pollution (Effluent Treatment Plant) 7.0 0.50

3. Environment lab and monitoring 5.0 0.50

4. Occupational Health (PPE) 2.0 0.20

5. Green Belt 1.45 1.0

Total 32.45 4.0

********



Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter X

Chapter XI

Summary & Conclusion



Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter XI: Summary & Conclusion


Report Ref: GESPL/SWMP /EIA/258 Rev. No. 01

Chapter-XI

Summary & Conclusion

11.1. Introduction

M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project has proposed a common facility for

hazardous waste incinerator (10 MT/day), E-waste dismantling & segregation (10

MT/day) and recycling of discarded containers (10 MT/day), coming up at Plot No.

D- 26, UPSIDC, Sikandrabad Industrial Area, District Bulandshahr, Uttar Pradesh, to

facilitate proper treatment and disposal of hazardous wastes generated from various

industries in Bulandshahr, Greater Noida, Noida, Ghaziabad, Meerut, Saharanpur and

Aligarh in Uttar Pradesh, by adhering to the provisions of Hazardous & Other Wastes

(Management & Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016 & E-Waste Management

Rules, 2016.

The project activity is covered under category ‘A’ of item 7 (d) i.e. “Common

hazardous waste treatment, storage and disposal facilities (TSDFs)” of the schedule of

EIA Notification 2006.

The site is well connected by road network, power supply and other necessary

facilities required for the proposed project.

11.2. Project Description

Project Details

Table 11.1: Brief Details of Project


A. Name of the

Project Proponent

M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project






B. Nature of Project Common facility for:

Hazardous waste incinerator (10 MT/day)

Other Waste Treatment

E-waste dismantling & segregation (10 MT/day)

Recycling/Reconditioning of discarded containers (10 MT/day)

C. Project Location

1. Site Plot No. D- 26, UPSIDC, Sikandrabad Industrial Area

2. Tehsil Sikandrabad

3. District Bulandshahr

4. State Uttar Pradesh

5. Extent of geographical coordinates

Latitude 28027’59.54” N to 28

028’2.77” N

Longitude 77039’46.36” E to 77

039’48.96”E

6. SOI Toposheet No. 53 H/11

D. Environmental Settings Details (with approx. aerial distance & direction from the project site

boundary)

1. Nearest village Jokhabad ~ 0.70 km towards North

2. Nearest National

Highway/ State

Highway

NH-91 (Delhi - Kanpur) ~ 0.55 Km in NE direction

Sikandrabad Road ~3.4 Km in ENE direction

NH-235 (Meerut - Bulandshahr) ~14.6 Km in ENE direction

3. Nearest Railway

Station

Dankaur Railway Station ~ 6.2 km towards SSW direction

Ajaibpur Railway Station ~6.75 km towards West

4. Nearest Airport Indira Gandhi International Airport ~ 54.4 km towards WNW

direction

Hindon Domestic Airport ~38.60 Km towards North West

5. National Park, Wild

Life Sanctuaries,

Biosphere Reserves

etc. within 10 Km

radius study area

None within study area

6. Reserved / Protected

Forest within 10km

radius

None within study area






7. Water Bodies within

10 km radius

Sikandrabad Distributory ~2.3 km towards ENE direction

Ganga Canal ~4.0 km towards WSW direction

Karwan Nadi ~5.6 km towards NE direction

Upper Ganga Canal ~8.9 km towards NE direction

E. Total project cost Rs. 2.0 Crore/-

F. Soil type sandy loam, loamy sand to sandy clay loam

G. Depth of water table

Pre-monsoon : 5 m to 15 m bgl

Post-monsoon : 4 m to 10 m bgl

H. Major crops Wheat, Rice, Bajra, Barley, Sugar cane

I. Socio-economic

factors No R&R issues involved

J. Schools Eagle Public School ~ 0.8 km towards E direction

Primary School, Shamli ~1.0 km towards E direction

SS Public School ~ 2.64 km towards NW direction

K.

Hospital

Shiv Arogya Maternity & Nursing ~ 0.80 km towards East

Rajendra Hospital ~ 0.9 km towards E direction

Eye Hospital ~ 3.45 km towards South East

Government Hospital Sikandrabad ~ 4.2 km towards ESE

direction

L.

Places of worship

Shiv Mandir Sherpur ~0.90km towards West

Madina Masjid ~ 2.65km towards North West

Khalid Masjid ~ 2.7km towards North West

Kishan Talab Mandir, Sikandrabad ~ 3.9 km towards ESE

direction

Hanuman Temple ~ 3.4 km towards SE direction

Temple Near Village~ Sherpur- 0.8 km towards WSW direction

Near Sikandrabad ~3.5 km towards ESE direction

Christian Church ~ 4.20 km towards North West

M. Project site elevation

above MSL 206 amsl

N. Project site

topography Plain






O.

Present land use at

the site

Site is located in notified industrial area; no activity is being carried out

presently.

Building constructed in plot area (before being sub-leased to M/s

Sheetala waste management project) will be utilized for proposed

project operations.

P. Seismicity Seismic Zone-IV as per IS 1893 (Part I): 2002

Project Requirement

Table 11.2: Project Requirement


1. Land requirement 1857 sq. m. (0.1857 ha)

2. Water requirement & its source Daily total water requirement: 7.0 KLD

Fresh water requirement: 4.0 KLD

Recycled Water requirement: 3.0 KLD

Source: Tanker supply

3. Electricity requirement & its source 100 KW

Source : UPPCL

4. Power Backup DG Set – 420 kVA

5. Manpower requirements 15 (skilled & semi-skilled)

6. Fuel requirement & its source Incinerator ~125 lt/hr of HSD/LDO

DG set~ 10-12 lt/hr of HSD

Fuel will be procured locally.

Waste Water Generation & Management

About 3.14 KLD of effluent water will be generated from the operations which will

be treated in ETP (7.0 KLD capacity) proposed in project premises. Treated water

will be re-circulated for scrubbing, washing purpose & reused for greenbelt &

sanitation purpose. Domestic waste water generated will be disposed off to soak pit

via septic tank.

No waste water will be discharged outside project premises.






Air Emission & Air Pollution Control Measures Details

Incinerator: Emissions of PM, SO2, NOx, HCl, HF, CO, TOCs from stack.

DG Set: Emissions of PM, SO2, NOx & CO from stack. These emissions are not

continuous as DG sets will be used only as emergency power back-up.

The facility will be equipped with appropriate air pollution control device for

reducing the pollutants and also a stack of adequate height will provided for proper

dispersion of the air pollutants as per CPCB guidelines.

Particulate Matter emissions from movement of vehicles & vehicular emissions like

SPM, CO & HCs from exhaust of the vehicles are envisaged as line source

emissions.

Only vehicles with PUC certification will be allowed. Trucks will be covered with

tarpaulin/plastic to reduce the spillage of hazardous material to be handled at site.

Dioxin & Furans Generation & its Control

The incineration facility will be equipped with an adequate Air pollution control

system to control release of these pollutants in the environment. Regular monitoring

of Dioxin and Furans shall be done to limit its emissions to 0.1 ng TEQ/Nm3.

Odor Control Measures

Suction hood to be provided in hazardous waste storage area.

Afterburner (direct) technique (doubling residence time to enable afterburner

temperature to be reduced to 20°C to 100°C and flue gas handling systems to

achieve better destruction or removal efficiency;

Flue gas shall be passed through wet scrubbing system involving removal of

odour by absorption;

Odour suppression chemicals (Odorants) will be sprayed as and when required;

Plant species for odor suppression in the project site shall be developed as per

guidelines.






Solid & Hazardous Waste Generation & Disposal

The hazardous wastes generated from the common facility during operational phase

are ash from incinerator, ETP sludge and used oil, used bags & containers etc.

Hazardous Wastes will be properly handled in closed containers and stored in

hazardous waste storage area as per HOW (M&T) Rules, 2016.

Mitigation measures

This waste will be sent to nearest TSDF as per Hazardous and Other Wastes

(Management and Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016.

All the hazardous waste generated is stored in storage area provided with

impervious flooring & also having catchment garland drains for collecting run-

off water. Garland drains will be connected to ETP.

Noise Pollution & its Management

Sources of noise pollution in the proposed project are incinerator, diesel generator

set, shredder, pumps and compressors, ID Fan, E-waste segregation & dismantling

& vehicles. Measures to be adopted for mitigation of noise pollution are:

All equipments in the proposed project will be designed /operated to have a

noise level not exceeding prescribed standard in line with the requirements of

OSHA.

Acoustic enclosures for considerable noise generating point sources such as DG

Set will be provided for noise attenuation.

Workers will be provided with suitable personal protective equipment (PPE)

such as earmuffs and earplugs.

Rotation of workers in the high noise area will be done.

Green belt will be developed to reduce noise.

Equipment will be maintained in good working order to reduce noise.

All equipment will be operated within specified design parameters.






11.3. Description of the Environment

The baseline environmental quality of air, water, soil, noise, socio-economic status

and ecology has been assessed during the period of December 2018 to February, 2019

in the study area of 10 km radial distance from the proposed project site.

Base Line Data

Table 11.3: Onsite Meteorological Data

Period

Temperature

(oC)

Wind Speed

(km/hr)

R. Humidity

(%)

Rain

fall Predominant wind

directions Min Max Average Min Max (mm)

December 9.7 27.6 5.9 51.3 79.8 2.0 North West to South

East January 10.3 27.1 6.8 43.6 84.3 50.7

February 11.2 28.3 7.3 42.6 80.3 22.3

11.3.2.1. Ambient Air Quality

The ambient air samples were collected from eight locations and analyzed for

PM10, PM2.5, SO2, NOx, & CO. During baseline monitoring, the average values of

PM10 varied between 194.0μg/m3 to 344.2μg/m3

. The average values of PM2.5

varied between 52.6 μg/m3 to 130.1 μg/m3

. The average values for SO2 was 9.3

μg/m3 to 12.6 μg/m3

. The average values of NOx varied between 19.5μg/m3 to

31.6μg/m3. The average values of CO varied between 0.86 mg/m

3 to 0.95 mg/m

3.

From the above mentioned studies it is observed that values for Respirable

Particulate Matter & PM2.5 are higher than prescribed standards.

11.3.2.2. Ground Water Quality

Eight numbers of ground water samples in the study area have been collected

from different villages and analyzed for the study period. The pH varied in the

range of 7.22 to 7.98. Total Hardness was in the range of 236.6 mg/l to 298.8

mg/l. The concentration of total dissolved solids in groundwater are varying from

423 mg/l to 536 mg/l in study area. The total dissolved solids in some of the






ground water samples are above acceptable limits but well within the permissible

limits

11.3.2.3. Noise Level

Ambient noise levels were measured at 8 locations around the proposed project

site. Minimum and maximum noise levels recorded during the day time were from

50.8 Leq dB and 59.4 Leq dB respectively and minimum and maximum level of

noise during night time was 33.3 Leq dB and 38.8 Leq dB respectively. Noise

levels during day & night time at the respective sampling stations were observed

to be within CPCB prescribed limits

11.3.2.4. Soil Quality

Total of eight numbers of samples have been collected from the study area for

analysis. pH of the soil samples ranged from 6.54 to 8.58, which reflects that the

soil is near neutral to moderately alkaline in nature indicating that soils do not

pose a problem of either salinity or sodicity.

The organic matter in the soil ranged from 0.65% to 2.98 %.The concentration of

available Nitrogen, Phosphorous and Potassium in the soil samples is 109 to 185.2

kg/ha, 36.5 to 59.8 kg/ha, 122.5 to 257.2 kg/ha.

11.3.2.5. Socio-Economic Study

The total population of the study area is 175812 the males constitute of 52.75%

and females are 47.25 %. The literate total population of the study area is 101944

which constitute to be 57.98 %. The male literacy with respect to male population

is 66.45 % and female literacy total 48.53 % with respect to female population in

the study area. Further, the under six years of age group total population is 27845.

The study area has various amenities like transport services, educational

institutions, institutional health services , hospitals, nursing homes etc, places of

worships, hotels and restaurants, libraries , clubs etc. However the area within 2

km radius of the proposed project site is lacking of some basic infrastructure like

health care facilities and safe and sufficient drinking water facilities.






CER plan with budgetary allocation has been proposed keeping in mind the

observations of socio-economic environment study with the aim to improve the

baseline conditions.

11.3.2.6. Biological Environment

The study area does not possess National Parks / Wildlife Sanctuary / Tiger

reserve / Mangroves / Biosphere Reserve/ Tiger Reserves and Elephant corridor

etc. Project site is situated in the industrial area and possess scanty vegetation and

some trees. Buffer zone of the study area mostly consists of agriculture land / agro

ecosystem.

Floral Diversity of the Study Area

Project site possess floral species belonging to 5 Species (2 trees, 1 shrub & 2

herbs). Cutting of trees is not proposed in the core zone.

Buffer zone of the project area has been reported with the 120 plant species which

includes 39 tree species, 36 shrubs, 23 herbs, 11 grasses and 11 climber species.

Faunal Biodiversity of the Study Area

Buffer zone is recorded with 35 species of birds / avifauna, 09 mammals, 05

species of herpetofauna on the basis of direct and secondary / indirect evidences

The buffer zone of the project area reported with Schedule-I & threatened species

like Peafowl and Sarus Crane. Conservation plan with budgetary allocation for the

same has been prepared & will be implemented.

11.4. Anticipated Environmental Impacts & Mitigation Measures

Due to this facility, there will be increment in the air pollution due to the air emissions

like PM, SO2, NOx, CO, TOCs, HC, HF etc. from the incinerator stack & DG Stack.

However, appropriate air pollution control devices & adequate stack height as per

prescribed standards along with mitigation measures proposed to be adopted for the

project will mitigate the air pollution due to proposed project.






Entire waste water generated from the incineration facility will be treated in ETP

proposed in plant premises & treated water will be reused for scrubbing, other process

operations, greenbelt development & sanitation purpose.

Hazardous waste generated in the form of Incineration ash & ETP sludge (sludge will

be treated in incinerator & ash generated) will be sent to nearest authorized landfill

site for proper disposal. Used oil will be sold to authorized recyclers from proposed

facility.

11.5. Environmental Monitoring Programme

Regular monitoring of environmental parameters like air, water, noise and soil as well

as performance of pollution control devices and safety measures in the facility proper

environmental management will be carried out periodically as per guidelines & as

recommended for proper environmental management.

11.6. ADDITIONAL STUDIES

Risk Assessment

The management is very much aware of their obligation to protect all persons at work

and others in the neighborhood that may be affected by an unfortunate and unforeseen

incidence occurring at the Common Hazardous Waste Incinerator & Other waste

treatment facility. Any hazard either to employees or others arising from activities at

the facility shall, as far as possible, be handled by the management of the company

and prevented from spreading any further.

11.7. Project Benefits

For systematic & scientific disposal of solid wastes, a facility has to be developed

where care is to be taken to restrict to the extent possible, any negative impacts on the

environment. Hazardous waste reuse, recycling, and reclamation can avoid

environmental hazards, protect scarce natural resources, reduce the nation's reliance

on raw materials and energy and provide economic benefits.






The proposed Common Hazardous Waste Incinerator & Other waste treatment facility

is envisaged to have following benefits:

Environmental Benefits

There are several, interrelated environmental benefits of recycling waste including:

reducing the consumption of raw materials,

reducing pollution,

reducing energy use and

reducing the volume of waste that must be treated and disposed off.

Economic Benefits

Recycling waste can increase production efficiency and reduce costs associated with

purchasing raw materials and waste management. The proposed project will facilitate

a safe & environmentally sound treatment facility for waste generating industries in

nearby areas.

Employment Potential

Around 15 persons will be employed for the project activities. Drivers for

transportation will be outsourced. Thus the project is envisaged to generate direct &

indirect employment opportunities.

Corporate Environment Responsibility

A total sum of INR 400,000/- @ 2% of the total project cost which is INR 2.0 Crore/-

has been considered to be allocated for the proposed project. This cost will be a

onetime cost to be spent for the CER in areas like Education, Health & Hygiene,

community infrastructure development etc.

11.8. Environmental Management Plan

Environmental Management Plan (EMP) aims at the preservation of ecological system

by considering in-built pollution abatement facilities at the proposed site. Some of the

major criteria governing the environmental measures will be adopted, and the same is

described as below:






Table 11.4: Activity, Impact & Mitigation Measures

S.

No.

Activity Impact Mitigation Measures

1. Transportation of waste to the

facility from member industry

Generation of dust

and emission of HC &

CO.

Maintenance of roads,

Water sprinkling for dust

suppression

Properly covered vehicles for

transportation

Vehicle manifest shall be

maintained.

PUC Certified vehicles will be

used.

Traffic management will be

ensured.

2. Temporary waste material

storage, stabilization & handling,

dismantling & segregation,

Particulate matter

emissions & odour

generation

Standard operating procedures

shall be followed

APCM shall be provided at e-

waste dismantling & segregation

unit.

3. Incinerator operations Generation of PM,

SO2, NOx, HCl, HF,

CO,TOC

Adequate APCM shall be

provided like Cyclone

Separators, ESP/Bag Filter and

Scrubbers.

4. ETP operations Generation of Odour, Selection of plant species for odor

suppression

5. Operation of DG set Generation of SO2,

NOx, HC & PM

emissions

D.G set shall only be used as

back-up power source.

Adequate Stack Height shall be

provided for proper dispersion of

air pollutants.






11.9. Conclusion

It is predicted that socio-economic impact due to this project will positively increase

the employment opportunities for local inhabitants. There are no resettlement and

rehabilitation issues involved in this project. The project infrastructures will be of use

to people of the area. Thus the proposed project is not likely to affect the environment

or adjacent ecosystem adversely.

**********



Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter XII

Chapter XII

Disclosure of Consultant



Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter-XII: Disclosure Of Consultant Engaged



Chapter-XII

Disclosure of Consultant Engaged

Declaration by Experts contributing to the Project: Common Hazardous Waste

Incinerator & Other waste treatment facility at UPSIDC, Sikandrabad Industrial Area,

District Bulandshahr, Uttar Pradesh.

Site Address : Plot No. D- 26, UPSIDC, Sikandrabad Industrial Area, District Bulandshahr,

Uttar Pradesh.

Promoter : M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project

I, hereby, certify that I was part of the EIA team in the following capacity that developed the

above project for grant of Environmental Clearance.

EIA coordinator : category ‘A’ of item 7 (d) i.e. Common hazardous waste

treatment, storage and disposal facilities (TSDFs)

Name : Mr. Mallikarjuna Guttula/ Dr. Ratna Kr. Mudhliar

Signature and Date :

Contact information:

Address : Gaurang Environmental Solutions Pvt. Ltd.


Banipark, Jhotwara road, Jaipur-302016

Mobile No. : 0141-4029115

E-mail : [email protected]







Status of accreditation with : Listed on S. No. 69 of List of Accredited EIA (as per April

2019)

Functional area experts:

Functional

areas

Name of the

expert/s

Involvement (period and task**) Signature and date

AP*

Pawan Sut

Sharma

Ms. Ginni

Barotia

Selecting parameters for

monitoring.

Suggesting measures of reducing

fugitive emission.

Identifying and assessing quantum

of emissions


of the different air emissions from


Identification of suitable pollution

control device

WP* Mr.

Pradyumna

Arvind

Deshpande

Ms. Pooja

Bunker-

FAA

Designing of water balance and

developing schemes for cascading

use (recycle, reuse) of water


of effluent/ waste water discharges

in to the receiving environment/

water bodies

SHW* Ms. Ginni

Barotia

Suggesting Methodologies for

segregation and collection,

Transportation, Treatment &

Disposal of Biomedical Waste as

per Biomedical Waste

Management Rules, 2016.

Suggesting measures for handling

waste.

SE* Mr. Kapil

Sharma

Conducting baseline socio-

economic survey






Gajendra

Rathore

Mr. Vinod

Kumar

Verma-

FAA

Conduct social needs assessment

studies

Preparing need-based CSR plan.

EB* Mr.

Abhishek

Gautam

Dr. Yati

Kachhawa

To survey flora – fauna.

To identify ecologically important

areas around project location.

To identify threatened species in

the project area.

To identify impact of proposed

project on flora – fauna.

To recommend mitigations /

greenbelt development

Geo Mukesh

Suroliya

Mr. Vidya

Bhushan

Trivedi

Field Survey for assessing the

regional and local geology of the

area.

HG* Mukesh

Suroliya

Mr. Vidya

Bhushan

Trivedi

Analysis of surface hydrological

data

Computation of ground water

recharge, flow rate and direction.

SC* Mr.

Pradyumna

Arvind

Deshpande

Assessment of fertility/

productivity of soil, nutrient

availability

Controlling degradation of soil/soil

conservation

Effect of waste handling on soil






AQ* Mr.

Mallikarju

na Murthy

Guttula

Analyzing micro meteorological

data for use in modeling

Collecting and using secondary

data on meteorology like cloud

cover, inversion related data,

mixing heights etc., for modeling

Application of relevant air quality

models in prediction of dispersion

of pollutants,

Plotting of isopleths of GLCs

representing incremental pollution

levels, on suitable maps showing

both, the sources of pollution as

well as the environmentally

sensitive receptors.

NV* Haneesh

PR

Probable impacts of noise and

vibration

Impacts of noise and vibration on

fauna from projects in ecologically

sensitive areas

Control of noise emanating from

project activities.

LU* Mr. Kapil

Sharma

Mr. Vinod

Kumar

Verma-

FAA

Generation and analysis of data

related to land use pattern

Integration of land use related

data/ information for assessing

environmental impacts of

developmental projects

Assessment of land use and land

cover.






RH* Mr. Pawan

Sut

Sharma

Ms. Ginni

Barotia

Assessment and mitigation of

probable impacts.

Suggesting PPE for workers.

Measures for risk assessment.

*One TM against each FAE may be shown

**Please attach additional sheet if required

Declaration by the Head of the accredited consultant organization/authorized person

I, Vipul Khandelwal hereby confirm that the above mentioned experts prepared the

EIA/EMP report of “Common Hazardous Waste Incinerator & Other waste treatment

facility at UPSIDC, Sikandrabad Industrial Area, District Bulandshahr, Uttar Pradesh”

promoted by M/s Sheetala Waste Management for Environmental Clearance. I also

confirm that the consultant organization shall be fully accountable for any misleading

information mentioned in this statement.

Signature:

Name : Mr. Vipul Khandelwal

Designation : Director

Name of the EIA consultant organization : Gaurang Environmental Solutions Pvt. Ltd.

NABET Certificate no. & Issue Date : NABET/EIA/1720/IA0026: June 12, 2017

*******



Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter XIII

Chapter XIII

Conformity to Rules



Promoter: M/s Sheetala Waste Management Project Chapter-XIII: Conformity to Rules



Chapter XIII

Conformity to Rules

13.0 Confirmity to Hazardous & Other Waste (Management &

Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2016

Point wise details of conformity to the hazardous & other waste (management &

trans-boundary movement) rules 2016, in compliance of Specific ToR condition (ii)

are given in Table 13.1:

Table 13.1:

Conformity to Hazardous & Other Waste

(Management & Trans-boundary Movement) Rules 2016

Chapter II

PROCEDURE FOR MANAGEMENT OF HAZARDOUS AND OTHER WASTES

II -

4 Responsibilities of the occupier for management of hazardous and other wastes.-

1)

For the management of hazardous and other wastes, an

occupier shall follow the following

steps, namely:-

(a) prevention;

(b) minimization;

(c) reuse,

(d) recycling;

(e) recovery, utilisation including co-processing;

(f) safe disposal

Details of Hazardous Waste

generated from the hazardous

waste incinerator facility & its

proper disposal are given in

Chapter II of this report.

2)

The occupier shall be responsible for safe and

environmentally sound management of hazardous and other

wastes.

Contents of para 2 are duly

noted & will be complied with.

Measures to be taken for






handling, storage, treatment &

disposal of Hazardous Waste

are given in Chapter II of this

report.

(3)

The hazardous and other wastes generated in the

establishment of an occupier shall be sent or sold to an

authorised actual user or shall be disposed of in an authorised

disposal facility.

Incinerator ash generated will

be temporarily stored in sealed

containers & sent to nearest

authorized TSDF for final

disposal. Used oil will be sold

to authorized recyclers.

(4)

The hazardous and other wastes shall be transported from an

occupier’s establishment to an authorised actual user or to an

authorised disposal facility in accordance with the provisions

of these rules.

Transportation of hazardous

waste shall be done in

accordance with the

provisions of these rules.

Details to are given in Chapter

II of this report.

(5)

The occupier who intends to get its hazardous and other

wastes treated and disposed off by the operator of a

treatment, storage and disposal facility shall give to the

operator of that facility, such specific information as may be

needed for safe storage and disposal.

Management shall collect

information required as per

guidelines or as prescribed by

SPCB from the respective

industry which is sending

the hazardous waste for

treatment and disposal, in

compliance to the applicable

rules & guidelines.

(6)

The occupier shall take all the steps while managing

hazardous and other wastes to:

a. contain contaminants and prevent accidents and limit their

consequences on human beings and the environment; and

All necessary preventive

measures will be taken

while handling, storage,

treatment & disposal of the

hazardous wastes.

Use of PPEs by workers will

be ensured.

In case of any accident,

concerned authority will b

b. provide persons working in the site with appropriate

training, equipment and the information necessary to ensure

their safety.






informed immediately along

with formal information and

necessary measures as per on-

site emergency plan will be

taken.

II -

5

Responsibilities of State Government for environmentally sound management of

hazardous and other wastes.

(1)

Department of Industry in the State or any other government

agency authorised in this regard by the State Government, to

ensure earmarking or allocation of industrial space or shed

for recycling, pre-processing and other utilisation of

hazardous or other waste in the existing and upcoming

industrial park, estate and industrial clusters;


noted.

(2)

Department of Labour in the State or any other government

agency authorised in this regard by the State Government

shall

(a) ensure recognition and registration of workers involved in

recycling, pre-processing and other utilisation activities;

(b) assist formation of groups of such workers to facilitate

setting up such facilities;

(c) undertake industrial skill development activities for the

workers involved in recycling, pre-processing and other

utilisation;

(d) undertake annual monitoring and to ensure safety and

health of workers involved in recycling, pre-processing and

other utilisation


noted.

(3)

Every State Government may prepare integrated plan for

effective implementation of these provisions and to submit

annual report to the Ministry of Environment, Forest and

Climate Change, in the Central Government.


noted.

II -

6 Grant of authorisation for managing hazardous and other wastes

(1) Every occupier of the facility who is engaged in handling, The proposed project will be






generation, collection, storage, packaging, transportation,

use, treatment, processing, recycling, recovery, pre-

processing, co-processing, utilisation, offering for sale,

transfer or disposal of the hazardous and other wastes shall

be required to make an application in Form 1 to the State

Pollution Control Board and obtain an authorisation from the

State Pollution Control Board within a period of sixty days

from the date of publication of these rules. Such application

for authorisation shall be accompanied with a copy each of

the following documents, namely:-

(a) consent to establish granted by the State Pollution Control

Board under the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution)

Act, 1974 (25 of 1974) and the Air (Prevention and Control

of Pollution) Act, 1981 (21 of 1981);

(b) Consent to operate granted by the State Pollution Control

Board under the Water (Prevention and Control of Pollution)

Act, 1974 (25 of 1974) and/or Air (Prevention and Control of

Pollution) Act, 1981, (21 of 1981);

(c) in case of renewal of authorisation, a self-certified

compliance report in respect of effluent, emission standards

and the conditions specified in the authorisation for

hazardous and other wastes:

Provided that an application for renewal of authorisation may

be made three months before the expiry of such

authorisation:

Provided further that-

(i) any person authorised under the provisions of the

Hazardous Waste (Management, Handling and

Transboundary Movement) Rules, 2008, prior to the date of

commencement of these rules, shall not be required to make

an application for authorisation till the period of expiry of

such authorisation;

(ii) any person engaged in recycling or reprocessing of the

hazardous waste specified in Schedule IV and having

commissioned after obtaining

all necessary statutory

clearances from respective

authorities.

Authorization for common

facility for Hazardous Waste

Incinerator, E-Waste


recycling/reconditioning of

discarded containers will be

obtained from State Pollution

Control Board.






registration under the provisions of the Hazardous Waste

(Management, Handling and Transboundary Movement)

Rules, 2008, shall not be required to make an application for

authorisation till the period of expiry of such registration.

(2)

On receipt of an application complete in all respects for the

authorisation, the State Pollution Control Board may, after

such inquiry as it considers necessary, and on being satisfied

that the applicant possesses appropriate facilities for

collection, storage, packaging, transportation, treatment,

processing, use, destruction, recycling, recovery, pre-

processing, co-processing, utilisation, offering for sale,

transfer or disposal of the hazardous and other waste, as the

case may be, and after ensuring technical capabilities and

equipment complying with the standard operating procedure

or other guidelines specified by the Central Pollution Control

Board from time to time and through site inspection, grant

within a period of one hundred and twenty days, an

authorisation in Form 2 to the applicant, which shall be valid

for a period of five years subject to such conditions as may

be laid down therein. For commonly recyclable hazardous

waste as given in Schedule IV, the guidelines already

prepared by the Central Pollution Control Board shall be

followed:

Provided that in the case of an application for renewal of

authorisation, the State Pollution Control Board may, before

granting such authorisation, satisfy itself that there has been

no violation of the conditions specified in the authorisation

earlier granted by it and same shall be recorded in the

inspection report.

The contents of para II-6(2)

have been duly noted.

(3)

The authorisation granted by the State Pollution Control

Board under sub-rule (2) shall be accompanied by a copy of

the field inspection report signed by that Board indicating the

adequacy of facilities for collection, storage, packaging,

transportation, treatment, processing, use, destruction,








recycling, recovery, pre-processing, co-processing,

utilisation, offering for sale, transfer or disposal of the

hazardous and other wastes and compliance to the guidelines

or standard operating procedures specified by the Central

Pollution Control Board from time to time.

(4)

The State Pollution Control Board may, for the reasons to be

recorded in writing and after giving reasonable opportunity

of being heard to the applicant, refuse to grant any

authorisation under these rules.



(5)

Every occupier authorised under these rules, shall maintain a

record of hazardous and other wastes managed by him in

Form 3 and prepare and submit to the State Pollution Control

Board, an annual return containing the details specified in

Form 4 on or before the 30th day of June following the

financial year to which that return relates.


have been duly noted & will be

complied with during

operational phase.

(6)

The State Pollution Control Board shall maintain a register

containing particulars of the conditions imposed under these

rules for management of hazardous and other wastes and it

shall be open for inspection during office hours to any

interested or affected person.



complied with.

(7)

The authorised actual user of hazardous and other wastes

shall maintain records of hazardous and other wastes

purchased in a passbook issued by the State Pollution Control

Board along with the authorisation.



complied with.

(8)

Handing over of the hazardous and other wastes to the

authorised actual user shall be only after making the entry

into the passbook of the actual user.

The proposed project is for

hazardous waste incinerator, E-

Waste dismantling &

segregation and



Incinerator ash generated will

be sent for final disposal to

nearest authorized TSDF &

Used oil will be sold to






authorized recycler.

II -

7 Power to suspend or cancel an authorization

(1)

The State Pollution Control Board, may, if in its opinion the

holder of the authorisation has failed to comply with any of

the conditions of the authorisation or with any provisions of

the Act or these rules and after giving him a reasonable

opportunity of being heard and after recording reasons

thereof in writing cancel or suspend the authorisation issued

under rule 6 for such period as it considers necessary in the

public interest.



(2)

Upon suspension or cancellation of the authorisation, the

State Pollution Control Board may give directions to the

person whose authorisation has been suspended or cancelled

for the safe storage and management of the hazardous and

other wastes, and such occupier shall comply with such

directions.

Directions given by State

Pollution Control Board

shall be followed

II-

8 Storage of hazardous and other wastes

(1)

The occupiers of facilities may store the hazardous and other

wastes for a period not exceeding ninety days and shall

maintain a record of sale, transfer, storage, recycling,

recovery, pre-processing, co-processing and utilisation of

such wastes and make these records available for inspection:

Provided that the State Pollution Control Board may extend

the said period of ninety days in following cases, namely:-

(i) small generators (up to ten tonnes per annum) up to one

hundred and eighty days of their annual capacity;

(ii) actual users and disposal facility operators up to one

hundred and eighty days of their annual capacity,

(iii) occupiers who do not have access to any treatment,

storage, disposal facility in the concerned State; or

(iv) the waste which needs to be specifically stored for

development of a process for its recycling, recovery, pre-








processing, co-processing or utilisation;

(v) in any other case, on justifiable grounds up to one

hundred and eighty days.

II-

9

Utilisation of hazardous and other wastes.-

(1)

The utilisation of hazardous and other wastes as a resource or

after pre-processing either for co-processing or for any other

use, including within the premises of the generator (if it is not

part of process), shall be carried out only after obtaining

authorisation from the State Pollution Control Board in

respect of waste on the basis of standard operating

procedures or guidelines provided by the Central Pollution

Control Board.

Authorization for common

facility for hazardous waste

incinerator, E-Waste



discarded containers will be


Control Board as per

guidelines.

(2)

Where standard operating procedures or guidelines are not

available for specific utilisation, the approval has to be

sought from Central Pollution Control Board which shall be

granting approval on the basis of trial runs and thereafter,

standard operating procedures or guidelines shall be prepared

by Central Pollution Control Board.

Provided, if trial run has been conducted for particular waste

with respect to particular utilisation and compliance to the

environmental standards has been demonstrated,

authorisation may be granted by the State Pollution Control

Board with respect to the same waste and utilisation, without

need of separate trial run by Central Pollution Control Board

and such cases of successful trial run, Central Pollution

Control Board shall intimate all the State Pollution Control

Board regarding the same.



complied with.

(3)

No trial runs shall be required for co-processing of waste in

cement plants for which guidelines by the Central Pollution

Control Board are already available; however, the actual

users shall ensure compliance to the standards notified under

the Environment (Protection) Act,1986 (29 of 1986), for

The proposed project is for

common facility for hazardous

waste incinerator, E-Waste








cement plant with respect to co-processing of waste:

Provided that till the time the standards are notified, the

procedure as applicable to other kind of utilisation of

hazardous and other waste, as enumerated above shall be

followed.


Authorization for Hazardous

Waste Treatment Storage and

Disposal Facility will be


Control Board as per

guidelines.

II-

10

Standard Operating Procedure or guidelines for actual

users

The Ministry of Environment, Forest and Climate Change or

the Central Pollution Control Board may issue guidelines or

standard operating procedures for environmentally sound

management of hazardous and other wastes from time to

time.

The contenets of para II (10)

are not applicable as the

proposed project is for common

facility for hazardous waste

incinerator, E-Waste




Chapter III

Import And Export Of Hazardous And Other Wastes

The proposed project is for Common facility for hazardous waste incinerator & other waste treatment

facility at Bulandshahr. No import or export of hazardous waste is envisaged.

Chapter IV

Treatment, storage and disposal facility for Hazardous wastes

IV 16 Treatment, Storage and Disposal-Facility for hazardous

wastes

1)

The State Government, occupier, operator of a facility or

any association of occupiers shall individually or jointly or

severally be responsible for, and identify sites for

establishing the facility for treatment, storage and disposal

of the hazardous wastes in the State.

Site meeting MOEF&CC

guidelines has been

proposed for common facility

for hazardous waste incinerator

& other waste treatment facility

at UPSIDC, Sikandrabad

industrial area.

2)

The operator of common facility or occupier of a captive

facility, shall design and set up the Treatment, Storage and

Disposal Facility as per technical guidelines issued by the

The proposed facility shall

be designed as per CPCB

technical guidelines and






Central Pollution Control Board in this regard from time to

time and shall obtain approval from the State Pollution

Control Board for design and layout in this regard from

time to time.

necessary approval shall be

obtained from concerned

authority.

3)

The State Pollution Control Board shall monitor the setting

up and operation of the Treatment, Storage and Disposal

Facilities regularly.

The contents of para 3 are duly

noted.

4)

The operator of the common facility or occupier of a

captive facility shall be responsible for safe and

environmentally sound operation of the

facility and its closure and post closure phase, as per

guidelines or standard operating procedures issued by the

Central Pollution Control Board

from time to time.


noted.

Management & designated

authority as detailed in Chapter

VI of this report, shall be

responsible for safe and

environmentally sound

operation of facility, closure

and post closure phase.

5)

The operator of the common facility or occupier of a

captive facility shall maintain records of hazardous & other

wastes handled by him in Form 3.

Proper records of

the hazardous wastes

handled as per rules, will be

maintained in Form 3.

6)

The operator of common facility or occupier of a captive

facility shall file an annual return in Form 4 to the State

Pollution Control Board on or before the 30th day of June

following the financial year to which that return relates.



Chapter V

Packaging, Labelling, and Transport of Hazardous and Other Wastes

V -

17 Packaging and labelling

1)

Any occupier handling hazardous or other wastes and

operator of the treatment, storage and disposal facility shall

ensure that the hazardous and other wastes are packaged in

a manner suitable for safe handling, storage and transport

as per the guidelines issued by the Central Pollution

Packaging of hazardous waste

shall be done as per the

guidelines issued by the

CPCB. Labelling of hazardous

waste shall be done as per






Control Board from time to time. The labelling shall be

done as per Form 8.

Form 8, as detailed in Chapter

II of this report.

2) The label shall be of non-washable material, weather proof

and easily visible.



V -18 Transportation of Hazardous & Other Waste

1)

The transport of the hazardous & other wastes shall be in

accordance with the provisions of these rules and the

rules made by the Central Government under the Motor

Vehicles Act. 1988 and other guidelines issued from time

to time in this regard.



Details regarding transportation

of hazardous wastes are given

in Chapter II of this report.

2)

The occupier shall provide the transporter with the

relevant information in Form 9, regarding the

hazardous nature of the wastes and measures to be taken

in case of an emergency and shall label the hazardous

& other wastes containers as per Form 8.



3)

In case of transportation of hazardous & other wastes for

final disposal to a facility existing in a State other than the

State where the waste is generated, the sender shall obtain

‘No Objection Certificate’ from the State Pollution Control

Board of both the States.

The hazardous waste generated

at facility like incinerator ash

shall be sent to nearest

authorized landfill site and used

oil shall be sold to authorized

recyclers as per applicable rules

& guidelines.

4)

In case of transportation of hazardous & other wastes for

recycling or utilisation including co-processing, the sender

shall intimate both the State Pollution Control Boards

before handing over the waste to the transporter.

Contents of para 4 are not

applicable as the hazardous

waste generated at facility like

incinerator ash shall be sent to

nearest authorized landfill site

and used oil shall be sold to

authorized recyclers as per


5)

In case of transit of hazardous and other waste for

recycling, utilisation including co-processing or disposal

through a State other than the States of origin and

destination, the sender shall give prior intimation to the

Contents of para 5 are not

applicable as incinerator ash

generated shall be sent to

nearest authorized landfill site






concerned State Pollution Control Board of the States of

transit before handing over the wastes to the transporter.

located in Uttar Pradesh itself.

6)

In case of transportation of hazardous and other waste, the

responsibility of safe transport shall be either of the sender

or the receiver whosoever arranges the transport and has

the necessary authorisation for transport from the

concerned State Pollution Control Board. This

responsibility should be clearly indicated in the manifest.



7)

The authorisation for transport shall be obtained either by

the sender or the receiver on whose behalf the transport is

being arranged.



V -19 Manifest system (Movement Document) for hazardous and other waste to be used

within the country only)

1)

The sender of the waste shall prepare seven copies of the

manifest in Form 10 comprising of colour code indicated

below and all seven copies shall be signed by the

sender:

Copy number

with colour

code

Purpose

Copy 1 (White) To be forwarded to the SPCB/PCC by the

occupier.

Copy 2

(Yellow)

To be signed by the transporter and retained

by the occupier.

Copy 3 (Pink) To be retained by the operator of a facility.

Copy 4

(Orange)

To be returned to the transporter by the

operator of facility after accepting waste.

Copy 5 (Green) To be forwarded to the SPCB/PCC by the

operator of facility after disposal.

Copy 6 (Blue) To be returned to the occupier by the

operator of the facility after disposal.

Copy 7 (Grey)

To be sent by the receiver to the State

Pollution Control Board of the sender in

case the sender is in another State.



Details regarding manifest

system are given in Chapter II

of this report.

2) The sender shall forward copy 1 (white) to the State Contents of para 2 are duly






Pollution Control Board, and in case the hazardous

or other wastes is likely to be transported through any

transit State, the sender shall intimate the

State Pollution Control Boards of transit States about the

movement of the waste.


Incinerator ash generated shall

be sent to nearest authorized

landfill site located in Uttar

Pradesh itself.

3)

No transporter shall accept hazardous wastes from sender

for transport unless it is accompanied by copies

3 to 7 of the manifest.


noted.

4)

The transporter shall submit copies 3 to 7 of the manifest

duly signed with date to the receiver along of the facility

along with the waste consignment.


noted.

5)

The receiver after acceptance of the waste shall hand over

copy 4 (orange) to the transporter and send copy 5 (green)

to his State Pollution Control Board and send copy 6 (blue)

to the sender and the copy 3 (pink) shall be retained by the

receiver.



6)

The copy 7 (grey) shall only be sent to the State Pollution

Control Board of the sender, if the sender is in another

State.


noted.

Chapter VI

Miscellaneous

VI -

20 Records and returns

1)

The occupier handling hazardous or other wastes and

operator of the disposal facility shall

maintain records of such operations in Form 3.

Records of handling of

hazardous waste at the

proposed hazardous waste

incinerator facility shall be

maintained in Form 3 as per

rules & guidelines.

2)

The occupier handling hazardous or other wastes and

operator of the disposal facility shall send annual

returns to the State Pollution Control Board in Form 4.

Annual returns of the proposed

hazardous waste incinerator

facility shall be sent

to the State Pollution

Control Board in Form 4 as per






rules & guidelines.

3)

The State Pollution Control Board based on the annual

returns received from the occupiers and the operators of the

facilities for disposal of hazardous and other wastes shall

prepare an annual inventory of the waste generated; waste

recycled, recovered, utilised including co-processed; waste

re-exported and waste disposed and submit to the Central

Pollution Control Board by the 30th day of September

every year. The State Pollution Control Board shall also

prepare the inventory of hazardous waste generators, actual

users, and common and captive disposal facilities and shall

submit the information to Central Pollution Control Board

every two years.


noted.

4)

The Central Pollution Control Board shall prepare the

consolidated review report on management of hazardous

and other wastes and forward it to the Ministry of

Environment, Forest and Climate Change, along with its

recommendations before the 30th day of December once in

every year.


noted.

VI -

21

Responsibility of Authorities

The Authority specified in column 2 of the Schedule VII

shall perform the duties as specified in column 3 of the said

Schedule subject to the provisions of these rules.


noted.

VI -

22

Accident reporting

Where an accident occurs at the facility of the occupier

handling hazardous or other wastes and operator of the

disposal facility or during transportation, the occupier or

the operator or the transporter shall immediately intimate

the State Pollution Control Board through telephone, e-

mail about the accident and subsequently send a report in

Form 11.

In case of accident, the SPCB

shall be intimated immediately

& formal report

shall be sent in

Form 11, as per rules &

guidelines, by the management

& designated authority as per

details given in Chapter VI of

this report.






VI-

23

Liability of occupier, importer or exporter & operator of a

disposal facility

1)

The occupier, importer or exporter and operator of the

disposal facility shall be liable for all damages caused to

the environment or third party due to improper handling &

management of the hazardous wastes or disposal of the

hazardous wastes.


noted.

2)

The occupier and the operator of the disposal facility shall

be liable to pay financial penalties as levied for any

violation of the provisions under these rules by the State

Pollution Control Board with the prior approval of the

Central Pollution Control Board.


noted.

VI -

24 Appeal

1)

Any person aggrieved by an order of suspension or

cancellation or refusal of authorisation or its renewal

passed by the State Pollution Control Board may, within a

period of thirty days from the date on which the order is

communicated to him, prefer an appeal in Form 12 to the

Appellate Authority, namely, the Environment Secretary of

the State.


noted.

2)

The Appellate Authority may entertain the appeal after

expiry of the said period of thirty days, if it is satisfied that

the appellant was prevented by sufficient cause from filing

the appeal in time.


noted.

3) Every appeal filed under this rule shall be disposed of

within a period of sixty days from the date of its filing.


noted.

The detailed action plan for conformity to “Protocol for Performance evaluation and

monitoring of the Common Hazardous Waste Treatment Storage and Disposal

facilities including common Hazardous Waste incinerators”, published by the CPCB

on May 24, 2010, in compliance of Specific ToR condition (iii) is given below in

Table 13.2.






Table 13.2

Action plan for performance evaluation and monitoring of the proposed project

Section Condition Compliance

4.1 Basic Information to be provided by

the operator of the facility

Format for basic information, which

needs to be submitted by the operator of

a facility is annexed (Annexure – III).

The details are to be furnished before

the start of the operation of the facility

based on the latest EIA studies

conducted by the operator of the facility

for obtaining environmental clearance

from the MoEF/State authority, as

applicable. In case of a facility which is

already in operation, the information

need to be provided based on the EIA

studies carried out earlier by the facility

operator, before 31 December 2009.

Above information need to be submitted

by the operator of the facility as one

time exercise. Whenever, there is a

change in the installed capacity or in the

pre-treatment processes, construction of

additional secured landfill cells,

advancement in technology or additional

facilities like recycling, reuse, mode of

transportation etc., the operator of the

facility is required to submit the updated

information to the SPCB/PCC with a

copy endorsed to the CPCB and MoEF.

The contents of para 4.1 are duly noted & will be

complied with.

The basic information as per the Format given in

Annexure-III will be provided to SPCB/CPCB

before the start of operation of the facility as one

time exercise.

In case if there is any change in the activity of the

proposed facility, updated information will be

provided to SPCB/CPCB

4.2 Periodic information as per the format

enclosed (Annexure -IV) is required to


complied with.






be submitted by the facility operator to

the SPCB/PCC with a copy endorsed to

the CPCB/MoEF on quarterly basis.

This information needs to be submitted

to SPCB/PCC (with a copy to CPCB

and MoEF) within fifteen days of the

end of the quarter.

Periodic information as per the format given

in Annexure-IV will be provided to

SPCB/CPCB on quarterly basis within 15 days

of the end of the quarter.

4.3

Performance evaluation by

SPCB/PCC

After receipt of the information (as per

Annexure IV) from the TSDF

operators, the State Pollution Control

Board/Pollution Control Committee will

send the independent report ( as per

Annexure -VI) to the CPCB and MoEF

commenting on the information

provided by the operator based on their

own observations during field visits and

monitoring. The report should be sent

within one month.

The contents of para 4.3 are duly noted.

4.4

Performance evaluation by CPCB:

The Central Pollution Control Board

may carryout evaluation randomly so as

to cover each facility at least once in two

years.


4.5

Protocols for the captive facilities:

Protocols for the captive secured

landfills as well as captive hazardous

waste incinerators may be prepared by

the SPCB and PCC on the similar lines

as suggested in this protocol.

The contents of para 4.5 are not applicable as the

project is of common facility for hazardous waste

incinerator, E-waste dismantling & segregation

and recycling/reconditioning of discarded

containers.

5.0 Summary

5.1 All the common TSDF operators have to

fill up the Annexure –III and


complied with.






Annexure –IV in respect of the

facilities and submit to the respective

SPCB/PCC with copies endorsed to

CPCB and MoEF. The quarterly reports

should be submitted within fifteen days

of the end of the quarter.

Periodic information as per the format given

in Annexure –III and Annexure –IV will be

provided to SPCB, CPCB and MoEF&CC on

quarterly basis within 15 days of the end of the

quarter.

5.2

To have uniformity in monitoring of

soil, ground & surface water, ambient

air quality, gaseous emissions from

vents provided to the already capped

landfills, a monitoring protocol for

common hazardous waste TSDFs

including HW Incinerators (Annexure -

V) has also been suggested. This

protocol may be followed by all the

TSDF Operators. SPCB/PCC may

incorporate conditions, while granting

consents or authorizations to the

TSDF/HW incinerator operators.


complied with.


Monitoring protocol as suggested in Annexure V

will be followed

5.3

After evaluation of performance of the

TSDFs in the respective State/UT, a

brief report needs to be submitted in the

prescribed format (Annexure - VI) to

CPCB and a copy of report endorsed to

MoEF by all the SPCBs and PCCs

within a month.


5.4

Incompatible wastes should not be

stored together in the same shed by the

operator of the TSDF. A general criteria

for compatibility of selected hazardous

waste is given at Annexure -VII, as

guideline. While storing or mixing of

incinerable wastes for optimizing the

feed, compatibility of the wastes has to


complied with.

Proper storage of hazardous waste will be done as

per guidelines.

Compatibility of the wastes will be tested before

storing or preparation of feed for incineration.






be taken into consideration and tested.

5.5

A scheme for financial support to the

SPCBs and PCCs for carrying out

performance evaluation of the TSDFs in

line with the financial support being

provided for monitoring of ambient air

quality, surface water quality may be

evolved by MoEF, if found feasible.


5.6

Measures may be taken for putting in

place an online tracking system for

movement of the hazardous waste from

generators to the final disposal so as to

ensure safe disposal of hazardous waste

in the Country.

Contents of para 5.6 are duly noted & will be

complied with.

GPS enabled vehicles will be put to use for

transportation of hazardous waste from generators

to the final disposal facility

5.

All the TSDF operators should be asked

to strengthen and upgrade the existing

laboratories, so as to carry out the

monitoring and analysis of all required

parameters and all the TSDF operators

have to obtain Laboratory Accreditation

as per Environment (Protection) Act,

1986 and strive hard to obtain

accreditation as ISO 17025 through

NABL system in a time bound manner.

Contents of para 5.7 are duly noted & will be

complied with.

A well equipped analytical laboratory for

monitoring and analysis of all required parameters

will be established in the facility.

Accreditation as per EPA, 1986 & ISO 17025

through NABL system will be taken.

5.8

The protocol may be reviewed after

three years in the first instance and

thereafter every five years.

Contents of para 5.8 are duly noted.

**********

³common hazardous waste incinerator & other waste treatment...

Documents